by A.K. Aruna
First Print Mar 2011 (ISBN 978-0-9818640-0-6)
First Update to HTML Mar 2018 with Creative Commons International License:
This work is licensed under the Creative Commons Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 4.0 International License. To view a copy of this license, visit http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-sa/4.0/, or click the following logo:
Nārāyaṇaṃ namaskṛtya naram caiva narottamam.
Devīṃ sarasvatīṃ caiva tato jayam udīrayet.
Bowing to Lord Nārāyaṇa (Kṛṣṇa), and to Nara, the best of men (Arjuna), and to the Goddess (of knowledge) Sarasvatī, may one now commence the (epic) Jaya (‘Victory’).
Go to Top ('Home' key on many Windows browsers)
Abbreviation Meanings | |
---|---|
a. or adj. | adjective(s) |
abl. | ablative |
acc. | accusative |
act. | active |
adv. | adverb |
aor. | aorist (tense) |
॰– | as first member |
–॰ | as second member |
aspir. or asp. | aspiration |
आ॰ or Ā. | Ātmanaipada |
aug. | augment |
b/4 | before |
bene. | benedictive |
cereb. | cerebral |
cf. | compare |
ch. | chapter |
→ | changes to |
cj. | conjunction |
cmpd. | compound |
conj. | conjugation |
conj. cons. | conjunct consonant(s) |
cons. | consonant(s) |
corr. | correlative |
cpv. | comparative |
cs. | causal |
dat. | dative |
decl. | declension(s) |
den. | denominative(s) |
dent. | dental |
des. | desiderative |
∆ | difference |
diph. | diphthong |
du. | dual(s) |
encl. | enclitic |
esp. | especially |
ex. | except |
f. or fem. | feminine(s) |
fin. | final (vowel or consonant) |
fr. | from |
fut. | future |
fut. pt. | future participle (active) |
gen. | genitive |
gram. | grammar |
gutt. | guttural(s) |
impf. | imperfect |
impv. | imperative |
in. | indeclinable |
in. pt. | indeclinable participle |
inf. | infinitive |
init. | initial (letter) |
inst. | instrumental |
intens. | intensive(s) |
interj. | interjection(s) |
irreg. | irregular |
labi. | labial |
loc. | locative |
m. or masc. | masculine(s) |
med. | medial (vowel) |
mid. | middle (Ātmanaipada) |
n. or neut. | neuter(s) |
nom. | nominative |
num. | numeral |
opt. | optional(ly) |
orig. | originally |
palat. | palatal |
पर॰, Par. or P. | Parasmaipada |
pt. | participle(s) |
pcl. | particle(s) |
ps. | passive |
past act. pt. | past active participle |
pp. | past participle (passive) |
perf. | perfect (tense) |
peri. | periphrastic |
pl. | plural |
poss. | possibly |
poss. prn. | possessive pronoun |
pot. | potential (mood) |
pot. ps. pt. | potential passive participle |
prep. | preposition(s) |
pr. | present |
pr. pt. | present participle (active) |
pr. mid. pt. | present middle participle |
pri. | primary |
prn. | pronoun |
prn. a. | pronominal adjective |
redup. | reduplicated/reduplication |
redup. perf. pt. | reduplicated perfect participle (active) |
reflex. | reflexive |
rel. | relative |
resp. | respective(ly) |
√ | root |
s. | strong |
s.f. | stem final |
sec. | secondary |
semiv. | semivowel(s) |
sibi. | sibilant(s) |
sg. | singular |
spv. | superlative |
suff. | suffix(es) |
term. | termination(s) |
∴ | therefore |
voc. | vocative |
vow. | vowel(s) |
w. | weak |
w/ | with |
w/wo | with or without |
Go to Top ('Home' key on many Windows browsers)
Pronouns …
Prepositional adverbs, participles, nouns …
Adverbs formed with suffixes …
Definite and indefinite articles …
Number …
Pronouns …
Locative and genitive absolute …
Glossary …
Index …
Go to Top ('Home' key on many Windows browsers)
Using this book
This book provides the succinct grammar rules and structures for the Sanskrit language. If you are unfamiliar with Sanskrit grammar and wish to learn how to understand and apply these rules and structures for reading Sanskrit, please get the companion book, The Aruna Sanskrit Grammar Coursebook: 64 Lessons Based on the Bhagavad Gita Chapter Two by this author. The Aruna Coursebook and the Grammar Reference are designed to work together and are fully cross-referenced [•Note: If you are reading this from the Online web pages (http://upasanayoga.org/AKAruna/docs/AKA-Index.htm#Grammar), all these ‘Books’ or their equivalents are available there online and free as HTML files•]. To start this course of learning to read Sanskrit, begin with the Aruna Coursebook, which will assign specific sections of rules from this grammar book. In following all the lessons in the Aruna Coursebook, you will cover the entire grammar in this book and be able to fluently read with understanding the second chapter of the Bhagavad Gita in its original Sanskrit.
To go even further into the study of Sanskrit so that you can completely read and understand the entire Bhagavad Gita, get the full set of The Aruna Sanskrit Language Series, of which this Grammar Reference and the Aruna Coursebook are the initial texts. The design and benefit of this series will be fully explained below within the context of Sanskrit and the methods of learning this language using The Aruna Sanskrit Language Series. This series is discribed below.
Introduction to Sanskrit
Sanskrit is a living language with ancient Vedic roots. Here I am using the term “living language” in its obvious sense – that it is still existing, still spoken, still studied, still communicative (and not just descriptive of what once was), and at least in one most highly desirable and non-academic area of study, namely, the Vedanta studied by people who newly come to its study to this day in the hundreds or thousands every year, is an irreplaceable medium for its full appreciation.
Recent archeological and related studies, just now scratching the surface, are seeing some indications of what could be described as the Vedic culture in the Indus-Saraswati civilization at its first urban development peak between 2600 to 1900 B.C. and its antecedent development in the same area starting at least eight thousand years ago including the large settlement of Mehrgarh (168 acres, one-quarter sq. mi., in 5000 B.C. – by many times the largest Neolithic settlement of its time in the world). The sites linked to this civilization over time are spread over one million square kilometers (the largest of any ancient civilization in the East, West or New World) – from eastern Afghanistan to the Ganges River and from the Himalaya mountains to the Godavari River in West-central India (an area nearly as large as the states of California and Texas together), with over 2,600 sites and more being found on a regular basis.
Unlike other cultures and civilizations that have come and gone within history, this civilization has been amazingly stable for an enormous period of time and has developed a very rich and deep tradition. There naturally occurred population shifts over this vast time period. Its first great cities, such as Mahenjo-Daro on the Indus River, Harappa on the Ravi River, and others were abandoned by 1900 B.C. Because the Indian sub-continent, due to continental drift, was slowly colliding into the Asian continent, there were massive land displacements and several of the rivers frequently shifted course, leaving barren once fertile banks. The greatest problem, however, was the complete drying up of the major Saraswati River along whose banks the largest bulk of the settlements have been found – likely due to the redirection of its feeder rivers as a result of the reshaping of the Himalayan headwater landscape. In addition there was a desertification of this vast area over time with prolonged drought between 2200-1900 B.C. throughout the whole of West and South Asia.
As a result, the portion of this urban-based civilization within the affected area over time, family by family, picked up its roots and migrated mostly into the fertile Ganges River plains in village-size settlements, bringing their cultural riches with them. These people, along with the portions of the civilization outside of this affected area, eventually emerged transparently into the India of today. With other ancient cultures, displacements of this magnitude would have destroyed the central culture, but, with its traditions maintained by strong, individual families dedicated to preserving its cultural treasures, their core literature has survived to this day, and is many times more extensive than that of any other ancient civilization.
The traditions of this civilization has been and still are being passed on to succeeding generations through oral transmission, and recently now augmented with printed text. The earliest form of this tradition that has survived is its collection of sacred hymns, which originally existed as separate hymns scattered among many families who had preserved them. These hymns were subsequently compiled and edited into the four books of the Vedas. That compilation is traditionally held to be done by a group of scholars headed by a man called Vyasa. Vyasa is also traditionally ascribed to be the author (maybe the compiler, editor and contributor of the various stories) of the great epic called the Mahabharata (or at least the initial stage of the epic – likely called Jaya meaning “Victory”). Within this epic is the jewel called the Bhagavad Gita, a work of 700 verses consisting of a dialogue between the Lord-incarnate Krishna and the warrior prince Arjuna at the start of a great war. Vyasa is also a participant in the Mahabharata story, and his name is mentioned twice in the Bhagavad Gita itself.
The Mahabharata centers on a great war said to have been fought thirty-five years before the beginning of the Kaliyuga, the last and declining age of the four cyclical ages. The Kaliyuga commenced by one calendar in 3102 B.C. Elsewhere, with support in the Puranas, the war was said to have been fought in 2449 B.C. A third view expressed in the Puranas “assumes that a total of 1,050 years elapsed between the time of Parikshit (Arjuna’s grandson) and Mahapadma Nanda’s rule,” which would place the war around 1500 B.C. This later date coincides with the recent datings of the underwater ruins of the ancient port city of Dwaraka (1700-1600 B.C.) from where Krishna came; somewhat coincides with B. B. Lal’s archeological dating of the apparent oldest layer of Hastinapura, a central city of the Mahabharata, to the Painted Gray Ware phase between 1100 and 800 B.C.; and also generally fits with the post-resettlement period of the Vedic people moving from the Saraswati River, which had dried up by 1900 B.C., eastward to the fertile Ganges River basin, the geographical site of the Mahabharata story. The Mahabharata, like the Puranas, is a popularization of the teachings of the Vedas and the Vedic traditions, and the Bhagavad Gita best summarizes that vision of the core teaching.
This set of books, called The Aruna Sanskrit Language Series, revolves around the Bhagavad Gita to teach the Sanskrit language and to expose the student to the core tradition of the culture in which this language flourished. The Bhagavad Gita is the most accessible prime example of the depth of cultural heritage that has allowed Indian culture to survive many times longer than any other culture of the past or present.
The origins of Sanskrit
Many scholars, even till today, are slow in accepting the Indus-Saraswati civilization, also called the Harappian or the Indus Valley civilization, as the oldest known appearance of Vedic culture or Vedic literature and language. These things take time to be assimilated and accepted. Many of these scholars are beholding to a great deal of investment by themselves, their teachers, the institutions they work under, their funding sources, their nation’s empire builders, and even their religion in the so-called Aryan invasion theory and its varients, which claim the soon-to-be authors of the Vedas invaded, or at least migrated, into the Northwest Indian sub-continent around 1500 B.C. from parts unknown, but widely speculated from anywhere except the Indian sub-continent itself.
Now indeed there is, so far, little direct physical evidence that the Indus-Saraswati civilization was in fact Vedic; however, there is no direct evidence that it was not Vedic. The reason it appears to be Vedic is that there is at least some exemplary evidence for it, it can as well alternatively explain away the minimal and now largely discredited evidentiary claims of the invasion theorists, and it better fits what the Veda and supporting Purana and Epic literature itself tell us.
Who better to turn to than the authors of the main evidence in question? The many authors within the Veda, with little dispute by scholars, describe the homeland of their ancestors as none other than the Indus-Saraswati area, and they make no claims of them or their ancestors having invaded from or lived elsewhere. Plus the Purana and Epic literature confirm and in fact voluminously expound on this one homeland theme, quite out of tune with the supposed nomadic Aryan invaders, who were the imagined authors of the Vedas by the theorists. Some may claim that the Purana and Epic literature is myth, but they are myth intermeshed with historical fact. For example, Dwaraka, the supposed legendary home of our story’s hero Krishna said to have been submerged shortly after Krishna’s death in the Mahabharata, was recently found underwater extending out 700 meters off shore of present day Dwaraka. This ancient city was a thriving sea-port on the broad delta near where the Saraswati River would have emptied into the Arabian Sea. Its underwater ruins and relics date to 1700-1600 B.C. This date has to be reconciled with the fact that the archaeological evidence shows that Dwaraka, the home of the eminent “Arya” Krishna, was a late development of the Indus-Saraswati civilization, that the city is located over 600 km south from the center of the civilization around the middle of the Saraswati river, that the Sanskrit spoken by Krishna in the Mahabharata is a much later development from the Sanskrit of the Vedas, and also that Dwaraka is a “recent” city first mentioned only in the Mahabharata, which postdates the Vedas, the Ramayana epic and many of the Puranas.
Now these are people natively gifted with tremendous memories. That is why we still have a vast amount of their literature today after many thousands of years, and better preserved than any comparable literature from anywhere else in the world that is more than even a couple hundred years old. Moreover, the vast bulk of their literature is spent in tracing their origin back to its divine source, so they were far from indifferent to recounting their past. Greek ambassadors to India told the Greek historians Pliny and Arrian of a list of 154 Indian kings reported to go back to 6676 B.C. Moreover, the archeologically supported population shift from the Saraswati River area to the Ganges River area is also clearly reflected in the differences of the geographic descriptions present in the Veda from those in the later Brahmana and Purana literature. This shows that their literature did indeed reflect their history. That these people could have collectively forgotten their roots, forgotten from wherever else they supposedly came from, within, by most scholars reckoning, a matter of a few hundred years from the supposed invasion (1500 B.C.) and the supposed time (1200 B.C.) of the initial compositions of the Veda literature, is itself a self-contradicting, if not preposterous, supposition that the invasionist scholars must swallow.
Admitting that the old archeological studies, or rather their interpretations, used to prop up the invasion theory are shaky, some current scholars now rely on the matching old linguistic studies to keep the origin of the Vedic culture, or at least the source of the Vedic language, out of the geographical area of the Vedas. Linguistics shows how languages may be interlinked in their developments or may be broadly categorized as belonging to agrarian or pastoral cultures, but the science of linguistics has no tools to address the problem of locating any language in a geographical area at a point in time – only archeology can do this. Linguistics at best can be used to rationalize an already assumed geographical dispersion of a group, or family, of languages.
Now, if human beings never move from their homeland and if language developed in only one place on earth and spread neighbor to neighbor from there, then linguistics alone, with knowledge of the geographical constraints within the area in question, could offer theories to where and how the language might have dispersed over time – but such is not the case. Human history is far too complicated for linguistic theory to claim the equal of a single concrete archeological fact. It should not be surprising then that by geographically locating the Vedic language and culture in the Indus-Saraswati area a couple, or several, thousand years before 1500 B.C. and given the convincing facts that there were extensive contacts by sea and over land between these people and the rest of the old world, that this gives more than enough time for linguistic theory to equally, or better, explain how that civilization’s language influenced and was influenced by other languages scattered throughout Central Asia, Middle East and Europe – especially since the archeological evidence of these other languages in other areas date so far at the earliest to around 3000 B.C., allowing more than enough time for this interaction to have taken effect by then.
The most likely scenario, which will forever remain unproven because systematic writing appears to be a recent invention and an ephemeral relic, is that groups of humans have separately initiated oral languages, some more complex than other, for tens, if not hundreds, of thousands of years, and have been exchanging these languages, in part and in total, through inter-marriage, migration, conquest, travel, trade and other cultural contacts from pre-historic times. That there is a similarity between languages within a geographically linked area as Euro-Asia should surprise no one, nor should it prove that there then had to have been some one mysterious nomadic tribe sprinkling its sole invention to the illiterate masses. Such an adamant fancy for the belief in a single, literate nomadic tribe befits only one who has an ulterior motive for its promulgation, as has been apply evidenced and admitted in the case of India by the European colonizers of India, the original inventors of the theory.
The current reluctance of some Western and Indian scholars of today to impartially re-appraise the frailty and self-promoting circularity of the theory may rest not only on the investment reasons mentioned above, but even on their vehemence, for whatever reason, against what many call “Hindutva,” the current revival of the core religion of India – viewing the loss of this theory as some kind of victory for the so-called “Hindutva crowd.”
Such is no excuse for not coming to grips with the facts as they present themselves. The fact is, the Vedas, the Puranas and the Epics, which form the basis of what they called Sanatana Dharma and is now called Hinduism, uniformly present their culture and language as beginningless. That the core of this tradition, the Vedas, are maintained unmanifest through the mechanism of karma and later reintroduced to mankind (once they have the language to receive it) in succeeding creation cycles each lasting billions of years, again and again – in current terminology, big-bang after big-bang. Those who appreciate and own up to this heritage would see no “victory” in pushing back this cultural heritage’s so-called origins just a few thousand years within this present cycle. Religious and anti-religious sentiments, as well as politics, indeed play a role in directing or misdirecting the search for historical truth, but not in establishing the truth.
A more fruitful and less speculative and contentious approach in this area may be to look at the movement of peoples within this region in the distant past, since migration and inter-marriage would have played at least some concrete role in the movement of cultures and languages. This is now possible with archaeogenetic evidence using genetic analysis. These studies have already been started and may in the future clear up some misconceptions in these regards.
For further information about this topic, start with either of the two books: The Invasion That Never Was by Michael Danino or In Search Of The Cradle Of Civilization by Feuerstein, Kak and Frawley. Their thought-provoking books will refer you to the available source materials on the subject. For a presentation by a top scholar in the archeological field on this topic see The Saraswati Flows On: the Continuity of Indian Culture by B.B. Lal.
Vedic Sanskrit versus Classical Sanskrit
Within the Vedic literature that has survived can be noticed subtle changes in grammatical forms and their usage from the earliest hymns to the concluding Upanishads (Vedanta). Various dialects and grammars of the language flourished in different regions and at different times within this Vedic period. Subsequent to the Vedic literature and Vyasa, grammar became formalized under Panini who lived at least two thousand years ago, and possibly even much earlier. Panini wrote a definitive grammar called the Panini Sutras, the oldest surviving grammatical work in the world. This work was so complete and influential that prior Sanskrit grammars, of which no fewer than sixty-four of their authors were mentioned, disappeared. The language had thus become formalized and has remained, for the most part, grammatically unchanged to the present – although some scholars have argued that the Sanskrit literature since the Vedic period, and even since Panini, has over time “suffered” a decline in grammatical richness.
A few language scholars claim that this apparent grammatically frozen nature of Sanskrit means it became a dead language. This is synonymous to saying a youth who has reached puberty, after which there is no further significant changes, except decline into old age, is “dead.” If it can be argued that English, or any other national or international language, is currently losing grammatical precision or richness, does this mean that that language is now “dead?”
Others may try to resuscitate the claim by saying that what they mean by “dead” is that it is no longer a language “commonly” used. However this claim suffers in at least two ways. The first is that they can offer no one number of speakers of a language that could reasonably quantify what “commonly” means, which would disqualify Sanskrit now as a “living language,” yet retain many other accepted living languages of the present or of the past spoken in certain areas or by certain tribes of people all over the world throughout history. Secondly, if “commonly” means predominately used throughout the daily life of its speakers, or, in other words, it is living when people choose to converse and formulate ideas in it in preference to any other, then they would have to prove that Sanskrit was ever the predominate daily language of its speakers, after which it became non-predominate and hence “dead” according to them. But what scholars of the language know of its history is that is was from earliest times always described as one of several languages known to its speakers, just like in present day India where most people are multi-lingual, changing the language to suit the listener or the situation.
Sanskrit was employed in several ways, such as for technical treatises, including scriptural treatises, where precision of expression is of utmost importance, for the language of the royal court, for the many daily rituals that occupied a substantial amount of the peoples time, and for a common language among a diverse linguistic audience. There are many different types of languages that are not the predominant language of anyone, such as legal language, various computer languages, mathematical languages, signal, code and sign languages, etc. These specialized languages we may call “dead” once they are no longer employed or known by anyone, but such is not the case with Sanskrit, of which quite a large number of people are currently skilled to varying degrees. I would venture to guess that more people are currently as skilled in Sanskrit, as those who are equally skilled in most any one of these other specialized languages, even though they are all simpler to learn than Sanskrit. In other words, “dead” just does not appear to be an objective, valid description of the language you are attempting to learn today. Now if “dead” is a valuation term meaning “useless”, then the fact that you are interested in this book shows, at least to your own satisfaction, that Sanskrit is not a dead language.
Whatever the status or stage of the language now, most call the earlier form of the Sanskrit language found in the Vedas as “Vedic Sanskrit” and the form of the language that conforms to Paninian grammar as “classical Sanskrit.” In this book, the grammar described is of the later, referred herein as simply Sanskrit.
If Panini wrote the definitive grammar book, then why are we offering this work?
Panini’s Sutras are in Sanskrit, so, if you don’t know the language and you wish to learn it, the Sutras themselves can’t help. Additionally, Panini himself addressed his grammatical work to those who were already familiar with the Sanskrit language and even speakers of that language, much like grammar is taught in all modern languages today to children who already are speakers of the language. Moreover, the Sutras are extremely brief, like mathematical expressions, requiring extensive enfoldment by a scholar of the language. Existing scholarly commentaries are available, but they are also in Sanskrit. So eventually you are driven to finding a teacher for these Sutras. There are many available, but being totally dependent upon the teacher for this study, you must commit many years of regular study with that teacher. Moreover, the Sutras themselves are extremely analytical and exhaustive on each topic throughout, so you cannot cut short this period of study and still get a broad enough grammatical basis to understand the language.
To address these issues many ancillary works are employed by teachers of the Sutras. These include a commentary on the Sutras, a book on verbal roots and their paradigm formations in verbal usage, a book on words and their paradigm formations into nominal and adjectival usages, a book of synonyms for basic vocabulary, a Sanskrit reader or examples from literature, sometimes (lately) a general Sanskrit dictionary, and often a simplified primer or handouts on some basic grammar topics. The problem with this massive collection is that a tremendous memory is required to retain and meld it, their vocabularies don’t match and the separate books don’t cross-reference or complement each other. Finally, this total package is best designed for a usage of the language that few beginning students will ever employ, namely to be full users of the language – readers, writers and speakers. Whereas, the vast majority of these students will only be readers of the Sanskrit language – quite a simpler skill.
Colleges in the West, and high schools and colleges in India, where a more limited length of study is available, solve this by employing Western style grammar books and usually a Sanskrit reader or examples from literature, along with the obligatory dictionary. Here the problem is not so much the method, but the materials provided.
The Sanskrit to English dictionaries for students that are chosen most in India are poorly printed editions that makes their use very frustrating. The readable dictionaries are expensive, and most are too complicated for the beginning student. The later also contain a mixture of Devanagari and English transliterated Sanskrit text that lowers their usability and hinders memory retention of what was just looked up.
The Sanskrit readers or examples from literature have little connection with the vocabulary, contents, or layout of the grammar book. Grammar books are of two styles – lesson style and reference style. Some lesson style grammars don’t complete the full spectrum of grammar necessary for a reading proficiency to go beyond their simple lesson sentences. Others provide too many grammar rules for beginning students, such as giving a grammar rule for isolated, individual forms that the student is never likely to encounter and would be better off just having the finished form of the word as a vocabulary entry. In other words, they admittedly are meant to prep the student to pass some final exam, rather than providing him or her with just enough to enjoy reading Sanskrit. Their vocabulary and practice sentences are sometimes offensive to Indian culture, reflecting the ruling British attitude of their day, or are geared towards children, or are collections of statements out of context that make them too difficult to understand and may even distort the culture as it sees itself. They therefore have little application to the literature a mature adult would want to read today. These lessons also break up the layout of the grammar and force the presentation order of the grammar to fit the lesson sentences, so that the grammar itself is disjointed and not nearly as effective as a unified, logical presentation would be.
Most of these grammar texts are not well printed, making them difficult to read and unnecessarily frustrating to the beginning student. The reference style grammar texts are mostly around 100 years old. They employ a Devanagari script, and/or an English transliterated script, of Sanskrit that contains a handful of archaic characters that are no longer used in printed texts. Several employ so much transliterated text – pandering too much to their students more interested in linguistic theories – that the student who simply wants to be able to read Sanskrit texts cannot relate it well to the literature in the Devanagari script with which he or she is faced. Practically all of them try to mimic or recreate every rule and exemption to the rule given in the major commentaries to Panini.
The best of the reference style grammars is Arthur Macdonell’s A Sanskrit Grammar for Students, a very well planned, logical, and especially concise presentation. I have based the following grammar on its best elements.
Lately there have cropped up teach yourself books. A perusal of them clearly shows that they present way too little grammar, and the grammar they present is usually so drowned in English prose explanations that the point of each topic is forgotten as the student turns the pages. Those books that don’t overwhelm the student with explanations fail in not explaining enough, or even any, of the grammar. They also employ too much of their Sanskrit text in English transliterated script, instead of the native Devanagari script, leaving the student ill prepared to even begin reading any useful or interesting Sanskrit text. There is one Indian teach yourself booklet series that uses the Devanagari script throughout by Dr. Pandit S. D. Satwalekar called Sanskrit Self Teacher. It avoids most problems of its genre, but its grammar presentation suffers many of the problems of the other lesson-style grammar books. I have based The Aruna Coursebook on its best elements.
Why is this series better for learning Sanskrit? And to whom is this work intended?
Why it is better is best addressed by describing the intended student. Firstly, if you are an Indian with a typical good memory for language, have an initial Sanskrit vocabulary provided by your native language and culture, and are young and have many years for study under a teacher, or are older and have the leisure time to study under a teacher for even more years, then use the Paninian method. This method has over thousands of years of perfection and can take you as far as you want to go in Sanskrit. However, if you are not one of the above or are one of the above and are older, you just might want to employ this work first. It will quickly get you to where you can experience the enjoyment of reading Sanskrit before undergoing the admitted stress of in-depth Paninian study. And it will get you to the proficiency in reading Sanskrit that Panini would have expected from his beginning students.
More important to many of these types of students, as well as to others, will be the accomplishment of knowing in great depth the Bhagavad Gita, the finest teaching on reality available anywhere in any language. The course should take from one to four years of daily attendance, depending on your starting background and the quality of effort put forth. This is a serious, academic work, even though in a self-teacher format, meant to provide the equivalent of two years of college-level Sanskrit study. You are encouraged to study two to three hours daily – short of this, it will take you longer to get through the material. The first one to two hours is (eventually) stress-free, daily reading of the Bhagavad Gita text. This practice has the added benefit of giving you a tremendous familiarity, if not memorization of the text. At the completion of the course you will know the Gita in the original better than any translation ever made, and that knowledge of Sanskrit and the Gita will be where it should be – in your head, instead of still in a book.
The intended audience for these books ranges from the very beginning Sanskrit student to the advanced student wanting technical details and explanations on the Bhagavad Gita, and includes the non-Sanskritist who is willing to wade through a little Sanskrit in order to clearly know the Bhagavad Gita and its mature Vedic vision.
The Aruna Sanskrit Language Series
The first title in The Aruna Sanskrit Language Series is The Aruna Sanskrit Grammar Reference. The Grammar Reference follows the reference style presentation of grammar. This will provide a logical, consistent and complete exposition of the grammar for reading-only proficiency. The grammar uses minimal wording and presents the material in outline and chart form as much as possible to maximize your visual memory of the information. This method also greatly assists review and re-review of the grammar, necessary to master the subject. Several of the charts have multiple forms within them that demonstrate simple, easy to remember patterns which are overlooked by many grammar books. This helps you to also logically remember the information. The grammar is presented in the Western style, which emphasizes analytic, reading skills, as opposed to the more difficult composition and speaking skills. As much as possible, the examples in the book are taken from the Bhagavad Gita, so your targeted vocabulary builds quickly.
The second title in The Aruna Sanskrit Language Series is The Aruna Sanskrit Grammar Coursebook: 64 Lessons Based on the Bhagavad Gita Chapter Two. The exercise in the first lesson of the Aruna Coursebook directs the student to the Script Reading Exercise, given in its appendix. This section provides the complete Bhagavad Gita second chapter in large-print Sanskrit with transliteration using the English alphabet under each line, followed with the entire chapter again with only the large-print Sanskrit to test your progress. The text and transliteration are broken down in two separate ways to show the separate syllables and then the individual words, thus progressively showing the student the proper methodology for correctly pronouncing the original Sanskrit text. This section should provide all the necessary practice material for the student to learn the Sanskrit script – essential for proceeding through the rest of this work and any other Sanskrit work. For students who need help in pronunciation of Sanskrit words, I highly advise finding a teacher, a friend or someone in your community who will surprise you with their readiness to assist you – knowledge of Sanskrit and its literature seems to nurture this helpful attitude. These people need not know the meaning of all the Sanskrit words, but they can read the Sanskrit script. Additionally, a tape or CD of the Bhagavad Gita is available through the Arsha Vidya Gurukulam (www.arshavidya.org).
An alternative help for this Script Reading Exercise is the specially developed Sanskrit Reading Tutor: Read It, Click It, Hear It!, a uniquely formatted PDF file that has the alphabet sections from the Grammar Reference plus the Script Reading Exercise of the Grammar Coursebook. The special feature of the PDF is that one can click on any of the characters in the alphabet section to hear its pronunciation, and on any of the individual lines, quarter verses, or their syllables of Script Reading Exercise to hear their pronunciation. In this way one can have each of these script elements individually re-read to you over and over while you are seeing the script on your screen – a unique and invaluable tool for learning the script and its pronunciation.
The rest of the lessons in the Aruna Coursebook give a relatively quick overview of the entire Grammar Reference – its layout, its methodology and how its grammar rules are to be understood. Enough explanation with little redundancy is provided to explain the outlined and charted grammar presented in the Grammar Reference so that you can learn on your own with little or no assistance from a teacher, assuming you can apply a post-high school aptitude towards this work.
The examples and exercises in the Aruna Coursebook are drawn from the second chapter of the Bhagavad Gita, which is taught completely in prose format, then finally in verse format. In the Aruna Coursebook, vocabulary is presented by giving the English meaning of the individual words, their grammar and also their contextual use within expressions from the Gita. This should make it very easy to learn the vocabulary. By teaching the vocabulary of the verses in a consistent Sanskrit prose order, which is syntactically based, the student gains a quicker grasp of Sanskrit syntax. All exercise expressions and sentences are taken directly from the Gita – no extraneous material is presented. These words, expressions and sentences are repeated throughout the Aruna Coursebook in the lessons and exercises to assist your memory; nothing is taken for granted as you progress through the Aruna Coursebook. All the examples and lessons are cross-referenced to their specific verses in the Gita, so the context and the English translation given therein will provide an answer-key and guide for the student’s work.
After knowing the prose order of all the verses of the second chapter, the student is then introduced to the analysis of verses so that he or she can quickly and confidently see the meaning of the Bhagavad Gita verses directly. Concepts presented in the Gita are expounded, so that non-Indian and Indian students alike can appreciate the depth of discussion within the Gita.
The Aruna Coursebook forms a four to twelve month full-time course in itself, depending on the effort put forth and any previous exposure to this language or familiarity with other languages that may have affinity to the Sanskrit language. At the completion of The Aruna Coursebook you will be familiar with the entire range of Sanskrit grammar for reading proficiency and be able to sight read with understanding all the verses of the second chapter of the Bhagavad Gita, which briefly presents the entire teaching of the Gita.
The third title in The Aruna Sanskrit Language Series is The Bhagavad Gita Dictionary. This is a Sanskrit to Sanskrit and English dictionary of the entire Bhagavad Gita. Many entries include reference citations to grammatical rules for their peculiar formations presented in Grammar Reference. The derivation of many words is included as appropriate. The entries also provide Sanskrit synonyms and/or meanings, plus contextual Sanskrit analysis of compound words, so that your vocabulary builds beyond the Gita with each use. The goal of this vocabulary building is to encourage you to start to think in Sanskrit while you read Sanskrit – a multiplying effect that greatly enhances learning and builds the skills necessary to progress to Panini and the full grasp of the Sanskrit language, if you so choose.
The fourth title in The Aruna Sanskrit Language Series is The Bhagavad Gita Reader: Sanskrit/English Parallel Text, consisting of all eighteen chapters of the Bhagavad Gita. It presents on each left-hand page the Gita verses, then on the opposing page the same verses in easier to understand prose order and an English translation of those verses, in columnar format.
The purpose of this section and its design is three-fold. First, you are instructed to read Gita verses daily. Reading skills are encouraged and developed so that you can read Sanskrit text as effortlessly as your native language. By reading down each of the respective pages, the student can quickly read either the original verses, the prose version, or the English rendering – as well as relate these three by reading across the opposing pages. Later understanding of what you are reading follows and is greatly enhanced by this exercise.
Secondly, the prose presentation of the verses quickly brings you to an understanding of the meaning of the verses, well before the difficult skill of unraveling the grammar packed into verse form. Breaking with tradition, all words in the prose are grammatically split apart, helping you see the individual words with their full grammatical form. Interspersed in the prose in parentheses are additional Sanskrit words necessary to help you comprehend the meaning and context of certain words, and to understand the not-so-obvious references of certain pronouns found in some verses.
Thirdly, the English translation is given out-of-the-way in its own column to de-emphasize your dependence on English as a medium for understanding Sanskrit. This translation doubles as a quick answer-key to the Aruna Coursebook exercises, which are all cross-referenced to the matching verses. Additionally, contextual explanation is added in parentheses so as not to mislead the reader into confusing editorial commentary with the actual translation. This is a feature sorely lacking in existing translations that I have come across. Certain Sanskrit words that have a depth of technical and cultural meaning packed into them, or intentionally have multiple meanings, are well explained in the Aruna Coursebook and in The Bhagavad Gita Dictionary. After being initially translated, the original Sanskrit word is then used in the English translation of the following verses and is clarified, if necessary, only in parenthetical commentary. This makes for better readability of the translation, during this language study and especially after this study – once you realize that there are no equivalent, concise expressions in English for certain Sanskrit words, nor need they be manufactured.
The fifth title in The Aruna Sanskrit Language Series is The Bhagavad Gita Sanskrit Key: Verse-by-Verse Grammar & Vocabulary. The Gita Key also can be used as a quick answer-key to the Aruna Coursebook exercises. By collecting the vocabularies together, this becomes a marvelous tool to study the grammar, syntax and meaning of the verses of the entire Bhagavad Gita.
The Aruna Sanskrit Language Series was arranged for the following reasons. The Grammar Reference and the Aruna Coursebook are meant to stand together as an introduction to Sanskrit, without needing the other three books. If the student wants to proceed in this learning of the Bhagavad Gita, then minimally the Gita Key is also required. The Gita Dictionary was separated from the other books as it is more convenient to have a separate dictionary that can be opened as a reference for the Aruna Coursebook, Gita Reader, and Gita Key, or as a reference tool apart from this series. If one is not interested in learning Sanskrit grammar and can read the Sanskrit script, yet wants to know the Bhagavad Gita and how its meaning is arrived, then just the Gita Key will more or less suffice, though its thousands of grammar rule references require the Grammar Reference. If one simply wants a very good translation of the Bhagavad Gita and can read the Sanskrit script, then the Gita Reader is complete in itself. If you cannot read the Sanskrit script, but still want to see this same good translation, then see this author’s The Bhagavad Gita: Victory Over Grief and Death. It has the same English translation of the entire Bhagavad Gita within it, with the number of Sanskrit words, in transliteration, retained in the translations greatly reduced from the Gita Reader version.
Although not specifically designed as a classroom text, the various components of this work may be used as an aid or auxiliary to classroom instruction. On the other hand, this work specifically helps those who have students who are interested in learning Sanskrit, but who do not have the time, materials or expertise to teach the subject themselves, yet can act as an occasional or regular coach for these students.
If the reader is already familiar with or knowledgeable in Sanskrit, then this series provides the benefits of a quick but thorough reference guide to the grammar of written Sanskrit for personal or teaching purposes, and an in-depth analysis of each word, each compound-word, each sentence, and each topic of the Bhagavad Gita – in accordance with the ancient core tradition, free from any new-age accretion. Therefore nothing stands between you and the original text. You will understand in English, what Arjuna heard in Sanskrit from Lord Krishna.
Go to Top ('Home' key on many Windows browsers)
The Sounds in the Sanskrit Language
1.1: The script. Saṃskṛta is the actual name of the language, but commonly is called by the Anglicized Hindi word Sanskrit. Today, Saṃskṛta is generally written in the Devanāgarī script, although some texts employ a regional script; for example, a version of the Tamil script in the southern state of Tamil Nadu. The Devanāgarī script itself has varied over time (even within the past century). The character formations used in this book are the current standard. The Devanāgarī alphabet consists of 48 characters, for the basic 13 vowel and 35 consonant sounds.
1.2: The sounds. The ancient grammarian Pāṇani recognized all 48 of the Saṃskṛta sounds and scientifically grouped them under a number of classifications, depending on the purpose. One classification (listed in 1.3: using Western terminology) is the location of the sound as it is made by the human voice. Another classification is the effort of the contact within the mouth at that location (1.4:).
1.3: The five locations of sound.Guttural | Formed by contact of the base of the tongue against the back of the throat (kaṇṭha). |
Palatal | Formed by contact of the middle of the tongue against the palate (tālu). The tip of the tongue touches near the front palatal ridge (the top of roots of upper front teeth, a half-inch above the top of the teeth). |
Cerebral | Formed by contact of the tip of the tongue against the front of the downward hard dome (the mūrdha) at the middle of the palate. There is no good equivalent of this sound in English. |
Dental | Formed by contact of the tip of the tongue against the base or root of the upper front teeth (danta). |
Labial | Formed by contact of the lips (oṣṭha). |
Touched | The five classes of consonants (k – m in the alphabetical table, 1.5:). |
Slightly Touched | The semivowels (y – v). |
Slightly Open | The sibilants (ś – s), h, visarga (ḥ), and anusvāra (ṃ) (see 1.5: ). |
Open | The vowels except a (ā - au). |
Contracted | The short vowel a. |
Vowels | ||||
---|---|---|---|---|
Initial | Medial | Transit. | Sounds Like | Location |
अ | a | a | o in son | guttural |
आ | ◌ा | ā | o in bottle | |
इ | ि | i | e in be | palatal |
ई | ◌ी | ī | e in bee | |
उ | ◌ु | u | o in move | labial |
ऊ | ◌ू | ū | oo in moon | |
ऋ | ◌ृ | ṛ | rh in rhythm | cerebral |
ॠ | ◌ॄ | ṝ | in rhrhythm | |
ऌ | ◌ॢ | ḷ | le in table | dental |
ए | ◌े | e | a in tape | gutteral-palatal |
ऐ | ◌ै | ai | y in my | |
ओ | ◌ो | o | oe in toe | gutteral-labial |
औ | ◌ौ | au | ow in now | |
Consonants | ||||
Initial or Medial | Transit. | Sounds Like | Location | |
ः b | ḥ | half an h | guttural or labial | |
ं c | ṃ | n in French bon | conforms to preceding vowel | |
क | k | ck in block | guttural | |
ख | kh | ckh in blockhead | ||
ग | g | g in log | ||
घ | gh | gh in log-hut | ||
ङ | ṅ | ng in song | ||
च | c | ch in catch | palatal | |
छ | ch | chh in catch him | ||
ज | j | ge in hedge | ||
झ | jh | geh in hedgehog | ||
ञ | ñ | n in cringe | ||
ट | ṭ | t in hurt | cerebral (1.3:) | |
ठ | ṭh | th in hurt him | ||
ड | ḍ | d in gored | ||
ढ | ḍh | dh in gored him | ||
ण | ṇ | n in corn | ||
त | t | t in cat | dental | |
थ | th | th in cat hair | ||
द | d | d in mad | ||
ध | dh | dh in mad house | ||
न | n | n in numb | ||
प | p | p in loop | labial | |
फ | ph | ph in loop-hole | ||
ब | b | b in rob | ||
भ | bh | bh in rob him | ||
म | m | m in much | ||
य | y | y in young | palatal | |
र | r | r in drama | cerebral | |
ल d | l | l in luck | dental | |
व | v (w) | v in vine / w in Swami e | labial-dental / bilabial | |
श | ś | sh in ship | palatal | |
ष | ṣ | sh in perish | cerebral | |
स | s | s in sit | dental | |
ह f | h | soft h in hum | guttural | |
There is a tendency to slightly aspirate initial mutes, such as “k,” “t,” and “p” in English. In Saṃskṛta, initial nonaspirate mutes (1.9:) are more like these sounds at the end of isolated English words – where the aspiration is mostly cut off. |
a. | Noninitial short अ a has no character, as it is inherent in every consonant from क ka to ह ha. Consonants without any vowel after them are marked below with a stroke slanting left to right ् (called a virāma or halanta), as in क् k. When so written, the consonant is referred to by the term –kāra. For example, क् k is called ककार kakāra and ख् kh is खकार khakāra. Consonants by themselves without either a following or preceding vowel are considered not pronounceable. (We unknowingly admit the same in English. The letter b is pronounced “be,” f as “ef,” etc.) To pronounce each Saṃskṛta consonant in table 1.5:, a final अ a is added (e.g., क is read “ka”, but the description and classification there applies only to क् kakāra). Sometimes when a single consonant (e.g., a mute or न् n 1.9:) is at the end of a word with a pause afterward (e.g., at the end of a sentence), we add a short echo of the preceding vowel. For example, in तत् tat, the अ a is echoed: tata. | |||
b. | Visarga (ः ḥ) never occurs as a word initial. Like other consonants, visarga cannot be pronounced by itself without a preceding vowel; moreover, visarga cannot be joined in writing with a following vowel. Visarga corresponds to the second half (-h) of the hard aspirates ख् k-h, छ् c-h, थ् t-h, and फ् p-h (1.9:). It is usually pronounced from the same position as its preceding vowel – as a short, hard blowing out of the breath. Before the gutturals क् k and ख् kh, the visarga is a guttural – a distinct, hard blowing with constriction at the base of the tongue – and is called jihvāmūlīya. Before the labials प् p and फ् ph, the visarga is a labial and has a distinct bilabial “f” sound called upadhmānīya. When at the end of a word with a pause afterward (e.g., at the end of a sentence), visarga is pronounced as a hard “h” followed by a short echo of the preceding vowel. For example, कृष्णः kṛṣṇaḥ is pronounced kṛṣṇaḥa. When vowel is ऐ ai or औ au, the echo is of the component इ i or उ u (2.3.a:) respectively, e.g. नौः nauḥ (3.41:) is pronounced nauḥu. The optional visarga (before a sibilant, 2.28:) alphabetically occupies the place of the sibilant it replaces and is pronounced as the sibilant. For example, in अन्तःस्थ antaḥstha, the visarga has replaced the sibilant स् s that was in the original अन्तस्स्थ antasstha. | |||
c. | Anusvāra (ं ṃ) never occurs as a word initial. Its pronunciation is like the French nasalization of their vowels. For example, the French word bon in bon voyage would be written and pronounced in Devanāgarī as बां bāṃ. The optional anusvāra (before mutes and the nasals न् n and म् m, 2.55:) alphabetically occupies the place of the class nasal it replaces. For example, compare शंकर śaṃkara and शङ्कर śaṅkara (where anusvāra replaces ङ् ṅ) or – incorrectly (1.10:) – कंपित kaṃpita and कम्पित kampita (where anusvāra replaces the root medial nasal म् m). | |||
d. | ल् l often interchanges with, or is derived from, र् r. | |||
e. | व् v is usually pronounced as a labial-dental “v,” made with the lower lip first slightly touching the upper front teeth. When preceded by a consonant in the same syllable, however, it is pronounced as a bilabial “w.” This has led to the popular transliteration of the conjunct व् v as w in many Saṃskṛta words that were coined in another language. For example, स्वामी should be pronounced and is popularly transliterated as Swāmī, instead of Svāmī, although the latter is technically correct. | |||
f. | ह् h corresponds to and is derived from the second half (-h) of the soft aspirates घ् g-h, झ् j-h, ध् d-h, and भ् b-h (1.9:). It is pronounced from the same position as its following vowel. |
1.6: Writing. When writing Devanāgarī, the distinctive part of each letter, occupying at least two-thirds of the height of the final letter, is normally written first, then the vertical line, and finally the top horizontal line. For example, the syllable त ta is written with three strokes, the last two being the vertical line then the horizontal line. But, write in whatever order works for you. The top horizontal line is usually drawn after the rest of the word or phrase has been written. In fact, it was regularly missing in old manuscripts.
1.7: Writing noninitial vowels. Each vowel is written in a different way, according to whether or not it is initial. There is no sign for the noninitial short अ a (as noted in 1.5.a:). The noninitial short इ i is written before the consonant after which it is pronounced (e.g., कि ki). The rest of the noninitial vowels are written after, below, or above the consonants. An example is the letter क् k with all its vowel signs:
क ka, का kā; कि ki, की kī; कु ku, कू kū; कृ kṛ, कॄ kṝ; कॢ kḷ; के ke, कै kai; को ko, कौ kau.
Certain consonants take certain vowel signs at the side instead of below. They are रु ru, रू rū, and हृ hṛ. When the consonant र् r precedes the vowel ऋ ṛ, it is written as a hook on top of ऋ ṛ (e.g., as र्ऋ rṛ) and is pronounced before the vowel. Note that the vowel ऋ ṛ is written as an initial vowel even though it is medial (e.g., निर्ऋतिः nirṛtiḥ). The consonant श् ś is often written in its alternant form when followed by the vowel ऋ ṛ or ॠ ṝ (e.g., शृ śṛ) and sometimes also when followed by the vowel उ u or ऊ ū.
1.8: Sound classifications. The 48 characters of the Devanāgarī alphabet are classified by sound as guttural, palatal, cerebral, dental, or labial (see table 1.9:). They are further grouped as mute/nonmute, hard/soft, class/nonclass, consonant/vowel, aspirate/nonaspirate, nasal/semivowel/sibilant, simple/diphthong, and short/long (see Glossary). The consonants have an added अ a for pronunciation purposes only (1.5.a:). Committing table 1.9: to memory is helpful for understanding sandhi (see chapter 2). Traditionally the consonants (and vowels) in table 1.9: are read alphabetically: Read the rows of the first five columns across (क ka, ख kha, ग ga, घ gha, ङ ṅa, च ca, छ cha…). Read the next three columns down (य ya, र ra… ह ha). If in doubt, refer to table 1.5: for correct order.
1.9: Devanāgarī alphabet classified by sound.Class | Mute a | Nasal- Mute | Nonmute | ||||||||||
Hard | Soft | Hard | Soft | Hard | Soft | ||||||||
Class Consonant | Nonclass Consonant | Vowel | |||||||||||
Non Asp. | Asp. | Non Asp. | Aspir. | Nasal | Semi- vowel | Sibi. | Aspirate | Simple | Diph. | ||||
Short | Long | ||||||||||||
Gutt. | क | ख | ग | घ | ङ | ह | ः c | अ | आ | ए | ऐ d | ||
Palat. | च | छ | ज | झ् | ञ | य | श | इ | ई | ||||
Cereb. | ट | ठ | ड | ढ | ण | र | ष | ऋ | ॠ | ||||
Dent. | त | थ | द | ध | न | ल | स | ऌ | |||||
Labi. | प | फ | ब | भ | म | व b | ः c | उ | ऊ | ओ | औ |
a. | A mute is a sound that begins with a complete stop of the passage of the breath (1.4: touched), also called a stop in phonetics. Nasals are not full mutes, but are oral mutes with a nasal continuant (Macdonell 1927), thus in the following rules the term “mute” will not include nasals unless indicated. |
b. | व va is labial-dental (1.5.e:). |
c. | Visarga (ः ḥ) may appear at the end of the last word in a sentence, before a sibilant, or before a hard guttural or labial. After last word ः ḥ is pronounced in the location of the preceding vowel, and before sibilant as the same sibilant (see 2.28:). In the last two cases ः ḥ is pronounced in the location of the following guttural or labial (see 1.5.b:). Hereafter, visarga will be indicated with a colon (:) for better visibility on these pages. |
d. | Diphthongs ए e and ऐ ai are guttural-palatal. Diphthongs ओ o and औ au are guttural-labial, per their component sounds (a-i for ए e and ऐ ai, and a-u for ओ o and औ au – see 2.3: and 2.3.a:). |
1.10: Anusvāra (ं ṃ), or “after-sound,” is a nonmute, unmodified nasal that follows a vowel. It is sounded only through the nose, not the mouth. For this reason it is not classified in table 1.9:. Anusvāra is sometimes written as ँ m̐, where it is then described as anunāsika (pronounced through both the nose and mouth). There can be a nasalized ल् l, written as ल्ँ l̐ (2.51:). Anusvāra is properly found before the semivowels, sibilants, and ह् h (2.54:), and optionally before mutes or nasals (2.55:). But it is sometimes incorrectly used within a word (i.e., not due to a general sandhi, as in 2.55:) in place of any of the five class-consonant nasals when they are followed by a mute or nasal, or at the end of a word or sentence (e.g., the incorrect अंगं aṃgaṃ for अङ्गम् aṅgam). This usage does not affect the pronunciation of the correct corresponding class nasal. For more about anusvāra, see 1.5.c:.
1.11: Common symbols. Saṃskṛta commonly uses these punctuation or stylized symbols.Symbol | Purpose | |
। ॥ | Daṇḍa | The single daṇḍa । is used at the end of a line of verse and at the end of a sentence. The double daṇḍa ॥ is used at the end of a verse and (sometimes) at the end of a paragraph. |
ऽ | Avagraha | Optionally marks the dropping of a short अ a at the beginning of a word due to a sandhi (phonetic combination) with a previous word (2.12:). If the अ is nasalized, the anusvāra normally appears before the ऽ avagraha. ऽ is usually transliterated as an apostrophe (e.g., तेजोंऽश tejoṃ'śa for तेजो अंश tejo aṃśa). |
॰ | Abbreviation | Marks the dropping of a contextually understood part of a word. For example, गतेन gatena is abbreviated ॰तेन -tena in a dictionary entry, where ग- (ga-) is understood. |
ॐ | Om | A stylized form of ओम् Om, a name for brahman (reality). |
1.12: Conjunct consonants. If a consonant is followed immediately by one or more consonants – even when the consonants are divided between two words in a sentence – they are normally joined, after sandhi (chapter 2), into a cluster called a conjunct consonant. For example, त् स् t s are combined into त्स् ts.
The general principle in forming a conjunct consonant is to drop the right side vertical lines except in the last letter (e.g., त् t + स् s + य ya is त्स्य tsya). When the first letter has no right-side vertical line, or when both letters have a right-side vertical line and the following consonant has room for the previous letter to anchor to its vertical line (above the distinctive portion of its character), then – in both cases – the letters are conjoined vertically, with the initial consonant on top. For example, अङ् aṅ + ग ga becomes अङ्ग aṅga and अञ् añ + च ca becomes अञ्च añca. There are also irregular formations (see tables 1.13:).
क् | morphs with (e.g.) | क्+त | → | क्त | k·ta |
त् | त्+त | → | त्त | t·ta | |
त्+र | → | त्र | t·ra | ||
य | ड्+य | → | ड्य | ḍ·ya | |
द्+य | → | द्य | d·ya | ||
श् | श्+च | → | श्च | ś·ca (see 1.7:) |
The character र् r is called रेफ repha, instead of rakāra – 1.5.a:. | |||||
र् | morphs with (e.g.) | क्+र | → | क्र | k·ra, when र् has a vertical line to attach to. |
ड्+र | → | ड्र | ḍ·ra, when र् has no vertical line to attach to. | ||
र्+त | → | र्त | r·ta, when र् precedes a consonant (or the vowel ऋ ṛ), the mark is placed above the (conjunct) consonant and to the right of any following vowel marker (e.g., नैष्कर्म्ये naiṣkarmye, निर्ऋण nirṛṇa). |
1.14: Special conjuncts. There are two conjunct consonants whose component letters within Devanāgarī are indistinguishable: क्ष k·ṣa, and ज्ञ j·ña. One common, current pronunciation of ज्ञ j·ña, which is preferred by this author, has the component ज् j sound very slightly heard. For this sound, place the tongue and mouth in the palatal position to pronounce the ज् j, then pronounce the palatal ञ् ñ for the length of two consonants (ञ्ञ् ññ). In some parts of India, another pronunciation is with the “j” component pronounced as the guttural sound “g”. Since the following nasal would tend to naturally sound as a guttural, then the conjunct ज्ञ is pronounced as if ग्ङ gṅa. This latter pronunciation probably came in from a regional dialect, but you will hear it.
In Vedic grammar and phonetics, ज्ञ falls under the Vedic rule that when a consonant is in conjunction with र् or a nasal, the Vedic meter demands that a very short vowel (a fraction of the length of a normal vowel, called a svarabhakti, Vedic Grammar Macdonell 1966) be pronounced between them. Hence, ज्ञ would have been pronounced as jaña, so it would seem that the initial ज् j would have had its proper palatal pronunciation. Other than this conjunct, unlike English, classical Saṃskṛta is normally pronounced as it reads.
1.15: Printing consonants. In print, Devanāgarī conjunct consonants are presented in different ways. The differences are sometimes due to the inability of a particular Devanāgarī font to completely form a conjunct consonant. Other times they are due to an editorial preference. An editor may want to avoid using long or visually difficult conjunct consonants that challenge the reader. In these cases, one or more of the characters of the conjunct, usually the first character(s), are written with a virāma (1.5.a:). For example, बुद् बुद bud·buda, instead of बुद्बुद budbuda.
It is common, though, to avoid using the virāma in print wherever possible, even by joining a consonant-ending word to a following vowel-initial word. For example, the three words अशोच्यान् अन्वशोचः त्वम् aśocyān anvaśocaḥ tvam would be written as अन्वशोचानन्वशोचस्त्वम् aśocyānanvaśocastvam, where न् अ n a join to become न na, and visarga before त्वम् tvam changes to स् s (see 2.27:) and joins with the following consonants into स्त्वम् stvam. Saṃskṛta was written on materials such as palm leaves, so the writing of the script needed to be compacted to fit the compactness of the media. Hence this natural avoidance of virāmas which leave gaps between words.
1.16: Reading conjunct consonants. To read a conjunct consonant, read the component characters left to right and, within that, from top down (e.g., द्वन्द्व d·va·n·d·va). The only exception is र् r at the beginning of a conjunct consonant (e.g., कर्त्स्न्ये kar·t·s·n·ye, in this example, र् r is written after the final vowel e but pronounced before the t – see table 1.13:).
1.17: Common conjunct consonants (in alphabetical order). As new principles in conjoining are introduced alphabetically in the list, their examples are dark-shaded. Many conjuncts can be written in multiple ways, such as stacked or side-by-side, e.g., क्च or क्च k·ca. The below conjuncts are according to the Siddhanta font, unless your browser lacks or overrides this font. Another Devanāgarī font may differ in which conjuncts employ which of these principles. A conjunction of two components in transliteration is indicated by either a hyphen (-), or in this chart by the more compact middle dot (·).क्क | k·ka | क्ख | k·kha | क्च | k·ca | क्ण | k·ṇa | क्त | k·ta | क्त्य | k·t·ya | क्त्र | k·t·ra |
क्त्र्य | k·t·r·ya | क्त्व | k·t·va | क्न | k·na | क्न्य | k·n·ya | क्म | k·ma | क्य | k·ya | क्र | k·ra |
क्र्य | k·r·ya | क्ल | k·la | क्व | k·va | क्व्य | k·v·ya | क्ष | k·ṣa | क्ष्म | k·ṣ·ma | क्ष्य | k·ṣ·ya |
क्ष्व | k·ṣ·va | ख्य | kh·ya | ख्र | kh·ra | ग्य | g·ya | ग्र | g·ra | ग्र्य | g·r·ya | घ्न | gh·na |
घ्न्य | gh·n·ya | घ्म | gh·ma | घ्य | gh·ya | घ्र | gh·ra | ङ्क | ṅ·ka | ङ्क्त | ṅ·k·ta | ङ्क्य | ṅ·k·ya |
ङ्क्ष | ṅ·k·ṣa | ङ्ख | ṅ·kha | ङ्ख्य | ṅ·kh·ya | ङ्ग्य | ṅ·g·ya | ङ्घ | ṅ·gha | ङ्घ्य | ṅ·gh·ya | ङ्ङ | ṅ·ṅa |
च्च | c·ca | च्छ | c·cha | च्छ्र | c·ch·ra | च्ञ | c·ña | च्म | c·ma | च्य | c·ya | छ्य | ch·ya |
छ्र | ch·ra | ज्ज | j·ja | ज्झ | j·jha | ज्ञ | j·ña | ज्ञ्य | j·ñ·ya | ज्म | j·ma | ज्य | j·ya |
ज्र | j·ra | ज्व | j·va | ञ्च | ñ·ca | ञ्च्म | ñ·c·ma | ञ्च्य | ñ·c·ya | ञ्छ | ñ·cha | ञ्ज | ñ·ja |
ञ्ज्य | ñ·j·ya | ट्ट | ṭ·ṭa | ट्य | ṭ·ya | ठ्र | ṭh·ra | ड्य | ḍ·ya | ढ्य | ḍh·ya | ढ्र | ḍh·ra |
ण्ट | ṇ·ṭa | ण्ठ | ṇ·ṭha | ण्ड | ṇ·ḍa | ण्ड्य | ṇ·ḍ·ya | ण्ड्र | ṇ·ḍ·ra | ण्ड्र्य | ṇ·ḍ·r·ya | ण्ढ | ṇ·ḍha |
ण्ण | ṇ·ṇa | ण्म | ṇ·ma | ण्य | ṇ·ya | ण्व | ṇ·va | त्क | t·ka | त्क्र | t·k·ra | त्त | t·ta |
त्त्य | t·t·ya | त्त्र | t·t·ra | त्त्व | t·t·va | त्थ | t·tha | त्न | t·na | त्न्य | t·n·ya | त्प | t·pa |
त्प्र | t·p·ra | त्म | t·ma | त्म्य | t·m·ya | त्य | t·ya | त्र | t·ra | त्र्य | t·r·ya | त्व | t·va |
त्स | t·sa | त्स्न | t·s·na | त्स्न्य | t·s·n·ya | थ्य | th·ya | द्ग | d·ga | द्ग्र | d·g·ra | द्घ | d·gha |
द्द | d·da | द्द्य | d·d·ya | द्ध | d·dha | द्ध्य | d·dh·ya | द्न | d·na | द्ब | d·ba | द्भ | d·bha |
द्भ्य | d·bh·ya | द्म | d·ma | द्य | d·ya | द्र | d·ra | द्र्य | d·r·ya | द्व | d·va | द्व्य | d·v·ya |
ध्न | dh·na | ध्न्य | dh·n·ya | ध्म | dh·ma | ध्य | dh·ya | ध्र | dh·ra | ध्र्य | dh·r·ya | ध्व | dh·va |
न्त | n·ta | न्त्य | n·t·ya | न्त्र | n·t·ra | न्द | n·da | न्द्र | n·d·ra | न्ध | n·dha | न्ध्र | n·dh·ra |
न्न | n·na | न्प | n·pa | न्प्र | n·p·ra | न्म | n·ma | न्य | n·ya | न्र | n·ra | न्स | n·sa |
प्त | p·ta | प्त्य | p·t·ya | प्न | p·na | प्प | p·pa | प्म | p·ma | प्य | p·ya | प्र | p·ra |
प्ल | p·la | प्व | p·va | प्स | p·sa | प्स्व | p·s·va | ब्घ | b·gha | ब्ज | b·ja | ब्द | b·da |
ब्ध | b·dha | ब्न | b·na | ब्ब | b·ba | ब्भ | b·bha | ब्भ्य | b·bh·ya | ब्य | b·ya | ब्र | b·ra |
ब्व | b·va | भ्न | bh·na | भ्य | bh·ya | भ्र | bh·ra | भ्व | bh·va | म्न | m·na | म्प | m·pa |
म्प्र | m·p·ra | म्ब | m·ba | म्भ | m·bha | म्म | m·ma | म्य | m·ya | म्र | m·ra | म्ल | m·la |
म्व | m·va | य्य | y·ya | य्व | y·va | ल्क | l·ka | ल्प | l·pa | ल्म | l·ma | ल्य | l·ya |
ल्ल | l·la | ल्व | l·va | ल्ह | l·ha | व्न | v·na | व्य | v·ya | व्र | v·ra | व्व | v·va |
श्च | ś·ca | श्च्य | ś·c·ya | श्न | ś·na | श्य | ś·ya | श्र | ś·ra | श्र्य | ś·r·ya | श्ल | ś·la |
श्व | ś·va | श्व्य | ś·v·ya | श्श | ś·śa | ष्ट | ṣ·ṭa | ष्ट्य | ṣ·ṭ·ya | ष्ट्र | ṣ·ṭ·ra | ष्ट्र्य | ṣ·ṭ·r·ya |
ष्ट्व | ṣ·ṭ·va | ष्ठ | ṣ·ṭha | ष्ण | ṣ·ṇa | ष्ण्य | ṣ·ṇ·ya | ष्प | ṣ·pa | ष्प्र | ṣ·p·ra | ष्म | ṣ·ma |
ष्य | ṣ·ya | ष्व | ṣ·va | स्क | s·ka | स्ख | s·kha | स्त | s·ta | स्त्य | s·t·ya | स्त्र | s·t·ra |
स्त्व | s·t·va | स्थ | s·tha | स्न | s·na | स्न्य | s·n·ya | स्प | s·pa | स्फ | s·pha | स्म | s·ma |
स्म्य | s·m·ya | स्य | s·ya | स्र | s·ra | स्व | s·va | स्स | s·sa | ह्ण | h·ṇa | ह्न | h·na |
ह्म | h·ma | ह्य | h·ya | ह्र | h·ra | ह्ल | h·la | ह्व | h·va |
१ | २ | ३ | ४ | ५ | ६ | ७ | ८ | ९ | ० |
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 0 |
a. | Saṃskṛta is the original source for numerical writing in the West; therefore the number 2002 is familiarly written २००२. |
1.19: Numerals as pronunciation indicators. The figure २ after a word indicates that the word is repeated (e.g., अहो २ indicates अहो अहो aho aho). The figure ३ after a vowel indicates the pluta, or protracted lengthening, of the vowel to three mātrās.
The pronunciation length of time (mātrā) of a short vowel, such as अ a, is one mātrā. A long vowel, such as आ ā, or a diphthong is two mātrās (twice as long as अ a). आ ३ indicates the vowel is three mātrās. The three-mātrā pronunciation is found only in the Veda, and there it is infrequent. The pronunciation length of one consonant is said to be a half mātrā.
1.20: The syllable. Like in English, a phonological (or pronunciation) syllable, is called an अक्षर akṣara (also called a मात्रा mātrā, but not to be confused with the pronunciation length of time in 1.19:). It is the smallest unit that can have a meaning, and is the building block of words.
1.21: Syllable structure. A syllable is centered on a vowel.With/without a preceding consonant or conjunct consonant | +Vowel+ | With/without a following consonant or two (including anusvāra or visarga), to complete a meaningful component of a word. | ||
E.g., अशोच्यानन्वशोचस्त्वं consists of eight syllables: a-śoc-yān anv-a-śoc-as tvaṃ. |
1.22: Quality of syllable. A syllable is heavy (गुरु guru) if its vowel is long or a diphthong, or if its vowel is followed by an anusvāra, visarga, or conjunct consonant (even if the conjunct consonant is in the next word or the result of a sandhi with the next word within the same pāda 1.23:). Otherwise, the syllable is light (लघु laghu). For example, the first syllables in the words bāl-a, bodh-i, duḥ-kha, and bud-dhi are heavy, and the second syllables are light. The quality of syllables may determine how a grammatical rule is applied to form a word stem. It also helps determine the meter (1.24:) of a verse.
1.23: The pāda. Much of Saṃskṛta literature is in verse form, and most verses are in the form of stanzas of four metrical quarters. A quarter is called a पाद pāda (literally, “foot”). Two pādas make a metrical line. The end of a metrical line is treated in pronunciation and writing like an end of a sentence. In accentuation (1.25:) though, each pāda is treated like an independent sentence; for instance, an enclitic (see Glossary) can never begin a pāda (4.3.1:).
1.24: Meter. The quality and the quantity of the syllables in a pāda determine the meter of the verse. The meter is the recurring pattern of the heavy and light syllables, forming a patterned rhythm. Anuṣṭubh, or Śloka, the most common meter in Saṃskṛta literature, is composed of two lines of two pādas, with eight syllables to a pāda. Occasionally three verses can be arranged into two triplets (three lines each). Each verse is typically a complete sentence. It is a particularly flexible meter, because of its wide variety of metrical forms. A metrical form defines how the light and heavy syllables are patterned in a line. In the most common metrical form of Anuṣṭubh by far, called Pathyā, the 5th-6th-7th syllables of the first pāda are light-heavy-heavy, and of the second pāda they are light-heavy-light, all the rest of the syllables of the line can be either light or heavy (see Macdonell 1975 Appendix II).
1.25: Accent. Saṃskṛta in Vedic literature has a tonal accent, in which the accent of a vowel is in the form of a change in pitch: raised (उदात्त udātta), lowered (अनुदात्त an-udātta), or transitional (स्वरित svarita – moving from a raised-tone semivowel y or v, indicating their original i and u vowel pronunciation, to the unaccented vowel that follows the y or v).
Later Saṃskṛta is pronounced with a stress accent instead of a tonal accent. In a stress accent, the accent of a vowel is pronounced more forcefully or loudly relative to nearby, unaccented vowels. Whereas there are rules and text markings for the placement and nature of the tonal accent, there are no specific rules or text markings for the stress accent. Although the placement of the stress accent in a word is generally deduced from the rules regarding the Vedic raised tonal accent, the stress accent may have shifted, depending on the quality (heavy or light) of the syllables.
In the case of the many new words introduced since Vedic literature, where the placement of the accent may not be clear from derivation, generally the accent falls on the last metrically heavy syllable within the word (e.g., Kalidā̍sa, Himā̍laya, kā̍rayati). The stress accent, like the Vedic tonal accent, may then disappear or move to another syllable, depending mostly on the word’s inflection (nominal declension – see Glossary and 3.3: – or verbal [···pg 10···] conjugation – see 5.3:), or placement in a sentence.
Like in any other language, accent in Saṃskṛta is best learned by listening to an experienced, native speaker, but a few guidelines are as follows:
Now you have an understanding of the alphabet.
If you have The Aruna Sanskrit Grammar Coursebook: 64 Lessons Based on the Bhagavad Gita Chapter Two, it will help guide you through the study of the rest of this Grammar Reference. The Aruna Coursebook will direct you to the following chapters in this book as and when required.
Alternatively, if you do not have the Aruna Coursebook but need further excercise help to better read Devanāgarī text, you can order The Sanskrit Reading Tutor. This pdf file has audio clips attached to the text so you can read it, click it and hear it. The text in the pdf is the same as the Script Reading Exercise in the Aruna Coursebook appendix and covers the entire second chapter of the Bhagavad Gita.
Go to Top ('Home' key on many Windows browsers)
2.1: Coalescence of adjacent sounds. In Saṃskṛta every sentence is treated as a continuously spoken sequence of sounds, written exactly as they are pronounced. The coalescence of these sounds when pronounced as a sequence is called sandhi. The purpose of sandhi is to facilitate smooth pronunciation, and to avoid a gap between vowels in separate syllables, called a hiatus by Western grammarians.
Although several consecutive consonant sandhis may occur for easier pronunciation of a consonant cluster, only one vowel sandhi is applied between two adjoining vowels. Any hiatus in a finished Saṃskṛta text is either the result of only one vowel sandhi, in which case additional application of sandhi to avoid hiatus would render the original syllables unidentifiable, or the absence of any sandhi application at the end of a metrical line or the end of a sentence.
Because of sandhi, generally the ends and sometimes the beginning of words will be written in a sentence as they orally sound in combination, and not as they may be found separately, e.g., as in a dictionary.
a. The following sandhi rules, as well as many other grammar rules, are subject to occasional irregularities, of which only the common exceptions are noted herein. Not infrequent is the lack or irregular application of sandhi to maintain meter, such as retaining hiatus between two pādas (1.23:).
2.2: Guṇa and vṛddhi. Vowels may strengthen by taking guṇa or vṛddhi. The simple liquid vowels (i.e., इ ई, उ ऊ, ऋ ॠ including ऌ, theoretically), as well as these vowels as components of diphthongs (i.e., the non-simple liquid vowels), may change into semivowels, and those semivowels may revert back to their liquid vowel, as part of samprasāraṇa.
2.3: Strengthening of vowels.Simple vowels | Guṇa (components) | Vṛdddhi | Semivowel a | Samprasāraṇa (weakening) a | |||||||
अ | → | अ | आ | (=अ+अ) | |||||||
आ | → | आ | (=अ+आ) | आ | (=अ+आ) | ||||||
इ ई | → | ए | (=अ+इ/ई) | ऐ | (=अ+ए) | य् | य | → | इ | ||
उ ऊ | → | ओ | (=अ+उ/ऊ) | औ | (=अ+ओ) | व् | व | → | उ | ||
ऋ ॠ | → | अर् | (=अ+ऋ/ॠ) | आर् | (=अ+अर्) | र् | अर् or र | → | ऋ | ||
ऌ | → | अल् | (=अ+ऌ) | (no vṛddhi for ऌ) |
a. | The simple liquid vowels (including the second half component इ or उ of diphthongs ए ऐ or ओ औ respectively) may become semi-vowels य्, व्, र् respectively. In reverse, these semivowels as part of weakening, called saṃprasāraṇa, may become their respective simple liquid vowels. Notice that the semivowel’s following or preceding अ is dropped in saṃprasāraṇa. |
2.4: General and internal sandhi. There are two forms of sandhi.
Independent word | + Independent word |
Word in a cmpd. | + Next word in the cmpd. (6.29:), including verbal compounds (6.11:) |
Nominal stem | + Secondary suffix beginning with any cons. except य् (6.27:) |
+ Pada declension terms. - भ्याम्, भिस्, भ्यस्, सु (3.2.a:) – First apply general sandhi rules 2.23: & .24:, then internal sandhi rules will apply. |
Other combinations | Applicable specific internal sandhi rules apply first, then general sandhi rules. With the exception that finals of roots usually don’t change, nor generally would rule 2.23: apply. |
2.5: Reading sandhi charts. In the following sandhi charts, unless otherwise noted, the Preceding column’s letter(s) alone change.
For example, rule 2.9: should read – when अ आ (i.e., अ or आ) precedes a guṇa vowel, then both (अ and following guṇa vowel, or आ and following guṇa vowel) are changed to the following’s component liquid vowel’s vṛddhi. In this case, the component liquid vowel being इ or उ of the guṇa vowel ए (=अ+इ) or ओ (=अ+उ) per 2.3.a:, its vṛddhi would be ऐ or औ (2.3:), respectively.
Rule 2.14: should read - when guṇa vowel ओ precedes any vowel except अ, then the preceding ओ is changed to अव् and, if it is between independent words, it usually further becomes अ (i.e., the व् drops). Notice how the same rows match across, e.g., ओ row matches अव् row, and certain rows are shared, e.g., “guṇa vowel” row is shared by both ए row and ओ row.
In these listings a later rule, if equally applicable, takes precedence over a prior and thus more general rule.
In the following rules, the word “radical” means “belonging to a root or a substitute for a root”; this may apply to verbal roots made into nouns or into verbs.
“May” and “usually” mean optionally infrequent or frequent change, respectively; “sometimes” and “often” mean in certain words this change is found.
Preceding | Following | Change | |||||||
2.7: | simple vowel (short or long) | same simple vow. (short or long) | both | → | long simple vowel | ||||
2.8: | अ आ | simple liquid vowel (1.9: & 2.2:) | both | → | the liquid vowel’s guṇa (2.3:) | ||||
2.9: | guṇa vowel | both | → | the following’s component liquid vowel’s (2.3.a:) vṛddhi (2.3:) | |||||
2.10: | vṛddhi vowel | ||||||||
2.11: | simple liquid vowel | different vowel | → | corresponding semivowel (2.3.a:) | |||||
2.12: | guṇa vowels ए ओ | अ | अ | → | drops, often replaced with an avagraha ऽ | ||||
2.13: | guṇa vowel | ए | any vowel except अ | → | अय् | if between indep. words (2.4:) | usually | → अ a | |
2.14: | ओ | → | अव् | ||||||
2.15: | vṛddhi vowel | ऐ | any vowel | → | आय् | usually | → आ a | ||
2.16: | औ | → | आव् | rarely |
a. | The resulting vowels - अ/आ and following vowel normally remain separate, i.e., hiatus (2.1:) remains. |
Preceding | Following | Change | |||
2.18: | final अ आ of prep. (6.11:) | initial ऋ of a root | both | → | vṛddhi (instead of guṇa) |
2.19: | prep. प्र | pp. ऊढ | both | → | प्रौढ “lifted up” (instead of guṇa) |
2.20: | past tense aug. अ (5.5.c:) | initial vow. of root | both | → | vṛddhi (instead of guṇa) |
2.21: | final vowel of interj. pcl. (6.21:) or final ओ made by ॰अ + pcl. उ (6.20:) | vowel | both | → | (no sandhi, hiatus remains) |
2.22: | decl. or conj. du. term. final ई ऊ ए (but not अ इ ऐ औ) or final ई of अमी (masc. pl. nom. “those” 4.9:) |
2.23: Permitted finals. Except when र् precedes a क् ट् त् प्, which is at the end of a root (or a substitute for a root) and is not a suffix, no word may be permitted to end in more than one consonant. The final conjunct consonant must be reduced by dropping the last consonants until only one consonant (or क्ष्) remains. Every final consonant (whether originally a conjunct or not) must be converted into one of the eight permitted final consonants according to the following chart (2.24:). Only after this conversion can the following rules (2.24.b:, & 2.25: to 2.62:) of general visarga and general consonant sandhi be applied.
2.24: Permitted final consonants of a (conjugated, declined, or indeclinable) word.क् | ख् | ग् | घ् | च् | → | क् | ज् श् ह् क्ष् → क् , or in certain words ट् | ||||
ट् | ठ् | ड् | ढ् | ष् | छ् | → | ट् | ||||
त् | थ् | द् | ध् | → | त् | a. These apply in general sandhi combinations, so they also include finals of nominal stems before certain terminations or suffixes, as defined in 2.4:. b. Before a pause, an original final mute (after these conversions) may optionally change to the permitted final’s respective soft nonaspirate consonant – but is rarely applied in manuscripts. | |||||
प् | फ् | ब् | भ् | → | प् | ||||||
ङ् | ञ् | → | ङ् | ||||||||
न् | म् | → | remains (न् म्) | ||||||||
र् | स् | → | : (visarga) | ||||||||
झ् | ण् | य् | ल् | व् | → | are never finals |
Preceding | Following | Change | |||||
2.26: | final : of 1st word in cmpd. (6.11: & 6.29:) | initial क् ख् प् फ् of 2nd word in cmpd. | in some cmpds | → | स् (otherwise, see 1.5.b:) | ||
2.27: | : (visarga) | hard | palatal च् छ् | → | palatal श् | ||
cerebral ट् ठ् | → | cerebral ष् | |||||
dental त् थ् | → | dental स् | |||||
2.28: | : | sibilant श् ष् स् | may | → | श् ष् स् resp. | ||
2.29: | : after vowel ex. अ आ | soft letter (i.e., vowel or cons.) | : | → | soft र् (ex. if followed by र् per 2.35:) | ||
2.30: | आः | : | → | drops (hiatus remains) | |||
2.31: | अः | vowel except अ | : | → | drops (hiatus remains) | ||
2.32: | अ | → | ओ and following अ is dropped, usually replaced with avagraha ऽ (2.12:) | ||||
2.33: | soft cons. | → | ओ | ||||
2.34: | : as an etymological र् | after अ आ | soft letter | → | soft र् (exception to rules 2.30–33:) | ||
2.35: | : | र् | → | drops & a preceding short vowel lengthens (exception to 2.29: & .33:) |
Preceding | Following | Change | ||||
2.37: | masc. sg. nom. सः “he,” एषः “this” (7.12:) | any letter except अ | : | → | drops (hiatus remains) | |
2.38: | भोः “O your honor” an irreg. contraction of voc. sg. of भवत् (3.13.b:) orभगोः “O virtuous one” an irreg. contraction of sg. voc. of भगवत् | soft letter | ||||
2.39: | : as an etymological र् | of radical noun stem (3.6.g:) | pl. loc. term. सु | → | र् (e.g., द्वार्षु, अहर्पति) | |
2.40: | of अहर् “day” (3.21.a:) & स्वर् “heaven” | पति “lord” in cmpd. |
Preceding | Following | Change | ||||
2.42: | soft mute cons. | hard consonant | → | its resp. hard non-aspir. cons. | ||
hard mute cons. | soft mute consonant | → | its resp. soft non-aspir. cons. | |||
2.43: | permitted hard final क् ट् त् प् (2.24:) | initial soft letter | → | its resp. soft non-aspir. cons. (i.e., ग् ड् द् ब् resp.), a following ह् usually → resp. soft aspir. (2.58:) | ||
2.44: | initial soft न् म् | usually | → | its resp. soft class nasal (else 2.43:) | ||
2.45: | hard dental त् | init. | hard palatal च् छ् श् | → | hard palatal च्, a following श् usually → छ् (by 2.56:) | |
soft palatal ज् झ् | → | soft palatal ज् | ||||
2.46: | hard cerebral ट् ठ् | → | hard cerebral ट् | |||
soft cerebral ड् ढ् | → | soft cerebral ड् | ||||
2.47: | init. soft dental ल् | → | soft द् → ल् | |||
2.48: | soft gutt. ङ् | init. hard sibi. श् ष् स् | may | → | interpose hard gutt. क् | |
2.49: | soft dental न् | init. hard स् | may | → | interpose hard dental त् | |
2.50: | init. | hard palatal च् छ् | → | ं anusvāra with resp. hard sibilant (श् ष् स्) interposed | ||
hard cerebral ट् ठ् | ||||||
hard dental त् थ् | ||||||
2.51: | init. ल् | → | nasalized ल्, usually written as ल्ँ (1.10:) | |||
2.52: | palatal soft ज् झ् or sibilant श् | → | palatal nasal ञ्, a following श् usually → छ् (2.56:) | |||
2.53: | init. soft cerebral ड् ढ् | → | cerebral nasal ण् | |||
2.54: | labial म् | init. semiv., sibi., or ह् | → | ं anusvāra, remains म् if followed by ह्म् | ||
2.55: | mute, or nasal न् म् | → | ं anusvāra → resp. class nasal opt. (necessarily in internal sandhi) | |||
2.56: | hard palatal च् (2.45:) or soft palatal ञ् (2.52:) | init. श् followed by soft letter | palatal श् usually | → | hard aspir. palatal छ् | |
2.57: | hard क् ट् प् | श् may | ||||
2.58: | soft ग् ड् द् ब् (2.43:) | init. ह् | ह् usually | → | resp. soft aspir. (to घ्, etc.) | |
2.59: | long vowel or diphthong | init. छ् | opt. छ् | → | doubles (as च्छ् c-ch). In the doubling of cons., an aspirate is doubled with its nonasp.; conj. aspir. before mute, sibi., or ह् is not allowed (2.76:, cf. 1.17:) | |
2.60: | short vowel, or pcls. आ मा | छ् | ||||
2.61: | vowel | छ् in middle of word a | ||||
2.62: | ङ् न् after short vowel | init. vowel | ङ् न् | → | doubles (ङ्ङ्, न्न्) | |
2.63: | र् | single cons., ex. स् श् ष् ह्, in middle of word a | following single cons. | → | in pronunciation is doubled, in writing is opt. doubled (e.g., वर्तते or वर्त्तते, दीर्घ or दीर्ग्घ) | |
2.64: | mute preceded by nasal, or doubled mute joined with any cons. | in middle of word a | 1st of the conj. mutes | → | opt. drops (e.g., युङ्ग्धि or युन्धि, तत्त्व or तत्व) |
a. | Rule 2.61:, .63:, & .64: are actually internal sandhi, but for convenience are included in this consonant doubling/abbreviation section of rules. The doubling of a consonant in the middle of a word (2.63:) after र् is rarely followed in recent manuscripts; the abbreviation (2.64:) is not uncommon. |
2.65: Internal sandhis. Being difficult to grasp without a contextual reference, they may best be learned contextually in the subsequent chapters on declensions and conjugations, in which the rules are amply exemplified and referenced. After learning those chapters, then these charts may easily be understood. Here “s.f.” stands for either nominal stem final or verbal base final, as appropriate.
2.66: Internal vowel sandhi (the most common).Preceding | Following | Change | |||
2.67: | s.f. इ ई, उ ऊ, ऋ (esp. in monosyllabics or after conj. cons.) | vowel | often | → | इय्, उव्, इर् resp. (instead of 2.7: & 2.11:) |
2.68: | s.f. ॠ | term. init. cons. | → | ईर् | |
2.69: | s.f. ॠ after labial | → | ऊर् | ||
2.70: | s.f. ऋ after sing. con. | term. init. य् (5.37.3:) | → | रि | |
2.71: | s.f. ए ऐ औ | term. init. vowel or य् | → | अय् आय् अव् आव् resp. (compare & constrast 2.13: to 2.16:) |
Preceding | Following | Change | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.73: | s.f. cons. | term. init. vow., semiv., nasal | usually | → | follows internal, but not general sandhi | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.74: | term. init. ह्, sibi., mute | usually | → | follows internal, then general sandhi | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.75: | final sing. cons. term. | term. | → | drops (cf. 2.23:), final s.f. cons. then follows general sandhi | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.76: | s.f. aspirate | ह्, sibi., mute, or via 2.24: | → | aspiration is lost | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.77: | (lost) soft aspiration (2.76:) | ध्व् भ् स् | if possible | → | aspiration thrown backward (cf. 2.79:) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.78: | term. init. त् थ् | → | aspiration thrown forward on softened त् थ् (i.e., → ध्) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.79: | initial ग् द् ब् of radical syllable | radical final is aspirate घ् ध् भ् ह् | if final aspir. is lost | → | initial ग् द् ब् is aspirated (cf. 2.77:) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.80: | s.f. palatal च् | hard or soft cons. | usually | → | gutt. hard क् or soft ग् resp. (cf. 2.24:) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.81: | s.f. palatal ज् | → | hard क् or soft ग्, sometimes hard ट्/ष् or soft ड् resp. (cf. 2.24:) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.82: | s.f. palatal च् ज् | vowel, semiv., nasal | some- times | → | gutt. ग् (cf. 2.24: & 2.42:), sometimes क् | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.83: | s.f. palatal छ् of प्रछ् “ask” | cons., ex. pada term. | → | श् (then 2.84–86: may apply) | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.84: | s.f. palatal श् | hard nom. स्, or a soft ध् or pada term. | → | hard ट् or soft ड्, sometimes hard क् or soft ग् resp. (cf. 2.24:) | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.85: | त् थ् | → | ष्, and then both → ष्ट् or ष्ठ् resp. (2.88:) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.86: | स् of conj. term. | → | क् (cf. 2.24:), and then both क्ष् (2.101:) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.87: | s.f. palatal च् ज् | न् | न् | → | palatal ञ् (cf. 2.73:) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.88: | s.f. cerebral | hard or soft dental class cons. | dental | → | hard or soft cerebral resp. (cf. 2.73:) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.89: | s.f. cerebral ष् | hard or soft decl. term. init. cons., or ध् conj. term. init. | → | hard ट् or soft ड् resp. (cf. 2.24: & .42:), a following dental → cerebral (2.88:) | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.90: | conj. term. init. स् | → | क्, and then both → क्ष् (2.101:) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.91: | root final क्ष् | term. init. mute or sibi. | क् | → | drops, leaving ष् to combine as above | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
[···pg 16···] | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.92: | cerebral ऋ ॠ र् ष् (w/wo an intervening a vowel, guttural incl. ह्, labial incl. व्, य्, or anusvāra) | न्, if followed by a vowel or न् म् य् व् | न् | → | ण् (a following conj. न् म् also → ण्). (This rule also applies between many cmpd. words 6.29: (ex. only sometimes when न् is in conjunct with preceeding gutt. or labial cons.), including between all prefixes and verbal forms or nouns 6.11:) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.93: | root final न् | स् | → | ं anusvāra (cf. 2.54:) | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.94: | न् at end of, or inserted in (3.2.b:), stem | ष् स् ह् | → | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.95: | न् | mute | → | resp. class nasal | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.96: | स् of वस् “dwell” & घस् “eat” | init. स् of conj. term. | → | त्, softening it to द् before soft भ् | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.97: | s.f. स् of redup. perf. (3.19:) | term. init. भ् or स्, and neut. sg. nom. acc. | → | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.98: | स् | between mutes | → | drops | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.99: | prep. उद् (in ext. sandhi) | roots स्था “stand” & स्तम्भ् “support” | स् | → | drops (2.98:), उद् changes to hard उत् (2.42:) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.100: | स् | soft dental | → | ष् → drops, following dental may → cerebral (2.88:) | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.101: | vowels ex. अ आ b (w/wo intervening ं anusvāra or : visarga ), or क् र् | स् if followed by vow. or त् थ् न् म् य् व्. (But a following root or derivative with र् or ऋ, whatever its position, usually blocks the change.) | स् | → | ष्, the following dental त् थ् न् becoming cerebral also. (This rule also applies between many compound words 6.29:, including between all prefixes and verbal forms or nouns 6.11:) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.102: | म् | term. init. व् | → | न् | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.103: | semi-vowels य् र् ल् | → | remains म् (not → anusvāra per 2.54:) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.104: | sibilant or ह् in the middle of a word | → | ं anusvāra (2.54:) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.105: | soft ह् | स् | → | घ् (cf. 2.24:), then both → क्ष् (2.76:, .42:, .101:) | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.106: | final ह् of roots w/initial द् | term. init. त् थ् ध् | → | घ् (then 2.76:–2.78:) | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.107: | final ह् of roots wo/init. द् | term. init. dental त् थ् ध् | → | ढ् (cf. 2.24:) → drops, & dental → asp. ढ् (2.78: & .88:), w/preceding vow. → long (e.g., लिह्+त→लीढ) | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.108: | स्निह् “be oily” & sometimes मुह् “be confused” | pp. term. त | ह् | → | घ्, then both → ग्ध् (2.76:, .78:) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.109: | ह् of वह् “convey” & सह् “endure” | term. init. dental त् थ् ध् | → | ढ् → drops, and dental → asp. ढ् (2.78: & 2.88:), with preceding अ → ओ | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.110: | root वह् “convey” | pp. term. त | both | → | ऊढ (by saṃprasāraṇa 2.3.a: & .107:) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.111: | root दृह् “be strong” | → | दृढ (2.107:) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.112: | root नह् “bind” | → | नद्ध |
a. | Cerebralization (2.92:) of a distantly following न् (nasals being very susceptible to change of location/pronunciation-position) is allowed to occur when no intervening sound either “satisfies the need” to follow up the preceding non-touched (1.4:) cerebral (i.e., by an intervening cerebral mute) or moves the front part of the tongue out of position to cerebralize the nasal (i.e., by an intervening dental, sibilant or palatal - except the weak, i.e., slightly touched [1.4:] palatal य्). |
b. | The sound ष् hardly occurs of its own in words, apart from application of this rule (2.101:) and, to a lesser extent, rules 2.81:, .85: and .86:. In other words, if you see a ष्, suspect it was a स्. |
Go to Top ('Home' key on many Windows browsers)
The Inflection of Nominal Stems by Means of Case Terminations
3.1: Inflection. The inflection of nouns (including adjectives), numerals and pronouns is called declension (विभक्ति). In Saṃskṛta declensions there are-ए॰ Singular | द्वि॰ Dual | ब॰ Plural | ||||
पुं॰ m. स्त्री॰ f. | नपुं॰ n. | पुं॰ m. स्त्री॰ f. | नपुं॰ n. | पुं॰ m. स्त्री॰ f. | नपुं॰ n. | |
प्र॰ N. | स् | — | औ | ई | अस् | इ b |
सं॰ V. | — | |||||
द्वि॰ A. | अम् | |||||
तृ॰ I. | आ | भ्याम् a | भिस् | |||
च॰ D. | ए | भ्यस् | ||||
प॰ Ab. | अस् | |||||
ष॰ G. | ओस् | आम् | ||||
स॰ L. | इ | सु |
a. | भ्याम् भिस् भ्यस् सु are called pada terminations. |
b. | N. pl. nom. voc. acc. insert न् before a single final mute (changing to resp. class nasal 2.95:), sibilant or ह् (2.94:) of a consonant-ending stem, and insert न् after a vowel-ending stem. |
3.4: Consonant-ending Stems. Nouns end in either consonants or vowels. The consonant-ending declensions are more regular than the vowel-ending, so we will present them first. Consonant-ending nouns can be divided into unchangeable stems and changeable stems.
Although native grammarians for memorization teach recitation across the row (nom. sg. du. pl…), the visual and logical patterns go down the column (sg. nom. voc. acc…).
3.5: Unchangeable Stem – Dental ॰त् | मरुत् (maru̍-t) m. “wind” जगत् (ja̍ga-t) n. “world” |
m. मरु॰ n. जग॰ | ए॰ Singular | द्वि॰ Dual | ब॰ Plural | |||
पुं॰ m. स्त्री॰ f. | नपुं॰ n. | पुं॰ m. स्त्री॰ f. | नपुं॰ n. | पुं॰ m. स्त्री॰ f. | नपुं॰ n. | |
प्र॰ N. | ॰त् (स्) a | ॰त् (—) | ॰तौ (औ) | ॰ती (ई) | ॰तः (अस्) | ॰न्ति (इ) d |
सं॰ V. | ॰त् (—) | |||||
द्वि॰ A. | ॰तम् (अम्) | |||||
तृ॰ I. | ॰ता (आ) | ॰द्भ्याम् (भ्याम्) c | ॰द्भिः (भिस्) | |||
च॰ D. | ॰ते (ए) | ॰द्भ्यः (भ्यस्) | ||||
प॰ Ab. | ॰तः (अस्) b | |||||
ष॰ G. | ॰तोः (ओस्) | ॰ताम् (आम्) | ||||
स॰ L. | ॰ति (इ) | ॰त्सु (सु) |
a. | Rule 2.23:, final cons. (स्) after another cons. drops, hence मरुत् + स् = मरुत्स् becomes मरुत्. |
b. | Rule 2.24:, the final स् becomes : (visarga). |
c. | भ्याम् being a pada term. (3.2.a:), general (2.4:) sandhi rule 2.43: applies, hence त् is softened. |
d. | Rule 3.2.b:, न् is inserted b/4 a single final mute (त्) in n. pl. nom. voc. acc., ∴ jaga-n-t-i. |
Ending | Example | ॰Final sg. nom. ॰स्/॰— | ॰Vow. term. pl. nom. m./f.॰अः / n.॰इ | ॰Soft Pada pl. inst. ॰भिः | ॰Hard Pada pl. loc. ॰सु | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Dental (cont.) | ॰म-थ् -th | in cmpd. a. “-destroying” | ॰त् -t a | ॰थः m.f. ॰न्थि n. -nth | ॰द्भिः -d | ॰त्सु -t | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰सुहृ-द् -d | m. “friend” | ॰त् -t | ॰दः | ॰द्भिः -d | ॰त्सु -t | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰वृ-ध् -dh | in cmpd. a. “-increasing” | ॰त् -t | ॰धः m.f. ॰न्धि n. -ndh | ॰द्भिः -d | ॰त्सु -t | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
[···pg 19···] | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Palatal | वा-च् -c | f. “speech” | ॰क् -k b | ॰चः | ॰ग्भिः -g | ॰क्षु -kṣ c | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
असृ-ज् -j | n. “blood” | ॰क् -k | ॰ञ्जि n. -ñj d | ॰ग्भिः -g | ॰क्षु -kṣ | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
रु-ज् -j | f. “disease” | ॰क् -k | ॰जः | ॰ग्भिः -g | ॰क्षु -kṣ | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
सम्रा-ज् -j | m. “sovereign” | ॰ट् -ṭ e | ॰जः | ॰ड्भिः -ḍ | ॰ट्सु -ṭ | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
दि-श् -ś | f. “cardinal point” | ॰क् -k | ॰शः | ॰ग्भिः -g | ॰क्षु -kṣ | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
वि-श् -ś | m. “settler” | ॰ट् -ṭ | ॰शः | ॰ड्भिः -ḍ | ॰ट्सु -ṭ | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Cereb. | द्वि-ष् -ṣ | m. “enemy” | ॰ट् -ṭ | ॰षः | ॰ड्भिः -ḍ | ॰ट्सु -ṭ | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Labial | धर्मगु-प् -p | m. “guardian of dharma” | ॰प् -p | ॰पः | ॰ब्भिः -b | ॰प्सु -p | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
ककु-भ् -bh | f. “region” | ॰प् -p | ॰भः | ॰ब्भिः -b | ॰प्सु -p | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Semiv. (only र् 2.24) | द्व-ार् -ār | f. “gate” | ॰आः -āḥ | ॰आरः | ॰आर्भिः -ār f | ॰आर्षु -ārṣ g | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
गिर् -ir | f. “voice” | ॰ईः -īḥ h | ॰इरः | ॰ईर्भिः -īr | ॰ईर्षु -īrṣ | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
पुर् -ur | f. “town” | ॰ऊः -ūḥ | ॰उरः | ॰ऊर्भिः -ūr | ॰ऊर्षु -ūrṣ | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Stems in स् | यशस् -as | n. “fame” | ॰अः -aḥ | ॰आंसि n. -āṃs i | ॰ओभिः -o j | ॰अःसु -aḥ k | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
हविस् -is | n. “oblation” | ॰इः -iḥ | ॰ईंषि n. -īṃṣ | ॰इर्भिः -ir | ॰इःषु -iḥṣ | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
आयुस् -us | n. “life” | ॰उः -uḥ | ॰ऊंषि n. -ūṃṣ | ॰उर्भिः -ur | ॰उःषु -uḥṣ | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
सुमनस् -as | a. “cheerful” | ॰आः m.f.-āḥ i ॰अः n. -aḥ | ॰असः m.f. ॰आंसि n. -āṃs | ॰ओभिः -o | ॰अःसु -aḥ | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
आशिस् -is | f. “blessing” | ॰ईः -īḥ l | ॰इषः -iṣ | ॰ईर्भिः -īr | ॰ईःषु -īḥṣ | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Stems in ह् | ॰दुह् -duh | in cmpd. a. “-milking” | ॰धुक् -dhuk m | ॰दुहः m.f. ॰दिंहि n. | ॰धुग्भिः -g m | ॰धुक्षु -kṣ m | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰लिह् -lih | in cmpd. a. “-licker” | ॰लिट् -ṭ | ॰लिहः m.f. ॰लिंहि n. -ṃh | ॰लिड्भिः -ḍ | ॰लिट्सु -ṭ |
a. | Rule 2.23:, final conjunct reduces to initial cons., hence ॰मथ् + स् = ॰मथ्स् becomes ॰मथ्, then rule 2.24:, final थ् becomes त्. |
b. | Rule 2.24:, final च् and sometimes श् becomes क्. |
c. | Rule 2.24.a:, final च् becomes क्, then rule 2.101:, because of preceding क्, स् of सु becomes ष्, and they both are written क्ष्. |
d. | Rule 2.95:, inserted न् (3.2.b:) before the soft palatal mute (ज्) in n. pl. nom. becomes palatal ञ्. |
e. | Rule 2.24:, final ज् श् ह् in certain words becomes ट्. |
f. | Rule 2.34:, visarga (:) representing etymological र् after अ or आ reverts back to र्. |
g. | Rule 2.39:, final र् is retained before pl. loc. term. सु, the latter then becoming षु (2.101:). |
h. | Stems in इर् and उर् lengthen the preceding इ or उ in sg. nom. and before pada terms. |
i. | Stems in स् are almost all from the primary nominal suffixes अस् इस् उस्, chiefly neuters. They lengthen their final vowel before the inserted nasal (changed to anusvāra 2.94:) in n. pl. nom. voc. acc., but not before other vowel initial terms. e.g., n. sg. inst. यशसा, हविषा, आयुषा (2.101:), etc. The masculine and feminine are nearly all adjectival compounds as well as proper names like अङ्गिरस्; those in अस् lengthen the अ in m.f. sg. nom. |
j. | Rule 2.33:, अ plus visarga (:) change to ओ before a soft consonant. |
k. | Rule 2.28:, यशःसु may also be written यशस्सु. |
l. | आशिस् lengthens its इ (like stems in इर् above 3.6.h:) in sg. nom. and before pada terminations. |
m. | Rule 2.24:, final ह् usually becomes क्, and this lost aspiration is thrown on root initial ग् द् ब् (2.79:). |
Consonant-ending Changeable Stems
3.7: Changeable stems. They also take the normal case-endings. The stems exhibit a strong, a weak and sometimes a third form, called middle. The stems having been usually accented in the strong cases preserved their full form, but were shortened in the weak cases by the accent often falling on the terminations. Similarly, if the strong stem has a long vowel within it, that long vowel is regularly shortened (i.e., weakened) in sg. vocative because of the accent shifting in that case to the first syllable.
The consonant-ending changeable stems are generally listed with their middle (or weak) form (the form before the pada terminations), which is the form normally employed in compounds (6.29:) and listed in dictionaries. Whereas, the unchangeable consonant-ending stems as well as the vowel-ending stems, introduced later in this chapter, show their प्रतिपादिक form (3.2:) in dictionary and in compounds.
ए॰ Singular | द्वि॰ Dual | ब॰ Plural | ||||
पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | |
प्र॰ N. | स् | — | औ | ई | अस् | इ |
सं॰ V. | — | |||||
द्वि॰ A. | अम् | अस् | ||||
. . . (N.C. T.s) |
a. | Forming an exception to this are the stems in ॰इन्, ॰मिन्, and ॰विन् (3.15:). There, all the cases are strong, except those of the weak pada terms. and the n. sg. nom. acc. and optionally the voc. |
Part of speech | Para.# | Suffix | Strong Form | Weak Form |
Pr. & Fut. Pt. act. (6.4:) | 3.12: | ॰अत् | ॰अन्त् | ॰अत् |
Poss. Adj. & Subst. (6.27:) | 3.13: | ॰मत् | ॰मन्त् | ॰मत् |
Poss. Adj. & Subst. (6.27:) & Past Active Pt. (6.7:) | ॰वत् | ॰वन्त् | ॰मत् | |
Comparative (6.25:) | 3.14: | ॰(ई)यस् | ॰(ई)यांस् | ॰(ई)यस् |
Poss. Adj. & Subst. (6.27: & .26:) | 3.15: | ॰इन् | ॰इन् | ॰इ |
॰मिन् | ॰मिन् | ॰मि | ||
॰विन् | ॰विन् | ॰वि |
3.12: Two-Form Stems – ॰अत् | (strong ॰अन्त् a, weak ॰अत्) गछत् (gacch-at) a. “going” |
Pr. & Fut. Pt. act. |
a. गच्छ्॰ | ए॰ Singular | द्वि॰ Dual | ब॰ Plural | |||
पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | |
प्र॰ N. | ॰अन् (स्) b | ॰अत् (—) | ॰अन्तौ (औ) | ॰अती (ई) | ॰अन्तः (अस्) | ॰अन्ति (इ) d |
सं॰ V. | ॰अन् (—) c | |||||
द्वि॰ A. | ॰अन्तम् (अम्) | ॰अतः (अस्) d | ||||
तृ॰ I. | . . . (N.C. T.s) | . . . | ॰अद्भिः (भिस्) | |||
. . . | ||||||
स॰ L. | . . . | . . . | ॰अत्सु (सु) |
a. | महत् “great,” originally a pr. pt., declines like 3.12: ex. forms strong stem in ॰आन्त्, sg. voc. is ॰अन् (3.8.3:). |
b. | Rule 3.8.1:, the stem in ॰अत् is an exception to this rule of lengthening the vowel in the strong m. sg. nom. |
c. | Rule 2.23:, final त् of strong stem ॰अन्त् is dropped. |
d. | The rest of the weak forms can be easily determined from the example in weak m. pl. acc. |
3.13: Two-Form Stems – ॰मत्/॰वत् | (s. ॰मन्त्/॰वन्त्, w. ॰मत्/॰वत्) धीमत् (dhī-m-at) a. “intelligent” भगवत् (bhaga-v-at) m. “the Lord” |
Possessive Adj. & Subst. (॰मत् / ॰वत्) & Past Active Pt. (॰वत्) |
a. धी॰ m. भग॰ | ए॰ Singular | द्वि॰ Dual | ब॰ Plural | |||
पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | |
प्र॰ N. | ॰मान्/वान् (स्) a | . . . the rest like (म्॰/व्॰) अत् (3.12) . . . |
a. | Rule 3.8.1:, the vowel is lengthened in the strong m. sg. nom. |
b. | भवत् (bha̍v-at), as pr. pt. of √भू (i.e., the root भू), meaning “being” is declined like ॰अत् (3.12:). As a pronoun meaning “your honor,” it declines like ॰वत् (cf. 4.18:), i.e., m. sg. nom. भवान्, du. भवन्तौ, etc. |
c. | कियत् (ki-yat) “how much?” and इयत् (i-yat) “so much” (4.18:) decline like ॰वत्, e.g., m. sg. nom. कियान्, du. कियन्तौ, etc. |
3.14: Two-Form Stems – ॰(ई)यस् a | (s. ॰(ई)यांस्, w. ॰(ई)यस्) श्रेयस् (śre̍-yas) a. comparative “better” |
Comparative |
a. श्रे॰ | ए॰ Singular | द्वि॰ Dual | ब॰ Plural | |||
पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | |
प्र॰ N. | ॰(ई)यान् (स्) | ॰(ई)यः (—) | ॰(ई)यांसौ (औ) | ॰(ई)यसी (ई) | ॰(ई)यांसः (अस्) | ॰(ई)यांसि (इ) |
सं॰ V. | ॰(ई)यन् (—) | |||||
द्वि॰ A. | ॰(ई)यांसम् (अम्) | ॰(ई)यसः (अस्) | ||||
तृ॰ I. | . . . (N.C. T.s) | . . . | ॰(ई)योभिः (भिस्) | |||
. . . | ||||||
स॰ L. | . . . | . . . | ॰(ई)यःसु (सु) |
a. | ई of ॰ईयस् (see 6.25:) is a connecting vowel that is sometimes dropped when forming the stem, e.g., श्रेयस् śre̍-yas. |
3.15: Two-Form Stems – ॰इन्/॰मिन्/॰विन् | (s. ॰इन्/॰मिन्/विन्, w. ॰इ/॰मि/॰वि) धनिन् (dhan-in) a. “wealthy” स्वामिन् (svā-m-in) m. “master” |
Possessive. Adj. & Subst. |
a. धन्॰ m. स्वा-म्॰ | ए॰ Singular | द्वि॰ Dual | ब॰ Plural | |||
पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | |
प्र॰ N. | ॰ई (स्) a | ॰इ (—) | ॰इनौ (औ) | ॰इनी (ई) | ॰इनः (अस्) | ॰ईनि (इ) c |
सं॰ V. | ॰इन् (—) | ॰इन्/॰इ (—) b | ||||
द्वि॰ A. | ॰इनम् (अम्) | ॰इ (—) | ||||
तृ॰ I. | ॰इना (आ) | ॰इभ्याम् (भ्याम्) | ॰इभिः (भिस्) | |||
च॰ D. | ॰इने (ए) | ॰इभ्यः (भ्यस्) | ||||
प॰ Ab. | ॰इनः (अस्) | |||||
ष॰ G. | ॰इनोः (ओस्) | ॰इनाम् (आम्) | ||||
स॰ L. | ॰इनि (इ) | ॰इषु (सु) |
a. | Rule 3.8.1:, stem vowel is lengthened in m. sg. nom. Rule 3.8.2:, in m. sg. nom. न् is dropped for stems ending in न्. |
b. | Refer to 3.10.a: for this irreg. distribution of strong and weak forms. The n. sg. voc. has an alternate weak form, like the n. sg. nom. acc. |
c. | These stems in n. pl. nom. voc. acc., like m. sg. nom., lengthen the stem vowel. |
ब॰ Plural | |||
प्र॰ N. | आपः (अस्) a | ||
सं॰ V. | |||
द्वि॰ A. | अपः (अस्) | ||
तृ॰ I. | अद्भिः (भिस्) b | ||
. . . | . . . (N.C. T.s) | ||
स॰ L. | ॰अप्सु (सु) |
a. | The strong pl. nom. voc. lengthen the अ. |
b. | Substitute त् for final प् before terminations in भ्, which then softens (2.42:) |
ए॰ Singular | द्वि॰ Dual | ब॰ Plural | ||||
पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | |
प्र॰ N. | स् | — | औ | ई | अस् | इ |
सं॰ V. | — | |||||
द्वि॰ A. | अम् | अस् | ||||
तृ॰ I. | आ | भ्याम् | भिस् | |||
च॰ D. | ए | भ्यस् | ||||
प॰ Ab. | अस् | |||||
ष॰ G. | ओस् | आम् | ||||
स॰ L. | इ | सु |
Part of speech | Para.# | Suffix | Strong Form | Middle Form | Weak Form |
Redup. Past Active Pt. (6.4:) | 3.19: | ॰वस् | ॰वांस् | ॰वत् | ॰उष् |
Mostly m. agent nouns (6.26:) | 3.20: | ॰अन् | ॰आन् | ॰अ | ॰न् |
Mostly n. action nouns (6.26:) | 3.22: | ॰मन् | ॰मान् | ॰व | ॰म्न् |
Possessive adj. (6.27:) and m. & n. subst. (6.26:) | ॰वन् | ॰वान् | ॰व | ॰व्न् | |
Adj. expressing “-ward,” formed by cmpd. with root अञ्च् “bend” | 3.24: | ॰अच् | ॰अञ्च् | ॰अच् | ॰ईच् after य् a ॰ऊच् after व् |
a. | Some words with the stem ॰अच् only have two forms – a strong and weak, the weak taking the form of ॰अच्. Like with the two-form stems, in these words the weak form is taken by all cases that are not strong (see 3.25:). |
3.19: Three-Form Stems – ॰वस् a | (s. ॰वांस्, m. वत्, w. ॰उष् a) विद्वस् (vid-va̍s) (5.28: & 6.4:) a. “wise” |
Reduplicative Perfect Participle |
a. विद्॰ | ए॰ Singular | द्वि॰ Dual | ब॰ Plural | |||
पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | |
प्र॰ N. | ॰वान् (स्) | ॰वत् (—) | ॰वांसौ (औ) | ॰उषी (ई) | ॰वांसः (अस्) | ॰वांसि (इ) |
सं॰ V. | ॰वन् (—) | |||||
द्वि॰ A. | ॰वांसम् (अम्) | ॰उषः (अस्) b | ||||
तृ॰ I. | . . . (N.C. T.s) | . . . | ॰वद्भिः (भिस्) | |||
. . . | ||||||
स॰ L. | . . . | . . . | ॰वत्सु (सु) |
a. | The व is weakened to उ, called saṃprasāraṇa (2.3.a:). Then rule 2.101:, under influence of preceding liquid vowel (or क् र्), स् becomes ष्. |
b. | Certain of these participles insert a connecting vowel इ before the suffix ॰वस्. In the weak form, where the stem turns to ॰उष्, instead of a further confusion of the original by application of vowel sandhi between इ and उ (→यु), the preceding इ is dropped, e.g., तस्थिवस् (tasth-i-va̍s) “that which has stood” in the weak cases would be तस्थुष्॰ (tasth-uṣ) plus the weak vowel terminations. |
3.20: Three-Form Stems – ॰अन् | (s. ॰आन्, m. अ, w. ॰न्, opt. weak ॰अन्) राजन् (rā̍j-an) m. “king” |
Mostly masc. agent nouns |
m. राज्॰ | ए॰ Singular | द्वि॰ Dual | ब॰ Plural |
पुं॰ m. | पुं॰ m. | पुं॰ m. | |
प्र॰ N. | ॰आ (स्) a | ॰आनौ (औ) | ॰आनः (अस्) |
सं॰ V. | ॰अन् (—) | ||
द्वि॰ A. | ॰आनम् (अम्) | राज्ञः (अस्) b | |
तृ॰ I. | . . . (N.C. T.s) | . . . | ॰अभिः (भिस्) |
. . . | |||
स॰ L. | राज्ञि b or राजनि c (इ) | . . . | ॰असु (सु) |
a. | Rule 3.8.1:, stem vowel is lengthened in m. sg. nom. Rule 3.8.2:, in m. sg. nom. न् is dropped for stems ending in न्. |
b. | Rule 2.87:, in the weak forms of राजन्, the preceding palatal ज् converts the weak न् to palatal ञ्, both written with the conjunct ज्ञ्. If the original अन् was accented (a̍n), then the lost accent in weak form is thrown forward onto the termination (3.3.3:) |
c. | In weak sg. loc, instead of ॰न्, the optional stem ॰अन् may be applied. |
Strong | Middle | Weak | ||
अहन् | (a̍h-an) n. “day” (6.26:) | ॰आन् | ॰अस् a | न् |
पन्थन् | (pa̍nth-an) m. “path” | पन्थान् b | पथि | पथ् |
श्वन् | (ś-v-a̍n) m. “dog” | ॰वान् | ॰व | उन् |
॰हन् c | (-h-an) a. at end of cmpd. “destroyer” | ॰हन् | ॰ह | घ्न् |
a. | अहन् has the normal distribution of three-form stems in neuter (3.17:), hence the middle forms would be sg. nom. voc. acc. अहः, pl. inst. अहोभिः (2.24: & 2.33:) etc., and pl. loc. अहःसु (2.24:). This middle stem अहस् indicates that अहन् is actually a defective stem, needing to borrow that form from another word, अहर्/अहस् which also means “day,” to complete its full declension. As a prior member of a compound, where the middle stem is normally employed (6.29:), this ॰अस् is almost always treated as ॰अर्, e.g., अहरहः (ahar-ahaḥ 2.34:) “day by day.” |
b. | Rule 3.8.2: applies to the m. sg. nom. of this and the following two irregular stems where final न् is dropped. For पन्थन्, after dropping final न्, the sg. nom. and the sg. voc. then add स् to form पन्थाः. Only the strong form retains the medial nasal. |
c. | हन् is a root used at the end of a cmpd. (6.24:), but is declined similar to a stem in ॰अनु. It also takes long vowel in sg. nom. only (॰हा) and allows the optional stem हन् h-an in weak sg. loc. |
3.22: Three-Form Stems – ॰मन्/॰वन् | (s. ॰मान्/॰वान्, m. ॰म/॰व, w. ॰म्न्/॰व्न्, opt. w. ॰मन्/॰वन्) आत्मन् (āt-ma̍n) m. “self” नामन् (nā̍-man) n. “name” |
Mostly neuter action nouns (॰मन्) & Possessive a., m. & n. subst. (॰वन्) |
m.आत्॰ n. ना॰ | ए॰ Singular | द्वि॰ Dual | ब॰ Plural | |||
पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | |
प्र॰ N. | ॰मा (स्) a | ॰म (—) | ॰मानौ (औ) | ॰म्नी or ॰मनी b (ई) | ॰मानः (अस्) | ॰मानि (इ) |
सं॰ V. | ॰मन् (—) | ॰म or ॰मन् b (—) | ||||
द्वि॰ A. | ॰मानम् (अम्) | ॰म (—) | ॰म्नः or ॰मनः c (अस्) | |||
तृ॰ I. | ॰म्ना or ॰मना c (आ) | . . . (N.C. T.s) | ॰मद्भिः (भिस्) | |||
. . . | ||||||
स॰ L. | ॰म्नि or ॰मनि b (इ) | . . . | ॰मसु (सु) |
a. | Rule 3.8.1:, stem vowel is lengthened in m. sg. nom. Rule 3.8.2:, in m. sg. nom. न् is dropped for stems ending in न्. |
b. | Similar to 3.20.c:, In weak m.n. sg. loc, in weak n. du. nom. voc. acc., and in middle n. sg. voc. the optional stem ॰मन्/॰वन् may be applied. The rest of the weak forms do not take the optional stem ॰मन्/॰वन् unless required by 3.22.c: below. |
c. | The weak forms of ॰मन्/॰वन्, when preceded by a consonant, as in the example here (आत्-मन्), do not drop the stem vowel, thus here avoiding the conjunction of three consonants, here of त् t with म्न् mn. So they necessarily take the optional stem ॰मन्/॰वन्}. |
Strong Stem | Middle Stem | Weak Stem | ||
मघवन् | (magh-a̍-van a) m. “a name of Indra” | ॰अवान् | ॰अव | ॰ओन् b |
युवन् | (y-u̍-van a) m. “youth” | ॰उवान् b | ॰उव | ॰ऊन् c |
a. | The vowel before the ॰वन् becomes involved in the declension, so I have included it in the paradigm. Rule 3.8.2:, in sg. nom. न् is dropped for these irregular stems ending in न्. |
b. | The weak stem ॰ओन् is formed by saṃprasāraṇa (2.3.a:) where व weakens to उ, which then combines with the preceding व into ओ (2.8:). |
c. | The weak stem ॰ऊन् is formed similar to 3.23.b:, where व weakens to उ, which then combines with the preceding उ into ऊ (2.7:). |
3.24: Three-Form Stems – ॰अच् | (s. ॰अञ्च्, m. ॰अच्, w. ॰ईच् or ॰ऊच्) a प्रत्यच् (prat-i-a̍c) a. “backward, westward” |
Adj. “-ward,” formed by cmpd. with verb अञ्च् “bend” |
a. प्रत् | ए॰ Singular | द्वि॰ Dual | ब॰ Plural | |||
पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | |
प्र॰ N. | ॰यङ् (स्) b | ॰यक् (—) c | ॰यञ्चौ (औ) | ॰ईची d (ई) | ॰यञ्चः (अस्) | ॰यञ्चि (इ) f |
सं॰ V. | ॰यङ् (—) | |||||
द्वि॰ A. | ॰यञ्चम् (अम्) | ॰ईचः (अस्) | ||||
तृ॰ I. | . . . (N.C. T.s) | . . . | ॰यग्भिः (भिस्) e/a> | |||
. . . | ||||||
स॰ L. | . . . | . . . | ॰यक्षु (सु) e |
a. | These adjectives normally have a य् (=इ) or a व् (=उ) before ॰अच्. In this example the first member is the preposition प्रति “back.” This इ or उ becomes involved in the declension, so it has been included in the paradigm. For those with उ b/4 ॰अच्, m. sg. nom. would be ॰वङ्, etc. |
b. | प्रत्यञ्च्स् is reduced to प्रत्यञ् by 2.23: and then is changed to permitted final प्रत्यङ् by 2.24:. |
c. | The middle stem प्रत्यच् is changed to permitted final प्रत्यक् by 2.24:. |
d. | The य् or व् before ॰अच् weakens to ॰ईच् or ॰ऊच् respectively in the weak cases. |
e. | The middle stem final च् is changed to permitted final क् before pada term., then is softened to ग् by 2.43: before soft cons. or combined with hard cons. सु term. to क्षु by 2.101:. |
f. | Rule 2.95:, inserted nasal न् changes to corresponding nasal of the class consonant च्. |
Strong Stem | Middle Stem | Weak Stem | ||
अन्वच् | (an-v-a̍c) “following” | ॰वञ्च् | ॰वच् | ॰ऊच् |
न्यच् | (n-y-a̍c) “downward” | ॰यञ्च् | ॰यच् | ॰ईच् |
विष्यच् | (viṣ-v-ac) “all-pervading” | ॰वञ्च् | ॰वच् | ॰ऊच् |
सम्यच् | (sam-y-a̍c) “going together” | ॰यञ्च् | ॰यच् | ॰ईच् |
उदच् | (u̍d-a̍c) “upward, northern” | ॰अञ्च् | ॰अच् | ॰ईच् a |
तिर्यच् | (tir-y-a̍c) “traverse” | ॰यञ्च् | ॰यच् | ॰अश्च् b |
Exceptions with only two-forms (3.18.a:) | ||||
अवाच् | (a̍v-a-ac) “downward, southern” | ॰आञ्च् | ॰आच् | |
पराच् | (pa̍r-a-ac) “turned away” | |||
प्राच् | (pr-a̍-ac) “forward, eastern” |
a. | This word has no य् but still takes ॰ईच् as if it did. |
b. | The unusual weak form is actually closer to the original first member of the cmpd., तिरस् “trans-,” the स् becoming palatal श् due to palatal च् (2.24: and .27:). |
a. | Sg. nom. पुमान् (anusvāra reverting to न्), sg. voc. पुमन् (3.8.3:). |
b. | Pl. inst. पुम्भिः, pl. loc. पुंसु (2.54:). |
Vowel-ending Noun Stems
3.27: Vowel-ending noun stems. Nouns (including adjectives) ending in vowels are the most common words in Saṃskṛta. They do not take the full set of normal case terminations (3.2:), but rather a modified subset of these terminations. Even within the various vowel-ending stems, there is as much deviation as there is affinity between them. The deviation is so much that it is hardly worth trying to remember each of the termination sets in isolation, apart from the vowel stem to which they attach.
Therefore I have chosen to present the full (sandhi applied) final form of the declensions with both the final stem vowel and the terminations as a unit. In this way it is a bit easier to remember and much easier to apply to their intended stems.
Another device I have used to simplify the charts is to show just those forms in neuter and feminine that differ (noted with the mathematical symbol ∆, called “delta” – meaning “difference”) from the masculine (or polysyllabic from mono- in 3.36:), and therefore need to be remembered. For example, ॰अ ending n. voc. sg. would be ॰अ, the same as m. voc. sg.; ॰आ ending f. nom. pl. would be ॰आः, the same as m. nom. pl.
3.28: Vowel Stems – ॰अ/॰आ a | राम (rām-a) m. “Lord Rāma” फल (pha̍l-a) n. “fruit” सीता (si̍ta-ā) f. “Sītā, wife of Rāma” |
(exceptions to the normal case terms. 3.2: or the common pronominal terms. 4.4: are in bold) |
m.राम्॰ n.फल्॰ f.सीत्॰ | ए॰ Singular | द्वि॰ Dual | ब॰ Plural | ||||||
पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. ∆fr.m. | स्त्री॰ f. ∆fr.m. | पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. ∆fr.m. | स्त्री॰ f. ∆fr.m. | पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. ∆fr.m. | स्त्री॰ f. ∆fr.m. | |
प्र॰ N. | ॰अः | ॰अम् | ॰आ | ॰औ | ॰ए c | ॰ए c | ॰आः | ॰आनि c & e | . . . c |
सं॰ V. | ॰अ | . . . | ॰ए b | ||||||
द्वि॰ A. | ॰अम् | . . . | ॰आम् c | ॰आन् c | ॰आः c | ||||
तृ॰ I. | ॰एन c | . . . | ॰अया c | ॰आभ्याम् c | . . . | . . . | ॰ऐः c | . . . | ॰आभिः c |
च॰ D. | ॰आय | . . . | ॰आयै d | ॰एभ्यः c | . . . | ॰आभ्यः c | |||
प॰ Ab. | ॰आत् | . . . | ॰आयाः d | ||||||
ष॰ G. | ॰अस्य c | . . . | ॰अयोः c | . . . | . . . | ॰आनाम् f | . . . | . . . | |
स॰ L. | ॰ए | . . . | ॰आयाम् d | ॰एषु c & f | . . . | ॰आसु c |
a. | These terminations are for nouns and adjectives. There are other sets of terms. (ch. 4) for numerals and pronouns, including pronominal adjs. (4.16:) – many of which also end in अ or आ. |
b. | The f. voc. of अम्बा “mother” is the simpler अम्ब (the first word a child learns), instead of अम्बे (perhaps an indication that Saṃskṛta was once a natural language of the people). |
c. | These terms. are based on the common pronominal terms. (4.4:). M.n. pl. inst. ॰ऐः term. is from m.n. of the pronoun तद् (4.6:), and f. pl nom. voc. ॰आः is from fem. of तद् (4.6:). |
d. | These terms. are based on the common feminine terms. ऐ आस् आम् taken by feminine stems in आ इ ई उ ऊ, including pronominal stems (4.4:). |
e. | The lengthening of the अ and insertion of न् before the n. pl. nom. voc. acc. इ has affinity with the strong changeable stems in neuter (3.2.b:). |
f. | Dental न् of ॰आनाम् is susceptible to 2.92:, e.g., रामाणाम्. Loc. षु from सु because of preceding vowel (2.101:). |
3.29: Vowel Stems – ॰इ a | हरि (ha̍r-i) m. “Lord Hari (Viṣṇu)” वारि (vā̍r-i) n. “water” - similarly n. ॰तृ (3.40:) मति (mat-i) f. “thought” |
(exceptions to the normal case terms. are in bold) |
m.हर्॰ n.वार्॰ f.मत्॰ | ए॰ Singular | द्वि॰ Dual | ब॰ Plural | ||||||
पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. (∆fr.m.) | स्त्री॰ f. (∆fr.m.) | पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. (∆fr.m.) | स्त्री॰ f. (∆fr.m.) | पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. (∆fr.m.) | स्त्री॰ f. (∆fr.m.) | |
प्र॰ N. | ॰इः | ॰इ a | . . . | ॰ई | ॰इनी | . . . | ॰अयः | ॰ईनि | . . . |
सं॰ V. | ॰ए | . . . | |||||||
द्वि॰ A. | ॰इम् | . . . | ॰ईन् | ॰ईः | |||||
तृ॰ I. | ॰इना | . . . | ॰या | ॰इभ्याम् | . . . | . . . | ॰इभिः | . . . | . . . |
च॰ D. | ॰अये | ॰इने a | ॰यै or ॰अये b | ॰इभ्यः | . . . | . . . | |||
प॰ Ab. | ॰एः | ॰इनः a | ॰याः or ॰एः b | ||||||
ष॰ G. | ॰योः | ॰इनोः a | . . . | ॰ईनाम् | . . . | . . . | |||
स॰ L. | ॰औ c | ॰इनि a | ॰याम् or ॰औः b | ॰इषु | . . . | . . . |
a. | Neuter adjectives (not substantives) in ॰इ, ॰उ or ॰तृ (3.40:) may be declined like masculine throughout (ex. sg. du. pl. nom. voc. acc.) (–neut. ॰तृ declining like masc. ॰तृ, not masc. ॰इ). But neuter adjs. and subst. in ॰इ, ॰उ also may be declined like masculine in rare sg. voc. |
b. | Feminine adjectives and substantives in ॰इ or ॰उ may be declined like masculine in sg. dat. abl./gen. loc., in place of the common feminine terminations. |
c. | Apart from this vṛddhi of उ instead of इ, stems in ॰इ are declined similar to stems in उ. |
3.30: Vowel Stems – ॰उ | गुरु (gur-u̍) m. “teacher” मधु (ma̍dh-u) n. “honey” धेनु (dhen-u̍) f. “cow” c |
m.गुर्॰ n.मध्॰ f.धेन्॰ | ए॰ Singular | द्वि॰ Dual | ब॰ Plural | ||||||
पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. (∆fr.m.) | स्त्री॰ f. (∆fr.m.) | पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. (∆fr.m.) | स्त्री॰ f. (∆fr.m.) | पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. (∆fr.m.) | स्त्री॰ f. (∆fr.m.) | |
प्र॰ N. | ॰उः | ॰उ a | . . . | ॰ऊ | ॰उनी | . . . | ॰अवः | ॰ऊनि | . . . |
सं॰ V. | ॰ओ | . . . | |||||||
द्वि॰ A. | ॰उम् | . . . | ॰ऊन् | ॰ऊः | |||||
तृ॰ I. | ॰उना | . . . | ॰वा | ॰उभ्याम् | . . . | . . . | ॰उभिः | . . . | . . . |
च॰ D. | ॰अवे | ॰उने a | ॰वै or ॰अवे b | ॰उभ्यः | . . . | . . . | |||
प॰ Ab. | ॰ओः | ॰उनः a | ॰वाः or ॰ओः b | ||||||
ष॰ G. | ॰वोः | ॰उनोः a | . . . | ॰ऊनाम् | . . . | . . . | |||
स॰ L. | ॰औ c | ॰उनि a | ॰वाम् or ॰औः b | ॰उषु | . . . | . . . |
a. | See 3.29.a:. |
b. | See 3.29.b:. |
c. | Fem. adjs. in ॰उ denoting a quality, e.g., मृदु adj. “soft,” optionally add fem. suffix ॰ई (→॰वी 2.11:), declining like नदी. |
3.31: There are several irregular declensions of certain common words in short ॰इ and ॰उ.
3.32: पति (pa̍t-i) m., when it means “husband” (not “lord”) and is not at the end of a cmpd., declines irregularly in sg. inst. dat. abl. gen. loc. as follows. Otherwise, like हरि.m. पत्॰ | ए॰ Singular |
पुं॰ m. | |
तृ॰ I. | ॰या |
च॰ D. | ॰ये |
प॰ Ab. | ॰युः |
ष॰ G. | |
स॰ L. | ॰यौ |
m. सख्॰ | ए॰ Singular | द्वि॰ Dual | ब॰ Plural |
पुं॰ m. | पुं॰ m. | पुं॰ m. | |
प्र॰ N. | ॰आ | ॰आयौ | ॰आयः |
सं॰ V. | ॰ए | ||
द्वि॰ A. | ॰आयम् | . . . | |
तृ॰ I. | ॰या | . . . | . . . |
च॰ D. | ॰ये | . . . | |
प॰ Ab. | ॰युः | ||
ष॰ G. | . . . | . . . | |
स॰ L. | ॰यौ | . . . |
n.अक्ष्॰ अस्थ्॰ दध्॰ सक्थ्॰ | ए॰ Singular | द्वि॰ Dual | ब॰ Plural |
नपुं॰ n. | नपुं॰ n. | नपुं॰ n. | |
तृ॰ I. | ॰ना | . . . | . . . |
च॰ D. | ॰ने | . . . | |
प॰ Ab. | ॰नः | ||
ष॰ G. | ॰नोः | ॰नाम् | |
स॰ L. | ॰नि or ॰अनि (cf. 3.20.c:) | . . . |
a. | Rule 2.92:, न् will become ण् after अक्ष्, e.g., अक्ष्णा. |
m. द्यु॰ / दिव्॰ | ए॰ Singular | ब॰ Plural | |
पुं॰ m. | पुं॰ m. | ||
प्र॰ N. | द्यौः | Dual does not occur in the literature | दिवः |
सं॰ V. | |||
द्वि॰ A. | दिवम् | ||
तृ॰ I. | दिवा | द्युभिः | |
च॰ D. | दिवे | द्युभ्यः | |
प॰ Ab. | दिवः | ||
ष॰ G. | दिवाम् | ||
स॰ L. | दिवि | द्युषु |
3.36: Vowel Stems – ॰ई/॰ऊ Feminine nouns and adjectives – including adj. cmpds. in any gender (mono/polysyllabic distinction pertaining only to the final cmpd. member only) | monosyll. | धी (dh-ī̍) f. “thought” भू (bh-u̍) f. “earth” | ||||||
polysyll. | नदी (nad-ī̍) f. “river” वधू (vadh-ū̍) f. “woman” | |||||||
Stems in ॰ई and ॰ऊ are similarly declined, but differ between monosyllabic and polysyllabic stems, except in the pada terminations.
|
f. ध्॰/भ्॰ नद्॰/वध्॰ | ए॰ Singular | द्वि॰ Dual | ब॰ Plural | |||||||||
monosyll. | polysyll. | monosyll. | polysyll. | monosyll. | polysyll. | |||||||
ई | ऊ | ई | ऊ | ई | ऊ | ई | ऊ | ई | ऊ | ई | ऊ | |
प्र॰ N. | ॰ईः a | ॰ऊः a | ॰ई c | ॰ऊः | ॰इयौ | ॰उवौ | ॰यौ | ॰वौ | ॰इयः | ॰उवः | ॰यः | ॰वः |
सं॰ V. | ॰इ a | ॰उ a | ||||||||||
द्वि॰ A. | ॰इयम् | ॰उवम् | ॰ईम् d | ॰ऊम् d | ॰ईः d | ॰ऊः d | ||||||
तृ॰ I. | ॰इया | ॰उवा | ॰या | ॰वा | ॰ईभ्याम् | ॰ऊह्याम् | . . . | . . . | ॰ईभिः | ॰ऊभिः | . . . | . . . |
च॰ D. | ॰इयै b or ॰इये | ॰उवै b or ॰उवे | ॰यै | ॰वै | ॰ईभ्यः | ॰ऊभ्यः | . . . | . . . | ||||
प॰ Ab. | ॰इयाः b or ॰इयः | ॰उवाः b or ॰उवः | ॰याः | ॰वाः | ||||||||
ष॰ G. | ॰इयोः | ॰उवोः | ॰योः | ॰वोः | ॰इयाम् | ॰उवाम् | ॰ईनाम् | ॰ऊनाम् | ||||
स॰ L. | ॰इयाम् b or ॰इयि | ॰उवाम् b or ॰उवि | ॰याम् | ॰वाम् | ॰ईषु | ॰ऊषु | . . . | . . . |
a. | The monosyllabic stems use the nom. form in sg. voc., instead of normal case term. Polysyllabic stems shorten the vowel in sg. voc. |
b. | The monosyllabic stems may optionally take the common feminine term. (but note the resulting identity between the pl. gen. and the optional sg. loc.), the polysyllabic must. |
c. | The polysyllabic ॰ई in sg. nom. drops the normal case term. स्, however it is retained in sg. nom. लक्ष्मीः “goddess Lakṣmī” and तन्त्रीः “string,” and optionally retained in तन्द्री a. “sloth.” |
d. | d. Polysyllabic sg. pl. acc. do not change ई/ऊ to य्/व्, but instead drop the vowel of normal case terms. अम् अस् to म् स्, respectively. |
ए॰ Singular | द्वि॰ Dual | ब॰ Plural | |
स्त्री॰ f. | स्त्री॰ f. | स्त्री॰ f. | |
प्र॰ N. | स्त्री | स्त्रियौ | स्त्रियः |
सं॰ V. | स्त्रि | ||
द्वि॰ A. | स्त्रियम् or स्त्रीम् | स्त्रियः or स्त्रीः | |
तृ॰ I. | स्त्रिया | स्त्रीभ्याम् | स्त्रीभिः |
च॰ D. | स्त्रियै | स्त्रीभ्यः | |
प॰ Ab. | स्त्रियाः | ||
ष॰ G. | स्त्रियोः | स्त्रीणाम् | |
स॰ L. | स्त्रियाम् | स्त्रीषु |
3.38: Vowel Stems – ॰ऋ | Agent: Relation: | दातृ (dā̍t-ṛ) m. “giver” पितृ (pit-ṛ̍) m. “father” | |
Agent nouns or Names of relations (unusual forms in bold) |
Mostly तृ suffix (6.26:), originally a cons. stem in ॰अर् (cognate to English -er), declines similar to three form stems in ॰अन् (3.20:). | Strong | Middle | Weak |
॰आर् (vṛddhi) m. names of agents or ॰अर् (guṇa) m.f. names of relations | ॰ऋ | ॰र् / ॰ॠ |
Ag. दात्॰ Rel. पित्॰ | ए॰ Singular | द्वि॰ Dual | ब॰ Plural | |||
Agent | Relation | Agent | Relation | Agent | Relation | |
प्र॰ N. | ॰आ | ॰आरौ | अरौ | ॰आरः | ॰अरः | |
सं॰ V. | ॰अर् | |||||
द्वि॰ A. | ॰आरम् | ॰अरम् | ॰ॠन् | ॰ॠन् m., if f. ॰ॠः a | ||
तृ॰ I. | ॰रा | ॰ऋभ्याम् | ॰ऋभिः | |||
च॰ D. | रे | ऋभ्यः | ||||
प॰ Ab. | ॰उर् (e.g. दातुः) | |||||
ष॰ G. | ॰रोः | ॰ॠणाम् | ||||
स॰ L. | ॰अरि | ॰ऋषु |
a. | Feminine relations differ from masculine only in pl acc. For feminine agents and Neuters see 3.40: |
नप्तृ (na̍pt-ṛ) m. “grandson” भर्तृ (bhar-tṛ̍) m. “husband” | Though relations, decline like agents. | |||
स्वसृ (sva̍s-ṛ) f. “sister” | Though relation, declines like agent. However, f. pl acc. remains स्वसॄः. | |||
नृ (n-ṛ) m. “man” | Declines like relations. However, pl. gen. opt. takes ॰ऋणाम्. (In Veda, sg. dat. नरे and sg. gen. नरः). | |||
क्रोष्टृ (kroṣ-tṛ̍) m. “jackal” (lit. “yeller”) | Takes ॰उ, instead of ॰ऋ, in middle form, ∴ pl. inst. क्रोष्टुभिः. |
Neuter form of stems in ॰तृ | Decline like n. वारि (3.29:), replacing the vowel इ with ऋ, e.g., दातृ “giver” in n. sg. nom. is दातृ, sg. inst. is दातृणा. See also 3.29.a:, where it optionally declines like masc. ॰तृ in the inst. through loc. cases. | |||
Feminine form of agent stems in ॰तृ | Add feminine suffix ई (cf. 3.9:), e.g., दातृ “giver” in f. sg. nom. is दात्री (2.11:) and declines like नदी (3.36:). |
रै (r-ai) m. “wealth” | Before cons. रा॰, before vow. राय्॰ (2.71:). | |||
नौ (n-au̍) f. “ship” | Before cons. नौ॰, before vow. नाव्॰ (2.71:). Declines like रै. | |||
गो (g-o̍) m.f. “bull, cow” | Before cons. गौ॰, before vow. गव्॰ (2.71:). In strong cases b/4 cons. गौ॰, b/4 vow. गाव्॰ – गा॰ in sg. pl. acc. Sg. abl. gen. गवस् contracts to गोस्. | |||
द्यो (dy-o̍) f. “sky” | द्यो (dy-o) declines like गो (g-o), i.e., द्यौः (dy-auḥ), द्यावौ, द्यावः, etc. |
ए॰ Singular | द्वि॰ Dual | ब॰ Plural | ||||||||||
रै | नौ | गो | द्यो | रै | नौ | गो | द्यो | रै | नौ | गो | द्यो | |
प्र॰ N. | राः | नौः | गौः | द्यौः | रायौ | नावौ | गावौ | द्यावौ | रायः | नावः | गावः | द्यावः |
सं॰ V. | ||||||||||||
द्वि॰ A. | रायम् | नावम् | गाम् | द्याम् | गाः | द्याः | ||||||
तृ॰ I. | राया | नावा | गवा | द्यवा | राभ्याम् | नौभ्याम् | गोभ्याम् | द्योभ्याम् | राभिः | नौभिः | गोभिः | द्योभिः |
च॰ D. | राये | नावे | गवे | द्यवे | राभ्यः | नौभ्यः | गोभ्यः | द्योभ्यः | ||||
प॰ Ab. | रायः | नावः | गोः | द्योः | ||||||||
ष॰ G. | रायोः | नावोः | गवोः | द्यवोः | रायाम् | नावाम् | गवाम् | द्यवाम् | ||||
स॰ L. | रायि | नावि | गवि | द्यवि | रासु | नौषु | गोषु | द्योषु |
Go to Top ('Home' key on many Windows browsers)
4.1: Pronouns. Pronouns function as a substitue for other nouns, denoting a person or thing previously specified or understood in the context. Like in English, they can be classified as personal, demonstrative, relative, and interrogative. They are declined in संस्कृत differently from other nouns and adjectives.
Additionally, there are reflexive, possesive, and adjectival pronouns, where some decline like pronouns, others like regular nouns or adjectives, while a few are indeclinables. For the syntax of pronouns see 7.6:.
As 1st member in cmpd. | Three basic stem forms in declension | |||||
Sg. | Pl. | Sg. | Du. | Pl. | ||
अहम् | “I, we, us, mine” | मद् | अस्मद् | म | आव | अस्म |
त्वम् | “you, yours” | त्वद् | युष्मद् | त्व | युव | युष्म |
अहम् and त्वम् have no gender distinctions. Both personal pronouns commonly are also represented by what are called defective (not declined in all cases), enclitic (unaccented, 4.3:) forms, i.e., मा, त्वा, etc., only in acc., dat., and gen. (the even numbered – although there are scattered instances, prior to Panini, of their use in all the oblique cases (all cases except nom. and voc.). As with all pronouns, there is no vocative case and the sg. abl. and gen. differ. For just the personal pronouns, the pl. dat. and abl. also differ. Those in bold below differ significantly from their matching stem (म, त्व, etc.) |
ए॰ Singular | द्वि॰ Dual | ब॰ Plural | ||||||||||
म॰ stem | त्व॰ stem | आव॰ stem | युव॰ stem | अस्म॰ stem | युष्म॰ stem | |||||||
प्र॰ N. | अहम् | त्वम् | आवाम् | युवाम् | वयम् | यूयम् | ||||||
द्वि॰ A. | माम् | मा | त्वाम् | त्वा | नौ | वाम् | अस्मान् | नः | युष्मान् | वः | ||
तृ॰ I. | मया | त्वया | आवाभ्याम् | युवाभ्याम् | अस्माभिः | युष्माभिः | ||||||
च॰ D. | मह्यम् | मे | तुभ्यम् | ते | नौ | वाम् | अस्मभ्यम् | नः | युष्मभ्यम् | वः | ||
प॰ Ab. | मद् | त्वद् | अस्मद् | युष्मद् | ||||||||
ष॰ G. | मम | मे | तव | ते | आवयोः | नौ | युवयोः | वाम् | अस्माकम् a | नः | उष्माकम् a | वः |
स॰ L. | मयि | त्वयि | अस्मासु | युष्मासु |
a. | The pl gen. अस्माकम्, युष्माकम् are properly n. sg. possessive adjectives meaning “belonging to us/our, you/your,” respectively. |
1. | At beginning of a sentence, subordinate clause, or pāda (1.23:). |
2. | After vocatives, which are unaccented, except as first word in sentence – in which case, since vocatives are treated as not part of the sentence, an enclitic could not follow, as it would then violate 4.3.1: above. |
3. | Before unaccented particles च “and,” वा “or,” and ह (an exclamation), or the accented particle एव “only” – which all give emphasis to a preceding word. |
ए॰ Singular | द्वि॰ Dual | ब॰ Plural | |||||||
पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | स्त्री॰ f. | पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | स्त्री॰ f. | पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | स्त्री॰ f. | |
प्र॰ N. | औ | ए | ए | आनि | आस् | ||||
द्वि॰ A. | अम् | आम् | आन् | ||||||
तृ॰ I. | एन | या | आभ्याम् | आभिस् | |||||
च॰ D. | स्मै | स्यै | एभ्यस् | आभ्यस् | |||||
प॰ Ab. | स्मात् | स्यास् | |||||||
ष॰ G. | स्य | योस् | एषाम् | आसाम् | |||||
स॰ L. | स्मिन् | स्याम् | एषु | आसु |
एतद् | “this” | Immediate | (समीपतरम्) |
इदम् / एनद् | “this” (sometimes, relatively, “that”) | Near | (सन्निकृष्टम्) |
अदस् | “that” | Remote | (विप्रकृष्टम्) |
तद् | “that” | Out of sight | (परोक्षम्) |
ए॰ Singular | द्वि॰ Dual | ब॰ Plural | |||||||
पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | स्त्री॰ f. | पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | स्त्री॰ f. | पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | स्त्री॰ f. | |
प्र॰ N. | सः | तद् | सा | तौ | ते | ते | तानि | ताः | |
द्वि॰ A. | तम् | ताम् | तान् | ||||||
तृ॰ I. | तेन | तया | ताभ्याम् | तैः | ताभिः | ||||
च॰ D. | तस्मै | तस्यै | तेभ्यः | ताभ्यः | |||||
प॰ Ab. | तस्मात् | तस्याः | |||||||
ष॰ G. | तस्य | तयोः | तेषाम् | तासाम् | |||||
स॰ L. | तस्मिन् | तस्याम् | तेषु | तासु |
4.7: Demonstrative Pronoun – एतद् (e-ta̍-d) “this, these” (“he,” etc.). Has stem in एत॰. Forms by compounding ए॰ to the pronoun stem त॰. Declines exactly like तद् above, e.g., m. n. f. sg. nom. एषः एतद् एषाः…एतेषु एतासु.
4.8: Demonstrative Pronoun – इदम् (i-d-a̍m) “this/that, these/those” (“he,” etc.) refers to what immediately preceded, or is obvious, in the context. It has stems in अ॰, अन॰, इ॰, and इम॰, with the stem final अ or इ disappearing before आ॰ ए॰ initial terminations.ए॰ Singular | द्वि॰ Dual | ब॰ Plural | |||||||
पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | स्त्री॰ f. | पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | स्त्री॰ f. | पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | स्त्री॰ f. | |
प्र॰ N. | अयम् | इदम् | इयम् | इमौ | इमे | इमे | इमानि | इमाः | |
द्वि॰ A. | इमम् | इमाम् | इमान् | ||||||
तृ॰ I. | अनेन | अनया | आभ्याम् | एभ्यः | आभिः | ||||
च॰ D. | अस्मै | अस्यै | एभ्यः | आभ्यः | |||||
प॰ Ab. | अस्मात् | अस्याः | |||||||
ष॰ G. | अस्य | अनयोः | एषाम् | आसाम् | |||||
स॰ L. | अस्मिन् | अस्याम् | एषु | आसु |
ए॰ Singular | द्वि॰ Dual | ब॰ Plural | |||||||
पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | स्त्री॰ f. | पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | स्त्री॰ f. | पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | स्त्री॰ f. | |
प्र॰ N. | असौ | अदः | असौ | अमू | अमी | अमूनि | अमूः | ||
द्वि॰ A. | अमुम् | अमूम् | अमून् | ||||||
तृ॰ I. | अमुना | अमुया | अमूभ्याम् | अमीभिः | अमूभिः | ||||
च॰ D. | अमुष्मै | अमुष्यै | अमीभ्यः | अमूभ्यः | |||||
प॰ Ab. | अमुष्मात् | मुष्याः | |||||||
ष॰ G. | अमुष्य | अमुयोः | अमीषाम् | अमूषाम् | |||||
स॰ L. | अमुष्मिन् | अमुष्याम् | अमीषु | अमूषु |
ए॰ Singular | द्वि॰ Dual | ब॰ Plural | |||||||
पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | स्त्री॰ f. | पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | स्त्री॰ f. | पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | स्त्री॰ f. | |
द्वि॰ A. | एनम् | एनद् | एनाम् | एनौ | एने | एनान् | एनानि | एनाः | |
तृ॰ I. | एनेन | एनया | |||||||
ष॰ G. | एनयोः | ||||||||
स॰ L. |
ए॰ Singular | द्वि॰ Dual | ब॰ Plural | |||||||
पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | स्त्री॰ f. | पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | स्त्री॰ f. | पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | स्त्री॰ f. | |
प्र॰ N. | यः | यद् | या | यौ | ये | ये | यानि | याः | |
द्वि॰ A. | यम् | याम् | यान् | ||||||
तृ॰ I. | येन | यया | याभ्याम् | यैः | याभिः | ||||
च॰ D. | यस्मै | यस्यै | येभ्यः | याभ्यः | |||||
प॰ Ab. | . . . | . . . | |||||||
. . . |
ए॰ Singular | द्वि॰ Dual | ब॰ Plural | |||||||
पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | स्त्री॰ f. | पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | स्त्री॰ f. | पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | स्त्री॰ f. | |
प्र॰ N. | कः | किम् | का | कौ | के | के | कानि | काः | |
द्वि॰ A. | कम् | काम् | कान् | ||||||
तृ॰ I. | केन | कया | काभ्याम् | कैः | काभिः | ||||
च॰ D. | कस्मै | कस्यै | केभ्यः | काभ्यः | |||||
प॰ Ab. | . . . | . . . | |||||||
. . . |
Words that can take on the sense of a reflexive pronoun | Reflexive prounoun usage | |
आत्मन् “self” | Masculine noun in ॰मन् (3.22:) | In singular oblique cases can be used as a reflexive pronoun. |
स्व m.n. स्वा f. “own” | Possessive adj. declined per 4.16.3: | |
स्वयम् “itself” | Indeclinable. When not used as a reflexive, it means “spontaneously.” | As reflexive, can have the sense of nom., inst., or sometimes gen. |
निज a. | “inborn, native,” can be used in the sense of “(one’s) own.” | ||||
॰ईय suffix | With stems of personal pronouns and with तद् | मद्॰ stem | → मदीय “my” sg. | अस्मद्॰ stem | → अस्मदीय “our” pl. |
त्वद्॰ stem | → त्वदीय “your” sg. | युष्मद्॰ stem | → युष्मदीय “your” pl. | ||
तद्॰ | → तदीय “his, hers, its, theirs” | ||||
With | भवत्॰ (3.13.b:) | → भवदीय “your” (in respectful address) | |||
॰क suffix | With genitives | मम॰ | → मामक “my” | तव | → तावक “your” |
With | भवत्॰ | → भावत्क “your” (in respectful address) |
1. | Follow pron. decl. (त॰), thus taking ॰द् in n. sg. nom. voc. acc. | ||||||
n. sg. nom. voc. acc. | |||||||
अन्य | “other” | अन्यद् | |||||
अन्यतर | “either” | अन्यतरद् | |||||
इतर | “other” | इतरद् | |||||
एकतम | “one (of many)” | एकतमद् | |||||
कतम | “which of many?” | कतमद् | |||||
कतर | “which of two?” | कतरद् | |||||
2. | Follow pron. decl. (त॰), taking ॰म् (like in इदम्) in n. sg. nom. acc. | ||||||
n. sg. nom. acc. (voc. as in 4.16:) | |||||||
उभय | “both” (sg. pl. only) b | उभयम् | |||||
एक | “one” | एकम् | |||||
एकतर | “either” | एकतरम् | |||||
सर्व | “every, all” | सर्वम् | |||||
विश्व | “every, all” | विश्वम् | |||||
3. | Follow pron. decl. (त॰), like सर्व taking ॰म् in n. sg. nom. acc., and also may follow nominal decl. ॰अ/॰आ (3.28:) in m. n. sg. abl. loc. and in m. pl nom. (thus making their decl. identical to ॰अ/॰आ throughout in m./n./f. sg./du./pl. nom./voc./acc.). | ||||||
n. sg. nom. acc. | m. n. sg. loc. | ||||||
अधर | “inferior, western” | अधरम् | अधरस्मिन् | / अधरे | |||
अन्तर | “inner” | अन्तरम् | अन्तरस्मिन् | / अन्तरे | |||
अपर | “other, inferior” | अपरम् | अपरस्मिन् | / अपरे | |||
अवर | “posterior, western” | अवरम् | अवरस्मिन् | / अवरे | |||
उत्तर | “subsequent, northern” | उत्तरम् | उत्तरस्मिन् | / उत्तरे | |||
दक्षिण | “southern” | दक्षिणम् | दक्षिणस्मिन् | / दक्षिणे | |||
पर | “subsequent, other” | परम् | परस्मिन् | / परे | |||
पूर्व | “prior, eastern” | पूर्वम् | पूर्वस्मिन् | / पूर्वे | |||
स्व | “own” | स्वम् | स्वस्मिन् | / स्वे | |||
4. | Decline like ordinary adjs., except may follow pron. decl. (त॰) in oblique cases (other than nom. & voc.) of the singular. | ||||||
m. sg. loc. | |||||||
द्वितीय | “second” | द्वितीये | / द्वितीयस्मिन् | ||||
तृतीय | “third” | तृतीये | / तृतीयस्मिन् | ||||
5. | Decline like ordinary adjs., except may follow pron. decl. (त॰) m. pl. nom. | ||||||
m. pl. nom. | |||||||
अर्ध | “half” | अर्धाः | / अर्धे | ||||
अल्प | “little” | अल्पाः | / अल्पे | ||||
कतिपय | “some” | कतिपयाः | / कतिपये | ||||
चरम | “last” | चरमाः | / चरमे | ||||
द्वय/द्वितय | “twofold” (4.30:) | द्वयाः द्वितयाः | / द्वये द्वितये | ||||
प्रथम | “first” | प्रथमाः | / प्रथमे | ||||
and similar words in the stems ॰य and ॰तय (4.30:). | |||||||
a. | Any of these pronominal adjectives at the end of a bahuvrīhi (adjectival) compound (6.39:), e.g., अदृष्ट-पूर्व adj. “not seen before” (lit. “whose prior was not seen”), decline like ordinary adjectives. |
b. | For dual, use उभ॰ (declined in dual only) m. du. nom. acc. उभौ, n. f. du. nom. acc. उभे. |
1. | दृश् – Feminine is the same as masc. & neut. Decline like दिश् (3.6:) | |||
तादृश् | m.f.n. “like that”, “such” | कीदृश् | m.f.n. “like what?” | |
यादृश् | m.f.n. “like which” | मादृश् | m.f.n. “like me” | |
ईदृश् | m.f.n. “like this” | त्वादृश् | m.f.n. “like you” | |
2. | दृश – Feminine is formed with ई. Decline like राम (3.28:), नदी (3.36:) | |||
तादृश | m.n. “like that” | तादृशी | f. | |
यादृश | m.n. “like which” | यादृशी | f. | |
ईदृश | m.n. “like this” | ईदृशी | f. | |
कीदृश | m.n. “like what?” | कीदृशी | f. | |
मादृश | m.n. “like me” | मादृशी | f. | |
त्वादृश | m.n. “like you” | त्वादृशी | f. | |
3. | दृश – Feminine is formed with आ. Decline like राम/सीता (3.28:) | |||
तादृक्ष | m.n. “like that” | तादृक्षा | f. | |
यादृक्ष | m.n. “like which” | यादृक्षा | f. | |
ईदृक्ष | m.n. “like this” | ईदृक्षा | f. | |
कीदृक्ष | m.n. “like what?” | कीदृक्षा | f. |
तावात् | m.n. “that much” | तावती | f. | |
एतावात् | m.n. “this much” | एतावती | f. | |
यावात् | m.n. “as much” | यावती | f. | |
इयत् | m.n. “this much” | इयती | f. | |
कीयत् | m.n. “how much?” | कियती | f. |
तति | m.f.n. “that many” | कति | m.f.n. “how many?” | |
यति | m.f.n. “as many” |
कश्चिद् | m. | किञ्चिद् | n. | काचिद् | f. | |
कश्चन | m. | किञ्चन | n. | काचन | f. | |
कोऽपि (2.32:) | m. | किमपि | n. | कापि | f. | |
Similarly some adverbs are made into indefinite adverbs. | ||||||
कदा “when?” | → कदाचिद् / कदाचन / कदापि “sometime or other,” “once,” with न “never” | |||||
क्व “where?” | → क्वचिद् / क्वचन / क्वापि “somewhere or other,” with न “nowhere” |
यः कः | m. “whosoever” | यः कश्चिद् | m. “whoever” | |
यस्य कस्य | m.n. “of whomever” |
यो यः | m. “whoever,” “whatever in each case” |
Cardinals
4.23: Cardinals – the numerals 0, 1, 2, etc. (‘. . .’ at 61 onward, only showing where optional forms or certain sandhis occur).0 ० | शून्य | n. | 10 १० | दशन् | a.n. | 20 २० | विंशति f. | 30 ३० | त्रिंशत् f. | 40 ४० | चत्वारिंशत् f. | 50 ५० | पञ्चाशत् f. |
1 १ | एक | a.mnf.a | 11 ११ | एकादशन् | a.n.b | 21 २१ | एक॰ | 31 ३१ | एक॰ | 41 ४१ | एक॰ | 51 ५१ | एक॰ |
2 २ | द्व द्वि॰ | a.mnf., in cmpd. | 12 १२ | द्वादशन् | a.n.c | 22 २२ | द्वा॰ | 32 ३२ | द्वा॰ | 42 ४२ | द्वा॰ or द्वि॰e | 52 ५२ | द्वा॰ or द्वि॰ |
3 ३ | त्रि तिसृ | a.mn., a.f. | 13 १३ | त्रयोदशन् | a.n.d | 23 २३ | त्रयो॰ | 33 ३३ | त्रयस्॰ | 43 ४३ | त्रयश्॰ or त्रि॰ | 53 ५३ | त्रयः॰ or त्रि॰ |
4 ४ | चतुर् चतुसृ | a.mn., a.f. | 14 १४ | चतुर्दशन् | a.n. | 24 २४ | चतुर्॰ | 34 ३४ | चतुस्॰ | 44 ४४ | चतुश्॰ | 54 ५४ | चतुः॰ |
5 ५ | पञ्चन् | a.n. | 15 १५ | पञ्चदशन् | a.n. | 25 २५ | पञ्च॰ | 35 ३५ | पञ्च॰ | 45 ४५ | पञ्च॰ | 55 ५५ | पञ्च॰ |
6 ६ | षष् | a.n. | 16 १६ | षोडशन् | a.n.d | 26 २६ | षड्॰ | 36 ३६ | षट्॰ | 46 ४६ | षट्॰ | 56 ५६ | षट्॰ |
7 ७ | सप्तन् | a.n. | 17 १७ | सप्तदशन् | a.n. | 27 २७ | सप्त॰ | 37 ३७ | सप्त॰ | 47 ४७ | सप्त॰ | 57 ५७ | सप्त॰ |
8 ८ | अष्टन् or अष्टौ a.n. | 18 १८ | अष्टादशन् | a.n. | 28 २८ | अष्टा॰ | 38 ३८ | अष्टा॰ | 48 ४८ | अष्टा॰ or अष्ट॰ | 58 ५८ | अष्टा॰ or अष्ट॰ | |
9 ९ | नवन् | a.n. | 19 १९ | नवदशन् | a.n. | 29 २९ | नव॰ | 39 ३९ | नव॰ | 49 ४९ | नव॰ | 59 ५९ | नव॰ |
60 षष्टि f. | 70 सप्तति f. | 80 अशीति f. | 90 नवति f. | 100 शत | n. |
. . . (i.e., एक॰) | . . . | . . . | . . . | 101 एकशत | n. |
62 द्वा॰ or द्वि॰ | 72 द्वा॰ or द्वि॰ | 82 द्व्य्॰ | 92 द्वा॰ or द्वि॰ | 102 द्विशत | n. dvi̍-śataf |
63 त्रयः॰ or त्रि॰ | 73 त्रयः॰ or त्रि॰ | 83 त्र्य्॰ | 93 त्रयः॰ or त्रि॰ | 103 त्रिशत | n. tri̍-śata |
64 चतुः॰ | 74 चतुः॰ | 84 चतुर्॰ | 94 चतुर्॰ | 104 चतुःशत | n.catu̍ḥ-śata |
. . . | . . . | . . . | . . . | . . . | |
66 षट्॰ | 76 षट्॰ | 86 षड्॰ | 96 षण्णवति | ||
. . . | . . . | . . . | . . . | ||
68 अष्टा॰ or अष्ट॰ | 78 अष्टा॰ or अष्ट॰ | 88 अष्टा॰ | 98 अष्टा॰ or अष्ट॰ | 130 त्रिंशच्छत | n. triṃśa̍c-chata |
200 द्विशत | n. dvi-śata̍ f | or द्वे शते | 1,000 | सहस्र n. | or दश शतानि (lit. 10 100's) |
300 त्रिशत | n. tri-śata̍ | or त्रीणि शतानि | 10,000 | अयुत n. | or दश सहस्रानि |
400 चतुःशत | n. catuḥ-śata̍ | or चत्वारि शतानि | 100,000 | लक्ष m.n. | (= one lac) |
500 पञ्चशत | n. pañca-śata̍ | or पञ्चानि शतानि | 1,000,000 | नियुत n. | or दश लक्षानि |
10,000,000 | कोटि f. | (= one crore) (=107) | |||
108 | अर्बुद | n. | 1013 | शङ्क | m. |
109 | अब्ज | n. | 1014 | जलधि | m. |
1010 | खर्व | m.n. | 1015 | अन्त्य | n. |
1011 | निखर्व | m.n. | 1016 | मध्य | n. |
1012 | महापद्म | m. | 1017 | परार्ध | n. (the hightest number designation) |
a. | 1-4 are adjectives taking all three genders; 5-19 are adjectives in neuter only; 20-99 are fem. substantives; and 100 onward are substantives of various genders (mostly neuter). |
b. | The form एका॰ is used only for 11, the rest – 21, 31, etc. take एक॰. |
c. | द्वा is an old dual form, द्वादशन् lit. means “two and ten.” |
d. | त्रयो॰ is from त्रि in m. pl. nom., त्रयः (4.25:). But षोडशन् shows phonetic changes similar to 2.100: & 2.109:, except there is no lost aspiration that would transfer to the following dental. |
e. | Alternate forms द्वि॰ त्रि॰ अष्ट॰ are used for 40’s-70’s, and 90’s, the 80’s have no alternates. |
f. | 200, etc. differ from 102, etc. only by accent. शत śata̍ in compound is accented if 200, otherwise the added number (द्वि॰ dvi̍-) is accented for 102 (the same as for 11–99). |
ऊन॰ a. “less” | ऊनविंशतिः “twenty less (an understood one)” = 19 त्र्यूनत्रिंशत् “thirty less three (त्रि)”= 27 |
॰अधिक a. “plus” | एकाधिकं शतम् “hundred plus one” = 101 द्व्यधिकशतम् = 102 |
Addition w/wo च | नव नवतिश्च or नवतिर् नव “ninety and nine” = 99 |
Multiplication by prefixed cardinal | त्रिदशन् tri-daśa̍n “three times ten” = 30, the accent moving to the 2nd member of cmpd – but in unaccented texts this is in some cases ambiguous with the simple addition of the two members, e.g., अष्टशत may mean 108 (aṣṭa̍-śata) (4.23.f:) or 800 (aṣṭa-śata̍). An alternative to doubling or tripling a number is to use the dual or plural form of the number. |
एक mn. एका f. adj. “one” | Singular only, although its plural is used in an indefinite sense of “some,” “certain ones.” Declines like pronominal adj. सर्व (4.16.2:). |
द्व mfn. adj. “two” | Dual only, declines like stems in आ/आ (3.28:). |
त्रि mn. तिसृ f. adj. “three” चतुर् mn. चतुसृ f adj. “four” | Plural only, see declension below. Feminine चतुसृ declines like fem. तिसृ. |
पञ्चन् “5” – नवदशन् “19” n. adj. | Except in gen., those ending in न् decline like नामन् (3.22:) and षष् “six” decline like cerebral stems (3.6:), and are all plural neuter only, except sg. (in form only) in nom. voc. acc. See declensions below. The alternative form अष्टौ “8” is also as below. These cardinals are employed like adjectives taking the same case as the numbered noun, although retain the neuter gender. |
विंशति “20” and above | Singular substantives, occasionally in plural as if used adjectively, e.g., शतानि “hundreds of __.” Their numbered noun in a sentence is in plural and takes the same case as this cardinal; or the numbered noun is in the genitive, as in the expression “a hundred of __ (gen.).” These cardinals decline regularly like other nouns of their same gender ending in the same respective consonant (3.5:) or vowel. |
All are pl. | “three” | “four” | “six” | “five” – “nineteen” | “eight” | |||
त्रि tr-i̍ | तिसृ tis-ṛ̍ | चतुर् cat-u̍r | षष् ṣa̍-ṣ | पञ्चन् pa̍ñc-an – ॰दशन् -da̍ś-an | Also has older alternative अष्टौ aṣṭ-a̍u | |||
पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | स्त्री॰ f. | पुं॰ m. | नपुं॰ n. | नपुं॰ n. | नपुं॰ n. | नपुं॰ n. | |
प्र॰ N. | ॰अयः | ॰ईणि | ॰रः | ॰वारः | ॰वारि | ॰ट् | ॰अ | ॰औ |
सं॰ V. | ||||||||
द्वि॰ A. | ॰ईन् | ॰उरः | ||||||
तृ॰ I. | ॰इभिः | ॰ऋभिः | ॰उर्भिः | ॰ड्भिः | ॰अभिः | ॰आभिः | ||
च॰ D. | ॰इभ्यः | ॰ऋभ्यः | ॰उर्भ्यः | ॰ड्भ्यः | ॰अभ्यः | ॰आभ्यः | ||
प॰ Ab. | ||||||||
ष॰ G. | ॰अयाणाम् | ॰ऋणाम् | ॰उर्णाम् | ॰ण्णाम् | ॰आनाम् | ॰आनाम् | ||
स॰ L. | ॰इषु | ॰ऋषु | ॰उर्षु | ॰ट्सु | ॰असु | ॰आसु |
Ordinals
4.26: Ordinals are generally adjs. from cardinals having the sense of “__parts,” “__fold,” “containing__.” They are mostly derived from a small set of suffixes given below and declined in all genders like nominal stems in अ/आ.1st | प्रथम or आद्य | These are not true ordinals, but have same meaning. |
2nd | द्वितीय | ॰ईय. For their declension see 4.16.4:. |
3rd | तृतीय | |
4th | चथुर्थ | ॰थ. Feminine in ई. |
or तृतीय/ तुर्य | Or ॰ईय/॰य. Feminine in आ. These are likely an abbreviated form by dropping initial च. | |
5th | पञ्चम | ॰म. |
6th | षष्ठ | ॰थ (becomes ॰ठ after ष् – rule 2.88:). |
7th–10th | सप्तम–दशम | ॰म. |
11th–19th | एकादश–नवदश | Same form as cardinal, except dropping the final न् (hence declined different) and accent moving to last syllable. |
20th, 99th | विंश, त्रिंश, षष्ट, etc. | Same as cardinal, shortening the cardinal until it ends in final अ (20-59) or replacing final इ with अ (60-99). |
or त्रिंशत्तम–नवतितम | Or simply by adding ॰तम to the full form of the cardinal. | |
100th, 1000th | शततम, सहस्रतम | ॰तम. |
101st, etc. | एकशत, etc. | The in-between ordinals (101st, 102nd, etc.) take same form as cardinal, with accent moving to last syllable. Hence, the pronunciation and declension of 200 (4.23.f:) and 102nd, etc. would be identical, apart from the cardinal being a neuter substantive while the ordinal an adjective in any gender. |
or एकशततम, etc. | Or simply by adding ॰तम. |
Numerical Adverbs and Derivatives
4.27: Multiplicative adverbs | |
सकृत् | “once” (lit. “one making”). |
द्विस् | “twice.” |
त्रिस् | “three times.” |
चतुस् | “four times.” |
॰कृत्वस् | “__times,” e.g., पञ्चकृत्वः “five times.” |
4.28: Adverbs of manner | |
॰धा | “in __way(s)”, e.g., एकधा “in one way,” षोढा (cf. 2.100:, 2.109:) “in six ways,” etc. |
4.29: Distributive adverbs | |
॰शस् | “by __,” e.g., एकशः “singly,” द्विशः “by twos,” etc. |
4.30: Aggregative adjectives and nouns | |
द्वय | as adj. “twofold,” as a neut. noun “a pair.” |
त्रय | as adj. (fem. in ई) “threefold,” as a neut. noun “a triad” (group of three things). |
॰तय | “_fold,” e.g., त्रितय (same meanings as त्रय); चतुष्टय ca̍tuṣ-ṭaya (2.24:, .27:, .101:) as adj. “fourfold,” as a neut. noun “a tetrad,” etc. |
Go to Top ('Home' key on many Windows browsers)
The Inflection of Verbal Roots by Means of Tense and Mood Terminations
5.1: The inflection of verbal roots is called conjugation. In conjugating संस्कृत verbal roots there are:1. | Three persons (पुरुष-s): third (“he, she, it”), second (“you”), first (“I”) (In the order recited they are called प्रथम “prior,” मध्यम “middle,” उत्तम “last” respectively, abbrev. as प्र॰ म॰ उ॰). |
2. | Three numbers (वचन-s): singular, dual, plural (like for nouns, abbrev. as ए॰ द्वि॰ ब॰). |
3. | Two categories of verbal terminations: परस्मैपद (ति तस् अन्ति…) and आत्मनेपद (ते ईते अन्ते…), abbreviated as पर॰ आ॰. These signify transitive (or active, lit. “for another”) and reflexive (or middle, lit. “for oneself”) terminations, respectively – adhered to less in the later literature. However, causal verb forms still nearly always respect this distinction. |
4. | Two categories of verbal terminations divided into two groups (see 7.21–7: for their syntax):
a. सार्वधातुक-लकार-s the four verbal base tenses and moods (also called the present system or the conjugational tenses and moods). Consisting of
b. आर्धधातुक-लकार-s the six root tenses and moods (also called the non-conjugational tenses and moods). Consisting of
|
5. | Four derivative formations: Causative (णिजन्त), Desiderative (सन्नन्त), Intensive or Frequentive (यङन्त), and Denominative (नामधातु). |
6. | Three constructions (प्रयोग-s): Active (कर्तरि), Passive (कर्मणि) and Impersonal (भावे). |
5.2: Roots. Roots are called धातु-s. They are the assumed basic unit of all verbs and participles, and most nominal stems. There is a listing of 2,200 roots, of which less than 500 are commonly used as verbs and participles. A root may be first made into a derivative form (5.39:–.43:), then that form is treated as a root taking one of the ten tenses or moods.
Terminations (5.5:–.6:). When a root, or a root derivative, takes one of the आर्धधातुक-लकार-s (the root tenses and moods) it undergoes a transformation unique to that tense or mood, and then takes a verbal termination. Except for the Perfect tense, which has its own set of terminations, the other tenses and moods generally take one or the other of the Present or Imperfect set of terminations from either the 1st or the 2nd conjugation. For this reason, in order to give them a generic name not tied to the Present or Imperfect tense, the Present tense terminations are also called the primary terminations (light shaded in 5.5:–6:), while those of the Imperfect are called the secondary terminations.
Verbal base (5.3:). When a root, but not a root derivative, takes one of the सार्वधातुक-लकार-s the four common verbal base tenses and moods) it is made into a stem – called a verbal base (अङ्ग) consisting of a root plus a sign. Most roots form their base in only one of ten different ways.
Conjugational groups. To help distinguish which ways these bases are formed, all the roots have been grouped into ten different classes (गण-s). Some roots have more than one base configuration, and therefore are placed in more than one class. These ten classes are arranged into two groups, the 1st conjugation (comprising the 1st, 4th, 6th and 10th class), otherwise known as the “अ” गण-s or those classes whose base ends in अ, and the 2nd conjugation (comprising the 2nd, 3rd, 5th, 7th, and 9th class) or those classes whose base does not end in अ. The first group’s base is unchangeable when the terminations are applied; the second group’s bases are changeable into strong and weak forms, similar to nominal stems in declension.
Verbal constructions. The roots in the commonly used in active (कर्तरि) construction take one or the other of the two categories of terminations, परस्मैपद or आत्मनेपद, although परस्मैपद is the more common. Because of this, these roots are also called परस्मैपद or आत्मनेपद roots. Certain of these roots normally take only one of the categories of terminations, but may in composition take a termination from the other category due to meaning (5.1.3:), and occasionally due to meter or due to exceptional usage. Some roots take either of these sets of terminations and are therefore called उभयपद (lit. “word for both”) roots. The other two constructions (7.28:), in passive (कर्मणि) and in impersonal (भावे), force the root, no matter what its natural tendencies in active construction, to form a unique stem called a passive base which then takes the आत्मनेपद terminations of the 1st conjugation.
Verbal conjugation is a difficult part in learning the संस्कृत language. We will greatly simplify this process, however, because in this grammar we are just learning how to read the संस्कृत language. Our general assumption is that whoever wrote the text knows how to correctly construct the verb. We simply need to recognize which construction it is. Thankfully, these constructions follow a few recognizable patterns, so our job is not nearly as hard as it would seem. Your task, like it was in nominal declensions, is to grasp the patterns in the following charts. Take as much time as you wish to go through this – depending on whether you just want to get the general idea, memorize the most general features, or memorize most of it. So relax and let’s begin.
5.3: The Verbal Bases of the Ten Classes (गण-s) when forming the सार्वधाथुक-लकार-s.
1st Conjugation (unchangeable base) | |||||||
Class | Qty.a | Nameb | Root | Sign | Wherec | Accentd | Example |
1st | 173 | भू-आदि | गुण of fin. vow. (w/sandhi 2.71:) or light med. vow. e | अ | end | root | भवति bha̍v·a·ti (2.71:) “he exists” |
4th | 54 | दिव्‑आदि | य | end | root | दीव्यति dī̍v·ya·ti (5.16.1:) “he plays” | |
6th | 35 | तुद्-आदि | अ | end | sign | तुदति tud·a̍·ti “he strikes” | |
10th | 110 | चुर्-आदि | वृद्धि of fin. vow. (w/sandhi 2.71:), गुण of light med. vow. (अ usually lengthens). | अय a̍ya | end | sign | चोरयति cor·a̍ya·ti “he steals” |
2nd Conjugation (changeable base) | |||||||||||
Class | Qty. | Name | Strong Form | Weak Form | Exampleg | ||||||
Root | Sign | Where | Accent | Root | Sign | Where | Accent | ||||
2nd | 50 | अद्-आदि | गुण | root | term. | s. अत्ति a̍t·ti (2.42:) w. अदन्ति ad·a̍nti “he/they eat” | |||||
3rd | 11 | हु-आदि | Redup.f & गुण | root | Redup. | term. | जुहोति ju·ho̍·ti जह्वति ju·hv·a̍ti (2.11: & 5.6.c:) “he/they offer” | ||||
5th | 15 | सु-आदि | नो h | end | sign | नु h | end | term. | सुनोति su·no̍·ti सुन्वन्ति su·nv·a̍nti “he/they press” | ||
7th | 14 | रुध्-आदि | न h | b/4 root final cons. | sign | न् h | b/4 root final cons. | term. | रुणद्धि ru·ṇa̍·d·dhi (2.92:,.76:,.78:) रुन्धन्ति ru·n·dh·a̍nti “he/they oppose” | ||
8th | 10 | तन्-आदि | ओ | end | sign | उ | end | term. | तनोति tan·o̍·ti तन्वन्ति tan·v·a̍nti “he/they stretch” | ||
9th | 23 | क्री-आदि | ना h | end | sign | नी h | b/4 cons. terms. | term. | क्रीणाति krī·ṇā̍·ti “he buys” | ||
न् h | b/4 vow. terms. | क्रीणन्ति krī·ṇ·a̍nti “they buy” |
a. | Number of commonly found roots within each class, as listed in Dhaturupamanjari. |
b. | Name given by grammarians. It takes the 1st entry in each class plus the word “etc.” (आदि). |
c. | This lists where the class sign is placed – either after the end of the root or just before the final consonant of the root. |
d. | The accent may fall on the root, the class sign, or the termination. When it falls on the root or class sign, there is often strengthening or lengthening of the vowel therein. Accent is the only difference between the 4th class verbal base and a passive stem (5.37:), and between a 10th class verbal base and some denominative stems (5.43:). |
e. | A light medial vowel refers to a metrically light syllable, where the vowel must be short and the following consonant within the root is a single (non-conjunct) consonant (see 1.22:). |
f. | Reduplication is an easy feature to recognize, but difficult to construct. See its rules in 5.7:. |
g. | The examples take the namesake root of each class in present tense 3rd person sg. and, for the 2nd conjugation roots to show both the strong & weak form, also the 3rd person pl. (5.6:). |
h. | 5th, 7th and 9th class root penultimate nasal drops before adding the nasal class sign. |
5.4: सार्वधातुक-लकार-s – The Four Verbal Base Tenses and Moods. The below terminations and their footnotes (5.5:–.6:) apply also to the आत्धधातुक-लकर-s and to derivative stems.
5.5: Terminations taken by the 1st Conjugation Classes of Roots. Final अ of verbal base joined to termination is shown in bold, followed by the actual termination. A mid-dot (·) is used to separate the visual components of these terminations, for pattern recognition.परस्मैपद | आत्मनेपद | |||||||||||
ए॰ Sg. | द्वि॰ Du. | ब॰ Pl. | ए॰ Sg. | द्वि॰ Du. | ब॰ Pl. | |||||||
Primary / Present (वर्तमाने लट्) | Verbal base + term. | |||||||||||
प्र॰ 3rd | अति | ॰ति | अतः | ॰त·स् | अन्ति | ॰अन्ति | अते | ॰ते | एते | ॰ई·ते | अन्ते | ॰अन्ते b |
म॰ 2nd | असि | ॰सि | अथः | ॰थ·स् | अथ | ॰थ | असे | ॰से | एथे | ॰ई·थे | अध्वे | ॰ध्वे |
उ॰ 1st | आमि | ॰मि a | आवः | ॰व·स् | आमः | ॰म·स् | ए | ॰ए | आवहे | ॰व·हे | आमहे | ॰म·हे |
Secondary / Imperfect (अनद्यतन-भूते लङ्) | Augment अ c + verbal base + term. | |||||||||||
प्र॰ 3rd | अत् | ॰त् | अताम् | ॰ता·म् | अन् | ॰अन् | अत | ॰त | एताम् | ॰ई·ताम् | अन्त | ॰अन्त |
म॰ 2nd | अः | ॰स् | अतम् | ॰त·म् | अत | ॰त | अथाः | ॰थास् | एथाम् | ॰ई·थाम् | अध्वम् | ॰ध्वम् |
उ॰ 1st | अम् | ॰अम् | आव | ॰व | आम | ॰म | ए | ॰इ | आवहि | ॰व·हि | आमहि | ॰म·हि |
Imperative (आज्ञायाम् लोट्) | Verbal base + term. | |||||||||||
प्र॰ 3rd | अतु | ॰तु | अताम् | ॰ता·म् | अन्तु | ॰अन्तु | अताम् | ॰ताम् | एताम् | ॰ई·ताम् | अन्ताम् | ॰अन्ताम् |
म॰ 2nd | अ | — d | अतम् | ॰त·म् | अत | ॰त | अस्व | ॰स्व | एथाम् | ॰ई·थाम् | अध्वम् | ॰ध्वम् |
उ॰ 1st | आनि | ॰आनि | आव | ॰आ·व | आम | ॰आ·म | ऐ | ॰ऐ | आवहै | ॰आ·व·है | आमहै | ॰आ·म·है |
Potential (विधि लिङ्) | Verbal base + term. | |||||||||||
प्र॰ 3rd | एत् | ॰ई·त् | एताम् | ॰ई·ताम् | एयुः | ॰ईय्·उस् | एत | ॰ई·त | एयाथाम् | ॰ईया·ताम् | एरन् | ॰ईर्·अन् |
म॰ 2nd | एः | ॰ई·स् | एतम् | ॰ई·तम् | एत | ॰ई·त | एथाः | ॰ई·थास् | एयाथाम् | ॰ईया·थाम् | एध्वम् | ॰ई·ध्वम् |
उ॰ 1st | एयम् | ॰ईय्·अम् | एव | ॰ई·व | एम | ॰ई·म | एय | ॰ईय्·अ | एवहि | ॰ई·व·हि | एमहि | ॰ई·म·हि |
a. | Final अ of the verbal base or stem is lengthened before terms. beginning with म्॰ व्॰ (see 1st person). |
b. | Final अ of the verbal base or stem is dropped before terms. beginning with अ॰ आ॰ (including ए॰ ऐ॰, because their first component is अ॰). |
c. | An accented augment अ is put (after any prefix and) before the root, see 6.2:, in all forms of imperfect, aorist, and the conditional. This augment causes root initial छ्॰ to double (2.61:).This augment with an initial vowel takes वृद्धि, instead of गुण (2.20:). The augment is dropped in imperfect and aorist (both then taking an imperative meaning instead) after the negative particle मा “not” (7.22.4:). |
d. | Imperative पर॰ 2nd sg. term. is absent (like sg. voc. term. of ॰अ declension, e.g., राम गच्छ “Go, Rāma!” |
परस्मैपद | आत्मनेपद | |||||||||||
ए॰ Sg. | द्वि॰ Du. | ब॰ Pl. | ए॰ Sg. | द्वि॰ Du. | ब॰ Pl. | |||||||
Primary / Present (वर्तमाने लट्) | Verbal base + term. | |||||||||||
प्र॰ 3rd | ॰ति | ॰तस् | ॰अन्ति/अति c | ॰ते | ॰आते g | ॰अते b | ||||||
म॰ 2nd | ॰सि | ॰थस् | ॰थ | ॰से | ॰आथे | ॰ध्वे | ||||||
उ॰ 1st | ॰मि | ॰वस् | ॰मस् | ॰ए | ॰वहे | ॰महे | ||||||
Secondary / Imperfect (अनद्यतन-भूते लङ्) | Augment अ + verbal base + term. | |||||||||||
प्र॰ 3rd | ॰त् | ॰ताम् | ॰अन्/अतु d | ॰त | ॰आताम् | ॰अत b | ||||||
म॰ 2nd | ॰स् h | ॰तम् | ॰त | ॰थास् | ॰आथाम् | ॰ध्वम् | ||||||
उ॰ 1st | ॰अम् | ॰व | ॰म | ॰इ | ॰वहि | ॰महि | ||||||
Imperative (आज्ञायाम् लोट्) | Verbal base + term. | |||||||||||
प्र॰ 3rd | ॰तु | ॰ताम् | ॰अन्तु/अतु c | ॰ताम् | ॰आताम् | ॰अताम् b | ||||||
म॰ 2nd | ॰धि/॰आन,॰हि/—a | ॰तम् | ॰त | ॰स्व | ॰आथाम् | ॰ध्वम् | ||||||
उ॰ 1st | ॰आनि | ॰आव | ॰आम | ॰ऐ | ॰आवहै | ॰आमहै | ||||||
Potential (विधि लिङ्) | Verbal base + term. | |||||||||||
प्र॰ 3rd | ॰यात् | yā̍·t e | ॰याताम् | yā̍·tām | ॰युस् | y·u̍s e | ॰ईत | ॰ईयाथाम् | ॰ईरन् | |||
म॰ 2nd | ॰यास् | yā̍·s | ॰यातम् | yā̍·tam | ॰यात | yā̍·ta | ॰ईथास् | ॰ईयाथाम् | ॰ईध्वम् | |||
उ॰ 1st | ॰यायम् | yā̍·am f | ॰याव | yā̍·va | ॰याम | yā̍·ma | ॰ईय | ॰ईवहि | ॰ईमहि |
a. | Imperative पर॰ 2nd sg. term. becomes:
|
b. | The आ॰ 3rd pl. have no न् in the terms. of present, imperfect and imperative. |
c. | The 3rd class roots, and some other reduplicated stems, drop the न् in the present and imperative पर॰ 3nd pl. terms. |
d. | ॰उस् is taken instead of ॰अन् in imperfect पर॰ 3nd pl.:
|
e. | पर॰ Potential terms. are essentially the same as या + 2nd conj. Imperfect terms. (cf. Benedictive 5.32:), in the 3rd pl. the या is reduced to य् before ॰उस्. |
f. | All accented weak terms. are accented on the first syllable of the termination. |
g. | Stem final vowels before all vowel initial terms. follow General Vowel Sandhi rules, except: |
h. | A dental mute final of root may drop before imperfect 2nd sg. term. ॰स् instead of the term. per 2.24:, thus preserving the term. in the final verb form. Often, though, the preservation is by inserting a vowel between them, e.g., 5.19.4: & .19.6:. |
5.7: Reduplication is taken by five different verbal formations, all take the General Rules.
5.8: General Rules of Reduplication. There are exceptions to both General and Specials Rules. The resulting first syllable of the reduplicated stem is below called the reduplicating syllable.1. | The first syllable ([cons.]+vowel) of root is reduplicated. | बुध् | → बुबुध् bu·budh |
2. | Aspirated letters lose aspiration. | भिद् | → बिभिद् bi·bhid |
3. | Gutturals become corresponding palatals, and the guttural ह् becomes ज्. | कम् गम् हु | → चकम् ca·kam → जगम् ja·gam → जुहु ju·hu |
4. | Conjunct cons. are reduced to the 1st letter. | स्यन्द् | → सस्स्यन्द् sa·syand |
a. But sibilant + hard cons. reduce to the latter. | स्था | → तस्था ta·sthā (5.8.6:) | |
5. | Simple initial vowel is doubled. | अस् | → आस् ā·as |
6. | The following vowel in reduplicating syllable, if long, is shortened. | भू | → बुभू bu·bhū |
7. | Non-final ए ऐ replicates with its 2nd component इ, ओ औ with उ (cf. 2.2:) | सेव् लोक् | → सिषेव् si·ṣev → लुलोक् lu·lok |
8. | Final diphthong vowel is treated as if आ, for this and all following formations, e.g., perf., (even non-redup.) ps., pp., etc. | गै | → (गा) → जगै ja·gai |
5.9: | Special Reduplication Rule for 3rd Class Roots (5.3:) | ||
1. | The vowels ऋ ॠ become इ. | भृ ऋ | → बिभृ bi·bhṛ → इयृ iy·ṛ (2.67:) |
5.10: | Special Reduplication Rules for Reduplicated Perfect (5.27:) | ||
1. | The vowels ऋ ॠ ऌ become अ. | कृ | → चकृ ca·kṛ |
2. | Initial इ उ, if गुण or वृद्धि in final form, insert य् व् (2.67:). | इष् | → st. 1st sg. इयेष iy·e̍ṣ·a, → wk. 3rd pl. ईषुः i·iṣ·u̍ḥ |
3. | Roots with य व, and liable to saṃprasāraṇa, replicate with इ उ. | वच् | → st. 3rd sg. उवाच u·vā̍c·a, → wk. 3rd pl. ऊचुः u·uc·u̍ḥ |
4. | Roots with initial अ + conjunct cons. or initial ऋ + cons. replicate with आन्. | अर्च् ऋज् | → आनर्च् ān·arc → आनृज् ān·ṛj |
5.11: | Special Reduplication Rules for Reduplicated Aorist (5.30.2.c:) | ||
1. | The vowels अ आ ऋ ॠ ऌ become इ. | जन् | → (जिजन् see 5.11.2:) |
2. | Reduplicating vowel is lengthened if the syllable is metrically light. The resulting metrical syllables of a redup. aorist are thus light-heavy-light (U–U) 1.22:. | जन् ग्रह् | → 3rd sg. अजीजनत् a·jī̍·jan·at → 3rd sg. अजिग्रहत् a·ji̍·grah·at |
5.12: | Special Reduplication Rules for Desiderative (5.41:). The reduplicating syllable is accented. | ||
1. | The vowels अ आ ऋ (but not after labials which first change ऋ to ऊर्) replicate with इ. | स्था भृ | → तिष्ठा ti̍·ṣthā → (भूर्) → बुभूर् bu̍·bhūr |
2. | Vowel initial roots replicate vowel-cons. and replace reduplicated vowel with इ. | अश् ईक्ष् एध् | → अशिश् a̍ś·iś → ईचिक्ष् ī̍c·ikṣ → एदिध् e̍d·idh |
5.13: | Special Reduplication Rules for Intensives (or Frequentives) (5.42:). | ||
1. | Reduplicating syllable takes गुण, अ will lengthen. | लिह् तप् | → लेलिह् le·lih → तातप् tā·tap |
2. | Roots ending in अम् (sometimes other cons.) insert final cons., instead of lengthening अ. | गम् चल् | → जङ्गम् ja·ṅgam (2.55:) → चल्वल् cal·cal |
3. | Roots containing ऋ insert ई after reduplicating syllable. | मृ कृष् | → मरीमृ mar·ī·mṛ → चरीकृष् car·i·kṛṣ |
5.15: 1st Class (भू-आदि) – गुण of fin. vow. or light medial vow.; class sign is अ; accented root. | |||||
1. | Lengthen vowel, instead of गुण. | क्रम् | “step” | → क्राम् | krā̍m·a |
आ+चम् | “sip” | → आचाम | ā·cā̍m·a | ||
गुह् | “conceal” | → गूह् | gū̍h·a | ||
ष्ठिव् | “spit” | → ष्ठीव | ṣṭhī̍v·a | ||
2. | वृद्धि of vowel, instead of गुण. | मृज् | “cleanse” | → मार्ज | mā̍rj·a |
3. | Substitutes ई for अ. | सद् | “sink” | → सीद् | sī̍d·a |
4. | Reduplicate with इ (originally 3rd class roots). | घ्रा | “smell” | → जिघ्र | jī̍ghr·a |
पा | “drink” | → पिब | pi̍b·a | ||
स्था | “stand” | → तिष्ठ | ti̍ṣṭh·a | ||
5. | Drop nasal | दंश् | “bite” | → दश | da̍ś·a |
मन्थ् | “churn” | → मथ | ma̍th·a | ||
सञ्ज् | “adhere” | → सज | sa̍j·a | ||
6. | Substitute for root. | गम् | “go” | → गच्छ | ga̍cch·a (2.61:) |
दृश् | “see” | → पश्य | pa̍śy·a | ||
ध्मा | “blow” | → धम | dha̍m·a | ||
म्रा | “study” | → मन | ma̍n·a | ||
यम् | “restrain” | → यच्छ | ya̍cch·a | ||
5.16: 4th Class (दिव्-आदि) – class sign is य; accented root. | |||||
1. | Lengthen vowel. | तम् | “languish” | → ताम्य | tā̍m·ya |
दम् | “tame” | → दाम्य | dā̍m·ya | ||
दिव् | “play” | → दीव्य | dī̍v·ya | ||
भ्रम् | “roam” | → भ्राम्य | bhrā̍m·ya | ||
मद् | “rejoice” | → माद्य | mā̍d·ya | ||
शम् | “cease” | → शाम्य | śā̍m·ya | ||
श्रम् | “be weary” | → श्राम्य | śrā̍m·ya | ||
2. | Drop nasal | भ्रंश् | “fall” | → भ्रश्य | bhra̍ś·ya |
रञ्ज् | “crave” | → रज्य | ra̍j·ya | ||
3. | Saṃprasāraṇa (2.3:). | व्यध् | “pierce” | → विध्य | vidh·ya |
4. | Substitutes for root. | जन् | “be born” | → जाय | jā̍·ya |
5.17: 6th Class (तुद्-आदि) – class sign is अ; accented sign. | |||||
1. | Insert nasal. | कृत् | “cut” | → कृन्त | kṛnt·a̍ |
मुच् | “loosen” | → मुञ्च | muñc·a̍ | ||
लिप् | “paint” | → लिम्प | limp·a̍ | ||
लुप् | “break” | → लुम्प | lump·a̍ | ||
विद् | “find” | → विन्द | vind·a̍ | ||
सिच् | “sprinkle” | → सिञ्च | siñc·a̍ | ||
2. | Saṃprasāraṇa (2.3:). | प्रछ् | “ask” | → पृच्छ | pṛcch·a̍ |
भ्रज्ज् | “fry” | → भृज्ज | bhṛjj·a̍ | ||
व्रश्च् | “cut” | → वृश्च | vṛśc·a̍ | ||
3. | Substitute for root. | इष् | “wish” | → इच्छ | icch·a̍ |
ऋ | “go” | → ऋच्छ | ṛcch·a̍ |
5.19: 2nd Class (अद्-आदि) – गुण with accented root in strong. | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1. | वृद्धि of roots ending with उ in strong b/4 cons. terms., and of मृज् “cleanse” in all strong forms. | e.g., स्तु | → | pr. 3rd sg. स्तौति | sta̍u·ti | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
मृज् | → | pr. 3rd sg. मार्ष्टि (2.81:) |
sta̍u·ti | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2. | शी takes गुण in weak; inserts र् b/4 अ॰ terms. in pr. impf. impv. 3rd pl. | शी “sleep” | → | pr. 3rd sg. शेते | śe̍·te | pr. 3rd pl. शेरते | śe̍r·ate | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3. | वश् takes saṃprasāraṇa in weak. | वश् “desire” | → | pr. 3rd pl. उशन्ति | uś·a̍nti | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4. | अस् drops initial अ in pot. and weak of pr. & impv., drops final स् b/4 pr. 2nd sg. ॰सि; substitutes ए in impv. 2nd sg.; inserts ई b/4 स् त् of पर॰ impf. 2nd 3rd sg. (5.6.h:). |
अस् “be” | → | pot. 3rd sg. स्यात् | s·yā̍t | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
pr. 3rd pl. सन्ति | s·a̍nti | impv. 2nd sg. एधि | e·dhi | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
impf. 3rd sg. आसीत् | a̍·asī·t | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5. | हन् drops न् b/4 त्॰ थ्॰ terms. in weak; weakens to घ् in pr. impf. impv. 3rd pl.; weakens to ज in impv. 2nd sg. |
हन् “destroy” | → | pr. 2nd pl. हथ | ha·tha̍ | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
pr. 3rd pl. घ्नन्ति | ghn·a̍nti | impv. 2nd sg. जहि | ja·hi | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6. | Roots हन् “breathe,” जक्ष् “eat,” रुद् “weep,” श्वस् “breathe,” स्वप् “sleep”: insert इ b/4 cons. terms. except य॰; insert ई or अ b/4 स् त् of पर॰ impf. 2nd 3rd sg. |
e.g., श्वस् | → | pr. 3rd sg. श्वसिति | śva̍si·ti | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
impf. 3rd sg. अश्वसीत् or अश्वसत् | a̍·śvasī·t or a̍·śvasa·t | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7. | ईड् “praise” and ईश् “rule” insert इ b/4 आ॰ cons. initial terms. in स्॰ ध्॰. | e.g., ईश् | → | pr. 2nd sg. ईशिषे | ī̍ś·i·ṣe | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
8. | ब्रू inserts ई in strong b/4 cons. terms. | ब्रू “speak” | → | pr. 1st sg. ब्रवीमि | bra̍v·ī·mi | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9. | अधि + √इ “read” inserts य् b/4 vow. terms. in pr. & impf. (2.67:), with aug. अ becoming ऐय् (ai·y). | अधि+इ | → | pr. 1st sg. अधीये | adhi·i·y·e̍ | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
impf. 1st sg. अध्यैयि | adhy·a̍i·y·i | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10. | चकास् “shine,” जक्ष् “eat,” जागृ (गुण b/4 उस्) “wake,” शास् “teach,” and दरिद्रा (final आ drops b/4 weak terms., inserts इ b/4 weak cons. terms.) “be poor” take 3rd class terms. अति उस् अतु pr. impf. impv. 3rd pl. (5.6.c:–.d:). | e.g., जागृ | → | pr. 3rd pl. जाग्रति | jā̍gr·ati | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
impf. 3rd pl. अजागरुः | a̍·jāgar·uḥ | दरिद्रा | → | st. pr. 3rd sg. दरिद्राति | daridrā·ti | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
wk. pr. 3rd du. दरिद्रितः | daridr·i·taḥ | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
wk. pr. 3rd pl. दरिद्रति | daridr·ati | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
11. | शास् takes weak base शिष् b/4 cons. terms. (2.101:), ex. b/4 impv. 2nd sg. term. ॰धि where ॰स् drops (2.100:); takes अशात् as impf. 3rd sg. & opt. as 2nd sg. | शास् “teach” | → | pr. 3rd du. शिष्टः | śiṣ·ṭa̍ḥ | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
impv. 2nd sg. शाधि | śā[s]·dhi | impf. 3rd sg. (opt. 2nd) अशात् | a̍·śā[s]·t | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
12. | अद् inserts अ b/4 स् त् of पर्॰ impf. 2nd 3rd sg. | अद् “eat” | → | impf. 3rd sg. आदत् | ā̍·ad·a·t | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5.20: 3rd Class (हु-आदि) – Reduplicate; गुण with accented root in strong. | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1. | दा substitutes दद् in weak; impv. 2nd sg. देहि. | दा “give” | → | pr. 3rd sg. दत्ते | dat·te̍ | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2. | धा substitutes दध् in weak, becoming धत् b/4 त्॰ थ्॰ terms. (2.76: & .79:); impv. 2nd sg. धेहि. | धा “place” | → | pr. 3rd pl. दधते | da̍dh·ate | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
pr. 3rd sg. धत्ते | dhat·te̍ | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3. | मा “measure,” हा “move” in आ॰ take मिमी जिही as redup. base, drop the ई b/4 vowels. | e.g., हा (आ॰) | → | pr. 2nd sg. जिहीषे | ji·hī·ṣe | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
pr. 1st sg. जिहे | ji·h·e | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4. | हा “abandon” in पर॰ takes जही in weak; drops the ई b/4 vowels and य्॰ terms. | हा (पर॰) | → | pr. 3rd du. जहीतः | ja·hī·taḥ | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
pr. 3rd sg. जहति | ja·h·ati | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5. | हु takes impv. term. धि instead of हि. | हु “sacrifice” | → | impv. 2nd sg. जुहुधि | ju·hu·dhi | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
[···pg 51···] | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5.21: 5th Class (सु-आदि) – accented नो in strong; unaccented नु in weak. | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1. | Roots ending in vowels opt. drop उ of weak नु b/4 labial म्॰ व्॰ terms. | e.g., सु “press out” | → | pr. 1st du. सुन्वः or सुनुवः | su·n[u]·va̍ḥ or su·nu·va̍ḥ | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2. | Roots ending in cons. insert व् b/4 vowel terms. (2.67:). | e.g., शक् “be able” | → | pr. 3rd pl. शक्नुवन्ति | śak·nu·v·a̍nti | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3. | श्रु replaces रु with ऋ to become शृ. | श्रु “hear” | → | pr. 3rd sg. शृणोति | śṛ·ṇo̍·ti | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4. | धू shortens to धु. | धू “shake” | → | pr. 3rd sg. धुनुते | dhu·nu·te̍ | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5.22: 8th Class (तन्-आदि) – accented ओ in strong; unaccented उ in weak. | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1. | कृ takes strong base in करो (kar·o); takes weak base in कुरु (kur·u); weak उ drops b/4 labial म्॰ व्॰ & य्॰ terms. |
कृ “do” | → | pr. 1st sg. करोमि | kar·o̍·mi | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
pr. 3rd u. कुरुतः | kur·u·ta̍ḥ | pr. 1st pl.कुर्मः | kur·[u]·ma̍ḥ | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2. | Other roots opt. drop weak उ b/4 labial म्॰ व्॰ terms. | तन् “stretch” | → | pr. 1st du. तन्वः or तनुवः | tan·[u]·va̍ḥ or tan·u·va̍ḥ | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3. | कृ with prefixes परि or सम्, and sometimes with उप, inserts स् between (6.12:). | सम्+कृ “put together” | → | pr. 3rd sg. संस्कुरुते | saṃ·s·kur·u·te̍ | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5.23: 9th Class (क्री-आदि) – accented ना in strong; unaccented नी b/4 cons. or न् b/4 vow. terms. in weak. | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1. | मी “destroy,” ली “adhere,” धू “shake,” पू “purify,” लू “cut” shorten their vowel. | e.g., धू | → | pr. 1st sg. धुनामि | dhu·nā̍·mi̍ | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2. | ज्ञा “know,” ज्या “grow old,” ग्रह् “seize” shorten to जा, जि, गृह्. | e.g., ज्ञा | → | pr. 3rd sg. जानाति | jā·nā̍·ti | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3. | Roots ending in ॠ shorten to ऋ b/4 cons. sign. | e.g., गॄ | → | pr. 3rd sg.गृणाति | gṛ·ṇā̍·ti |
आर्धधातुक-लकार-s The Non-conjugational Tenses and Moods
5.24: For the आर्धधातुक-लकार-s (5.1.4.b:), the special verbal base (5.3:) of the 1st and 2nd conjugational classes of roots is not formed. Because of this, there is then no distinction here of the 10th classes of roots. Instead, the roots undergo general modifications unique to each one of these tenses and moods.
5.25: The Perfect tense (परोक्ष-भूते लिट्) expresses an action of the remote past, not witnessed by the speaker. As 2nd & 1st person are thus rarely found, then, in the following, the 3rd person is in bold.
5.26: There are two types of Perfect tense.Reduplicative Perfect | for primary (non-derivative) roots. | Formed by replication (5.8: & .10:), and appending the Perf. terms. to the Perf. stem. |
Periphrastic Perfect | for derivative stems (mostly in ॰अय), and for a few roots. | Formed into abstract fem. noun in sg. acc. and adding the Perf. of अस् “be” भू “be” or कृ “do” (cf. 6.13:–.14:). |
परस्मैपद | आत्मनेपद | |||||
ए॰ Sg.2 | द्वि॰ Du.3 | ब॰ Pl.3 | ए॰ Sg.3 | द्वि॰ Du.3 | ब॰ Pl.3 | |
प्र॰ 3rd | अ a |
अतुस् a̍·tus |
उस् u̍s |
ए e̍ |
आते ā̍te |
इरे i·re̍ |
म॰ 2nd | (इ)थ 1 (i)·tha |
अथुस् a̍·thus |
अ a̍ |
(इ)से (i)·se̍ |
आथे ā̍the |
(इ)ध्वे (i)·dhve̍ |
उ॰ 1st | अ a |
(इ)व (i)·va̍ |
(इ)म (i)·ma̍ |
ए e̍ |
(इ)वहे (i)·va̍he |
(इ)महे (i)·ma̍he |
1. | Connecting vowel इ (shown in parenthesis above) is inserted before cons. terms., except: |
For the roots | in उ: | द्रु “run,” श्रु “hear,” स्तु “praise,” स्रु “flow” | |
in ऋ: | कृ “do,” भृ “bear,” वृ “choose,” सृ “go” | ||
Before पर॰ 2nd sg. थ, the इ is often dropped, especially: | |||
For roots ending in ऋ, except ऋ “go” and वृ “cover”. | |||
Optionally for roots ending in vowel other than ऋ. | |||
Optionally for roots with a penultimate अ, e.g., पत् “fall” – पपत्थ or पपतिथ. |
2. | परस्मैपद Strong Stem formation |
3. | Weak Stem formation before vowel terms. |
Final इ ई or ऋ | preceded by sing. cons. | → य् or र्, respectively. |
preceded by conj. cons. | → इय् (2.67:) or अर्, respectively. | |
Final उ ऊ or ॠ | always become उव् (2.67:) or अर्, respectively. |
4. | Examples (in 3rd only, पर॰ sg. du. pl. & आ॰ sg. du. pl.) |
अस् | “be” | आस | a·ā̍s·a | आसतुः | a·as·a̍tuḥ | आसुः | आसे | आसाते | आसिरे |
कृ | “do” | चकार | ca·kā̍r·a | चक्रतुः | ca·kṛ·a̍tuḥ | चक्रुः | चक्रे | चक्राते | चक्रिरे |
गम् | “go” | जगाम | ja·gā̍m·a | जग्मतुः | ja·gm·a̍tuḥ | जग्मुः | जग्मे | जग्माते | जग्मिरे |
तुद् | “strike” | तुतोद | tu·to̍d·a | तुतुदतुः | tu·tud·a̍tuḥ | तुतुदुः | तुतुदे | तुतुदाते | तुतुदिरे |
ध्मा | “blow” | दध्मौ | da·dhm·a̍u | दध्मतुः | da·dhm·a̍tuḥ | दध्मुः | दध्मे | दध्माते | दध्मिरे |
भू | “be” irreg. | बभूव | ba·bhū̍·v·a | बभूवतः | ba·bhū·v·a̍tuḥ | बभूवुः | बभूवे | बभूवाते | बभूविरे |
वच् | “speak” | उवाच | u·vā̍c·a | ऊचतुः | u·uc·a̍tuḥ | ऊचुः | ऊचे | ऊचाते | ऊचिरे |
Contract two dissimilar syllables with ए in weak. |
त्रस् | “tremble” | → तत्रस् | → त्रेस् |
भज् | “share” | → बभज् | → भेज् | |
भ्रम् | “wander” | → बभ्रम् | → भ्रेम् | |
राज् | “shine” | → रराज् | → रेज् | |
No saṃprasāraṇa, and contract with ए in weak. | यम् | “reach” | → ययम् | → येम् |
वम् | “vomit” | → ववम् | → वेम् | |
वस् “wear” neither saṃprasāraṇa, nor contracts. | वस् | “wear” | → ववस् | |
Change radical consonant to guttural. | चि | “gather” | → चिकि | |
जि | “conquer” | → जिगि | ||
हन् | “conquer” | → जघन् | ||
हि | “conquer” | → जिघि | ||
अंश् “reach” reduplicates with आन् (5.10.4:), and drops radical nasal in weak. | अंश् | “reach” | → strong आनंश् → weak आनश् |
|
भू “be” reduplicates with अ; and ऊ is unchanged, inserting व् b/4 vowels, वि (v·i) b/4 cons. (5.27.1:). | भू | “be” | → 3rd pl. बभूवुः ba·bhū·v·u̍ḥ → 1st pl. बभूविम ba·bhū·v·i·ma̍ |
|
अह् “say” is defective, taking only 3rd sg. du. pl. & 2nd sg. du. (where ह् becomes त् before थ term.); often retains present tense meaning. | अह् | “say” | → 3rd pl. आहुः a·ah·u̍ḥ → 2nd sg. आत्थ a·a̍t·tha |
|
विद् “know” does not reduplicate; retains present meaning. | विद् | “know” | → st. वेद्, wk. विद्; वेद ve̍d·a “he/she/it knows” |
Verbal stem made by गुण of fin. or short med. vowel is made into an abstract feminine noun in accusative with ॰आम् ā·m. | + | Reduplicated Perfect form of अस् “be” (3rd sg. आस, etc.) or, exceptionally, भू “be” (3rd sg. बभूव, etc.) or कृ “do” (3rd sg. चकार, etc.) – taking पर॰/आ॰ per the verbal stem. |
E.g., दृश् “see” → दर्शय causal stem → | Par. 3rd sg. दर्शयामास darś·aya·ām·a·a̍s·a Par. 3rd pl. दर्शयामासुः darś·aya·ām·a·as·u̍ḥ |
Metrically heavy initial vowel | आस् | “sit” | आसां·चक्रे |
ईक्ष् | “see” | ईक्षां·चक्रे | |
उज्झ् | “forsake” | उज्झां·चकार | |
एध् | “thrive” | एधां·बभूव | |
Already reduplicated | चकास् | “shine” | चकासां·चकार |
जागृ | “awake” | जागराम्·आस | |
Optionally a few other roots, e.g. | नी | “lead” | नयाम्·आस, or redup. perf. निनाय |
भृ | “bear” | बिभरां·बभूव (3rd class roots redup. b/4 ॰आम्), or redup. perf. बभार | |
ह्वे | “call” | ह्वयाम्·आस, or redup. perf. जुहव |
1. | Sibilant Aorist inserts a sibilant between the root and before 2nd conj. Impf. terms. Before आ॰ 2nd pl. ॰ध्वम्, the final sibilant (॰स् or ॰ष्) of suffix converts ध् to ढ् (2.88:), then the sibilant drops. | ||||
a. | स-Aorist is taken by a few roots ending in श् or ह् (both combining with स → क्ष kṣa 2.86:, 2.105:) and containing the vowels इ उ or ऋ. | ||||
Unmodified root | + ॰स sa | + 2nd conj. Impf. terms. ex. | 1st conj. term. आ॰ 3rd pl. अन्त. | ||
b. | स्-Aorist is taken by roots ending in cons. or in vowels other than आ. | ||||
पर॰: ऋद्धि of fin./med. vow. आ॰: गुण of fin. vow., ex. ऋ. | + ॰स् s | + 2nd conj. Impf. terms. ex. | पर॰ 2nd sg. ईस् पर॰ 3rd sg. ईत् पर॰ 3rd pl. उस्. | ||
c. | इष्-Aorist, like the स्-Aorist above (5.30.1.a:), is taken by roots ending in cons. or in vowels other than आ. | ||||
पर॰: ऋद्धि of fin./med. vow. आ॰: गुण of fin. vow., ex. ऋ. | + ॰इष् i-ṣ (2.101:) | + same terms. as स्-Aorist above, except suffix इष् drops before पर॰ 2nd 3rd sg. ईस् ईत् (likely replacements for iṣ-s and iṣ-t). | |||
d. | इष्-Aorist is mostly taken by six roots ending in ॰आ, inflected only in परस्मैपद. | ||||
Unmodified root | + ॰सिष् s-i-ṣ | + same terms. as स्-Aorist above, except इष् of ॰इष् drops before पर॰ 2nd 3rd sg. ईस् ईत् (likely replacements for iṣ-s and iṣ-t). | |||
2. | Simple Aorist adds to the root w/wo connecting अ the 1st conj. Impf. terms. | ||||
a. | अ-Aorist is taken by several roots, mostly पर॰, ending in cons. | ||||
Unmodified root | + ॰अ a | + 1st conj. Impf. terms. final अ treated as per 5.5.a:–.b:. | |||
b. | Root-Aorist is taken by a few roots ending in आ, and by the पर॰ root भू “be.” | ||||
Unmodified root | no suffix | + 1st conj. Impf. terms., ex. 2nd conj. पर॰ 3rd pl. उस्, before which a radical final आ is dropped.. | |||
c. | Redulplcated-Aorist is taken by 10th class roots and the primary roots द्रु “run” श्रि “resort to,” and may give causal meaning to Aorist verb (e.g., नी “lead” → अनीनयत् a̍·nī·nay·a·t “caused to lead”). | ||||
Redup. root (5.8: & .11:) | + ॰अ a | + inflects like अ-Aorist (5.30.2.a:). |
1. | Sibilant Aorist | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
a. | स-Aorist | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
दिश् “point” | → पर॰ 3rdsg. अदिक्षत् a̍·dik·ṣa·t 2.86:, | 3rdpl. अदिक्षन् a̍·dik·ṣ[a]·an 5.5.b: | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
→ आ॰ 3rdsg. अदिक्षत a̍·dik·ṣa·ta, | 3rdpl. अदिक्षन्त a̍·dik·ṣ[a]·anta | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
दुह् “milk” | → दुह्+स → धुक्+ष 2.105:,.77:,.101:, 3rdsg. अधुक्षत् a̍·dhuk·ṣa·t | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
b. | स्-Aorist | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
च्छिद् “cut off” | → पर॰ 3rdsg. अच्छैत्सीत् a̍·cchait·s·īt 2.77:,.42:, | 3rdpl. अच्छैत्सुः a̍·cchait·s·uḥ | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
→ आ॰ 3rdsg. अच्छित्त a̍·cchit·[s]·ta 2.98:, | 3rdpl. अच्छित्सत a̍·cchit·s·ata | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
श्रु “hear” | → पर॰ 3rdsg. अश्रौषीत् a̍·śrau·ṣ·īt 2.101:, | 3rdpl. अश्रौषत a̍·śrau·ṣ·ata | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
[···pg 55···] | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Resulting sandhi with Aorist suffix स् before and after other cons.: | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Before suffix स् final radical न् 2.93: and म् 2.104: become anusvāra, e.g.,
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
दह् “burn”+स् → धक्+ष् 2.105:,.77:,101:, e.g.,
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Irregular Forms of स्-Aorist | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
कृ “do” in आ॰ 3rd 2ndsg. drops the Aorist स् suffix, i.e.,
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
c. | इष्-Aorist | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
पू “purify” | → पर॰ 3rdsg. अपावीत् a̍·pāv·[iṣ]·īt 2.71:, | 3rdpl. अपाविषुः a̍·pāv·iṣ·uḥ | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
→ आ॰ 3rdsg. अपविष्ट a̍·pav·iṣ·ṭa 2.98:, | 3rdpl. अपविषत a̍·pav·iṣ·ata | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
व्यथ् “be afraid” | → पर॰ 3rdsg. अव्यथीत् a̍·vyath·[iṣ]·īt, | 3rdpl. अव्यथिषुः a̍·vyath·iṣ·uḥ | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
→ आ॰ 3rdsg. अव्यथिष्ट a̍·vyath·iṣ·ṭa 2.88:, | 3rdpl. अव्यथिषत a̍·vyath·iṣ·ata | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Irregular Forms of इष्-Aorist | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Medial vowel अ of the roots ending in र् and ल् (e.g. चर् and चल्), as well as the roots मद् “be exhilarated,” वद् “speak,” and व्रज् “move” takes वृद्धि in पर॰, e.g.,
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
d. | सिष्-Aorist | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
या “purify” | → पर॰ 3rdsg. अयासीत् a̍·yā·[iṣ]·īt, | 3rdpl. अयासिषुः a̍·yā·siṣ·uḥ | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2. | Simple Aorist | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
a. | अ-Aorist | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
शुच् “grieve” | → पर॰ 3rdsg. अशुचत् a̍·śuc·a·t, | 3rdpl. अशुचन् a̍·śuc·[a]·an | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
→ पर॰ 1stsg. अशुचम् a̍·śuc·[a]·am, | 1stpl. अशुचाम a̍·śuc·ā·ma 5.5.a: | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
→ आ॰ 3rdsg. अशुचत a̍·śuc·a·ta, | 3rdpl. अशुचन्त a̍·śuc·[a]·anta | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Irregular Forms of अ-Aorist | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
ख्या “tell” drops आ (cf. 5.30.2.b:), e.g.,
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
b. | Root-Aorist | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
दा “give” | → पर॰ 3rdsg. अदात् a̍·dā·t, | 3rdpl. अदुः a̍·d[ā]·uḥ | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Irregular Forms of Root-Aorist | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
भू “be” inserts व् before vowel terms., and 3rdpl. term. is 1st conj. अन्, e.g.,
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
[···pg 56···] | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
c. | Reduplicated-Aorist | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
मुच् “release” | → पर॰ 3rdsg. अमूचुचत् a̍·mū·muc·a·t, | 3rdpl. अमूमुचन् a̍·mū·muc·[a]·an | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
→ आ॰ 3rdsg. अमूमुचत a̍·mū·muc·a·ta, | 3rdpl. अमूमुचन्त a̍·mū·muc·[a]·anta | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Irregular Forms of Reduplicated-Aorist | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
व्यध् “pierce” takes saṃprasāraṇa (य to इ) to maintain the prevailing U–U (light-heavy-light) rhythm, e.g.,
|
Unmodified root | + या yā̍ accented | + स् s | + 2nd Conj. Imperfect terms. The 3rd pl. being यासुस्, also the स् drops before 2nd 3rd sg. terms. स् त् (cf. 5.30.1.c:), being then identical with the 2nd conj. Potential. |
E.g., बुह् “awake” → पर॰ 3rd sg. बुध्यात् budh·yā̍·[s]·t, 3rd pl. बुध्यासुः budh·yā̍·s·uḥ |
गुण of fin. vowel and metrically light medial. 10th class roots retain 1st conj. base with अय. | + (इ)स्य sya̍ or i·ṣya̍ accented | + 1st Conj. Present (Primary) terms. |
कृ “do” | → पर॰ 3rdsg. करिष्यति kar·i·ṣya̍·ti, | 3rdpl. करिष्यन्ति kar·i·ṣy[a]·a̍nti (5.5.b:) |
→ पर॰ 1stsg. करिष्यामि kar·i·ṣyā̍·mi, | 1stpl. करिष्यामः kar·i·ṣyā̍·māḥ (5.5.a:) | |
→ आ॰ 3rdsg. करिष्यते kar·i·ṣya̍·te, | 3rdpl. करिष्यन्ते kar·i·ṣy[a]·a̍nte | |
इ “do” | → पर॰ 3rdsg. एष्यति e·ṣya̍·ti, | 3rdpl. एष्यन्ति e·ṣy[a]·a̍nti |
भू “do” | → पर॰ 3rdsg. भविष्यति bhav·i·ṣya̍·ti (2.71:) |
ग्रह् “seize” (and opt. roots with final ॠ) inserts ई instead of connecting vowel इ, e.g., पर॰ 3rdsg. ग्रहीष्यति grah·ī·ṣya̍·ti (cf. 6.6: Irreg. ī-ta). |
Most medial ऋ roots opt. transpose guṇa अर् to र b/4 स्य; a few necessarily, e.g., |
Roots नश् “be lost” and मज्ज् “sink,” instead of गुण, optionally strengthen with a nasal before स्य, e.g., नङ्क्ष्यति naṅk·ṣya̍·ti or नशिष्यति naś·i·ṣya̍·ti, मङ्क्ष्यति maṅk·ṣya·ti (2.81:) or मज्जिष्यति majj·i·ṣya·ti. |
Root takes गुण, like in Simple Fut. (5.33:) | + (इ)तृ in masc. nom. (even if the agent is fem. or neut.), i.e., (इ)ता (i)tā̍ accented | + in 3rd person: sg. du. pl. nom. of agent noun ॰तृ (3.38:). or in 2nd or 1st person: 2nd Conj. पर॰ Pr. tense of अस् “be” (5.19.4:), the agent noun ॰तृ remains in sg. even with du. and pl. अस्. |
भू “be” | → पर॰ 3rdsg. भविता bhav·i·tā̍, | 3rdpl. भवितारः bhav·i·tā̍r·aḥ |
→ पर॰ 2ndsg. भवितासि bhav·i·tā̍·asi, | 2ndpl. भवितास्थ bhav·i·tā̍·stha | |
→ पर॰ 1stsg. भवितास्मि bhav·i·tā̍·asmi, | 1stpl. भवितास्मः bhav·i·tā̍·smaḥ | |
गम् “go” | → 3rdsg. गन्ता gan·tā̍ (2.55:), 2ndsg. गन्तासि gan·tā̍·asi, 1stsg. गन्तास्मि gan·tā̍·asmi | |
कृ “do” | → fut. stem करिष्य kar·i·ṣya̍, but Peri. Fut. पर॰ 1stsg. कर्तास्मि kar·tā̍·asmi |
Accented Aug. अ a̍ | + Simple Fut. stem (इ)स्य | + 1st Conj. Imperfect (Secondary) terms. |
भू “be” | → fut. भविष्य॰ | → पर॰ 3rdsg. अभविस्यत् a̍·bhav·i·ṣya·t, | 3rdpl. अभविष्यन् a̍·bhav·i·ṣy[a]·an |
→ आ॰ 3rdsg. अभविष्यत a̍·bhav·i·ṣya·ta, | 3rdpl. अभविष्यन्त a̍·bhav·i·ṣy[a]·anta | ||
इ “go” | → fut. एष्य॰ | → पर॰ 3rdsg. ऐष्यत् a̍i·ṣya·t (5.5.c:), | 3rdpl. ऐष्यन् a̍i·ṣy[a]·an |
The root is modified in this way: | + य ya̍ accented | + 1st Conj. आ॰ terms. (regardless of the class of the root) of the appropriate सार्वधातुक-लकार verbal base tense or mood. |
2. Final इ or उ is lengthened. | ||
5. Nasal preceding a final cons. is dropped (weakens). | ||
6. Saṃprasāraṇa, if the root is susceptible, is taken (weakens). | ||
भू “be” | → Present | 3rdsg. भूयते | bhū·ya̍·te, | 3rdpl. भूयन्ते | bhū·y[a]·a̍nte |
→ Imperfect | 3rdsg. अभूयत | a̍·bhū·ya·ta, | 3rdpl. अभूयन्त | a̍·bhū·y[a]·anta | |
→ Imperative | 3rdsg. भूयताम् | bhū·ya̍·tām, | 3rdpl. भूयन्ताम् | bhū·y[a]·a̍ntām | |
→ Potential | 3rdsg. भूयेत | bhū·ya̍·ita, | 3rdpl. भूयेरन् | bhū·ya̍·iran | |
धा “support” | → Present | 3rdsg. धीयते | dhī·ya̍·te, | 3rdpl. धीयन्ते | dhī·y[a]·a̍nte |
श्रु “hear” | → Present | 3rdsg. श्रूयते | śrū·ya̍·te, | 3rdpl. श्रूयन्ते | śrū·y[a]·a̍nte |
कृ “do” | → Present | 3rdsg. क्रीयते | krī·ya̍·te, | 3rdpl. क्रीयन्ते | krī·y[a]·a̍nte |
बन्ध् “bind” | → Present | 3rdsg. बध्यते | badh·ya̍·te, | 3rdpl. बध्यन्ते | badh·y[a]·a̍nte |
वच् “speak” | → Present | 3rdsg. उच्यते | uc·ya̍·te, | 3rdpl. उच्यन्ते | uc·y[a]·a̍nte |
कृ “do” | → Causal Pr. | 3rdsg. कार्यते | kār·[aya]·ya̍·te, | 3rdpl. कार्यन्ते | kār·[aya]·y[a]·a̍nte |
शास् “rule” | → Pr. 3rdsg. शास्यते śiṣ·ya̍·te | or शिष्यते śiṣ·ya̍·te (weakens, cf. 5.19.11:) |
खन् “rule” | → Pr. 3rdsg. खन्यते khan·ya̍·te | or खायते khā·ya̍·te |
तन् “rule” | → Pr. 3rdsg. तन्यते tan·ya̍·te | or तायते tā·ya̍·te |
वे “rule” | → Pr. 3rdsg. ऊयते ū·ya̍·te (weakens) | |
ह्वे “rule” | → Pr. 3rdsg. हूयते hū·ya̍·te (weakens) |
Augment अ a̍ accented | + Strengthened root: | + the special 3rdsg. आ॰ term. इ. |
1. वृद्धि of final vowel. | ||
2. Final आ inserts य् before the term. इ. | ||
3. गुण of metrically light medial vowel, with अ lengthened. | ||
श्रु “hear” | → आ॰ 3rdsg. अश्रावि a̍·śrāv·i |
ज्ञा “know” | → आ॰ 3rdsg. अज्ञायि a̍·jñā·y·i |
मुच् “release” | → आ॰ 3rdsg. अमोचि a̍·moc·i |
पद् “go” | → आ॰ 3rdsg. अपादि a̍·pād·i |
रुह् “sprout” | → causal रोपय॰ → आ॰ 3rdsg. अरोपि a̍·ro·p·[aya]·i |
रभ् “seize” inserts a nasal, i.e.,
|
पॄ “fill” strengthens ॠ after labial to ऊर् (as per 5.37.4:), i.e.,
|
Roots गम् “seize” रच् “fashion” वध् “slay” do not lengthen their अ, e.g.,
|
Derivative Formations
5.39: Derivative formations. The prior verbal stem formations we have seen were for the most part unique for either the ten classes of roots in the सार्वधातुक-लकार-s, or for each one of the आर्धधातुक-लकार-s – though the 10th class root stem also appears in some of those latter tenses and moods, and thus arguably similar to the following derivative stems. Now the following secondary verbal stem formations, also called derivatives, differ in that the same stem formation with its own meaning attached can then be used in any of these tenses and moods, and even for forming nouns and adjectives.
5.40: Causatives.Same strengthening as 10th class roots: | + अय a̍-ya accented (Most roots ending in आ insert प् b/4 अय) | + सार्वधातुक-लकार-s 1st Conj. पर॰ or आ॰ terms., regardless of natural tendencies of the root. or For आर्धधातुक-लकार-s, the strengthened ॰अय stem is treated as a root by the Paraphrastic Perfect, and in the other tenses and moods replacing अय with अयि, (the Benedictive पर॰ dropping the अय). However, the Reduplicated-Aorist itself can provide the causal sense for Aorist. |
The passive accepts the strengthened causal stem, but drops the causal suffix अय. | ||
Verbal nouns and adjectives may also be formed from the strengthened causal stem, with अय (usually अयि) or without. |
कृ “do” | → कारय॰ “make” |
→ cs. pr. 3rdsg. कारयति kār·a̍ya·ti → cs. ps. 3rdsg. कार्यते kār·[aya]·ya̍·te |
सद् “sink” | → सादय॰ “destroy” |
→ cs. pr. 3rdsg. सादयति sād·a̍ya·ti → cs. pot. 3rdsg. सादयेत् sād·a̍y[a]·et |
दृश् “see” | → दर्शय॰ “show” |
→ cs. impr. 2ndsg. दर्शय darś·a̍ya → cs. peri. perf. 3rdsg. दर्शयामास darś·a̍ya·ām·ās·a |
स्था “stand” | → स्थापय॰ “stop” |
→ cs. pr. 3rdsg. स्थापयति sthā·p·a̍ya·ti → cs. impv. 2ndsg. स्थापय sthā·p·a̍ya |
धृ “hold” | → धारय॰ “sustain” |
→ cs. pr. 3rdsg. धारयति dhār·a̍ya·ti → cs. impv. 2ndsg. धारय dhār·a̍ya |
Roots ज्ञा “know,” ग्ला “languish,” म्ला “fade,” स्ना “wash” opt. shorten vowel b/4 पय, e.g., ज्ञापय॰ or ज्ञपय॰ | ||
Some roots not ending in आ also take प् before अय, and show final vowel irregularity, e.g., | जि “conquer” | → जपय॰ ja·p·a̍ya |
अधि+इ “study” | → अध्यापय॰ adhy·ā·p·a̍ya “teach” | |
ऋ “go” | → अर्पय॰ ar·p·a̍ya | |
रुह् “grow” opt. takes प्, dropping the ह्, b/4 अय, i.e., रोहय॰ roh·a̍ya or रोपय॰ ro[h]·p·a̍ya “raise” | ||
पा “drink” takes य्, instead of प्, b/4 अय, i.e., पायय॰ pā·y·a̍ya | ||
Roots धू “shake,” प्री “love” strengthen with a nasal, i.e., धूनय॰ dhū·n·a̍ya, प्रीणय॰ prī·ṇ·a̍ya | ||
लभ् “take” strengthens medial vowel with an inserted nasal, i.e., लम्भय॰ lambh·a̍ya | ||
दंश् “bite,” drops nasal in Present tense (दशति) 5.15.5:, but retains it in causal stem: दंशय॰ daṃś·a̍ya | ||
भी “fear” forms the optional stem: भीषय॰ bhī·ṣ[a]·a̍ya (poss. den. 5.43: “intimidate”) or भायय॰ bhāy·a̍ya “raise” | ||
हन् “destroy” forms the stem: घातय॰ ghāt·[a]·a̍ya (poss. den. 5.43: “cause destruction”) |
Reduplicated root (5.8: & .12:), the reduplicating (1st) syllable is accented | + (इ)स sa or i-ṣa | + 1st Conj. terms. for सार्वधातुक-लकार-s tenses and moods in पर॰ or आ॰, appropriate to the root. Otherwise, the stem drops its final अ and is treated as a root for: Periphrastic Perfect इष् Aorist Both Futures & Conditional, with (इ) Passive Causative Adjective and noun formation |
Before redup. and adding स, final इ उ are lengthened, final ऋ ॠ become ईर्, and after labials ऊर्. | ||
The connecting vowel इ is added as in Simple Future स्य (5.33:), except: Roots ending in short ऋ and long ऊ ॠ mostly do not take इ. Roots ऋ “go,” दृ “hold,” पू “purify,” do take इ. | ||
Adjectives are formed with उ, e.g., | ||
Nouns are formed with feminine आ, e.g., ज्ञा → जिज्ञासा ji̍·jñā·s[a]·ā “the desire to know”. |
बुध् “know” | → des. pr. | 3rdsg. बुभुत्सति bu̍·bhut·sa·ti (2.76:–.77:), |
3rdpl. बुभुत्सन्ति bu̍·bhut·s[a]·anti | ||
जीव् “live” | → des. stem जिजीविष॰ ji̍·jīv·i·ṣa | |
आप् “obtain” | → des. stem ईप्स॰ i̍[p]·ip·sa (contracted from ip-ip, 5.12.2:) | |
कृ “do” | → des. stem चिकीर्ष॰ ci̍·kīr·ṣa (5.8.3:) | |
घस् “eat” | → des. stem जिघत्स॰ ji̍·ghat·sa (5.12.1: & 2.96:) |
गम् “go” lengthens medial अ, i.e., जिगांस॰ ji̍·gāṃ·sa (2.54:) | ||
मन् “think” lengthens medial अ and reduplicating vowel, i.e., मीमांस॰ mī̍·māṃ·sa (5.12.1:) | ||
हन् “destroy” lengthens medial अ and reverts ह् to guttural, i.e., जिघांस॰ ji̍·ghāṃ·sa | ||
Some roots with palatal, e.g., चि “gather” and जि “conquer” may revert to guttural, i.e., चिकीष॰ ci̍·kī·ṣa (or चिचीष॰) and जिगीष॰ ji̍·gī·ṣa | ||
Roots ग्रह् “seize,” प्रछ् “ask,” स्वप् “sleep” take saṃprasāraṇa, i.e., |
Seven roots contract the reduplicated root to one consonant after the reduplicating syllable: | ||||
दा “give” | → redup. दिदास॰ | → des. stem दित्स॰ | di̍·t·sa | |
धा “place” | → redup. दिधास॰ | → des. stem धित्स॰ | dhi̍·t·sa (2.76:–.77:) | |
मा “measure” | → redup. मिमास॰ | → des. stem मित्स॰ | mi̍·t·sa | |
पद् “go” | → redup. पिपत्स॰ | → des. stem पित्स॰ | pi̍·t·sa | |
रभ् “grasp” | → redup. रिरप्स॰ | → des. stem रिप्स॰ | ri̍·p·sa | |
लभ् “take” | → redup. लिलप्स॰ | → des. stem लिप्स॰ | li̍·p·sa | |
शक् “be able” | → redup. शिशक्ष॰ | → des. stem शिक्ष॰ | śi̍·k·ṣa |
Five roots conjugate as desideratives, but are generally said to have no obvious desiderative sense: | ||||
चित् “know” | → des. pr. 3rdsg. चिकित्सति | “he/she cures” | ||
गुप् “protect” | → des. pr. 3rdsg. जुगुप्सते | “he/she depises/guards against” | ||
तिज् “be sharp” | → des. pr. 3rdsg. तितिक्षते | “he/she forbears” | ||
→ f. तितिक्षा | “forbearance” | |||
बाध् “repel” | → des. pr. 3rdsg. बीभत्सते | “he/she abhors” | ||
मन् “think” | → des. pr. 3rdsg. मीमांसते | “he/she considers/analyses” | ||
→ f. मीमांसा | “analysis” |
First Form: (mostly Vedic) Reduplicated root (5.8: & .13:) | + ई opt. inserted before cons. init. strong terms. | + 2nd Conj. पर॰ terms. and accenting like 3rd class roots w/गुण in strong form (5.3:), ex. accent on 1st syllable in strong and no गुण of medial root vowel before vowel ini. terms. or before the opt. ई. |
Second Form: Reduplicated root (5.8: & .13:) | + य ya̍ accented (a final vowel of root treated like before the passive ॰य) | + 1st Conj. आ॰ terms. only. or For आर्धधातुक-लकार-s, the reduplicated ॰य stem is treated as a root, with connecting vowel इ as per the simple root’s conjugation. No instance of a Perfect is found, but likely Periphrastic Perfect would be used. |
विद् “know” | → 1st Form s. वेवेद्॰, w. वेविद्॰ → | पर॰ 3rdsg. वेवेत्ति ve̍·vet·ti or वेविदीति ve̍·vid·ī·ti पर॰ 3rdpl. वेविदति ve·vid·a̍[n]ti (5.6.c:) |
लिह् “lick” | → 2nd Form लेलिह्य॰ → आ॰ 3rdsg. लेलिह्यते le·lih·ya̍·te, 3rdpl. लेलिह्यन्ते le·lih·y[a]·a̍nte |
Roots दह् “burn,” जभ् “snap at” replicate with nasal, i.e., दन्दहीति da̍-n-dah-ī-ti and दन्दह्यते da-n-dah-ya̍-te, जञ्जभ्यते ja·ñ·jabh·ya̍·te |
चर् “move” replicates with nasal and replaces radical vowel अ with ऊ, i.e., चञ्चूर्यते ca·ñ·cūr·ya̍·te |
पद् “go” also inserts ई after the replicative nasal, i.e., पनीपद्यते pa·n·ī·pad·ya̍·te (cf. 5.13.3:) |
द्रा “run” replicates as if from vowel ऋ and inserts a short इ, i.e., दरिद्राति da̍r·i·drā·ti (cf. 5.13.3:) |
Modified noun: 1. Final अ often is lengthened, sometimes becomes ई.
2. Noun stems in अन् are treated like stems in अ.
3. Final इ उ are lengthened.
4. Final ऋ becomes री. | + य ya̍ accented | + 1st Conj. terms. The आर्धधातुक-लकार-s are extremely rare. |
or Final vowel of noun is replaced by अ a, e.g.,f. असूया → den. stem असूय॰ asūy[ā]·a |
Denominatives in short अ which have the causative accent (a̍[-ya]) are considered roots of the 10th class, e.g., मन्त्रय॰ (10th class मन्त्र्) “take counsel (मन्त्र),”
कथय॰ (10th class कथ्) “tell how (कथम्),” etc. | ||
Denominatives express relations to the noun, depending on context, in these senses: | ||
“be or act like,” “treat as,” “desire,” e.g., | पीत्रीय॰ | “be like (treat like) a father (पितृ).” |
राजाय॰ | “act like a king (राजन्).” | |
पुत्रीय॰ | “treat like (or desire) a son (पुत्र).” | |
“make,” and similar meanings, e.g., | शब्दाय॰ | “make a noise (शब्द).” |
दुःखाय॰ | “suffer misery (दुःख).” |
Go to Top ('Home' key on many Windows browsers)
6.1: Parts of Speech. As verbs are formed from roots, similarly most other words in संस्कृत are formed from roots. Built clearly from verbal roots and maintaining the verbal meaning of those roots, are participles and infinitives. To these may be added prepositions, either prefixed or unattached. These prepositions, not derived from roots, may also be added to verbs, as well as to many other words. Those prepositions that can remain unattached make up a small portion of a larger group of words called indeclinables. Indeclinables include some participles, infinitives, and other words used as particles, connectives, and adverbs, which are also not usually derived from roots. Even certain declined forms of nouns and adjectives used adverbially are considered indeclinables. A few indeclinables are also employed more like as adjectives (e.g., मिथ्या “apparent”) or even as substantives (e.g., स्वर् “heaven”). Finally most nouns and adjectives are considered to be derived from roots often preceded by prefixes – some of these roots being obvious from the meaning of the word, some not so obvious. In forming many of these words, a set of suffixes (roughly distinguished into primary and secondary, see 6.22:) have been identified, and many are presented in the following pages. Proper names are nouns that are mostly adjectives employed as names, hence most names in संस्कृत are descriptive.
Paninian grammar provides a vast set of rules and a number of technical signs attached to the suffixes and the roots for developing a word formation mechanism. This was important for protecting the integrity of the language and it regulated the bounds of its usage for future generations of authors and speakers. Being beginners to this language, though, we will learn more like the way children learn the language. We will work on identifying the suffixes as they are seen in actual usage. Like the child, our job here is to recognize these suffixes as forming a pattern of usage when joined with words in a sentence. Recognizing the suffix helps us identify the part of speech and some of the meaning of these words, then our accumulated vocabulary and grasp of syntax and context need to take over to provide the complete meaning to the sentences.
6.2: Formation of verbs. Optional components in normal print, necessary components in bold.Prefix(s) | Augment | Root or verbal base | Tense, mood, and/or derivative suffix(es). Completing verbal stem. | Conjugation termination |
Prefix(s) | (Root or verbal stem) + primary suffix | Secondary suffix(es). Completing nominal stem. | Declension termination |
Non-root stem |
Participles and Infinitives
6.4: Active (परस्मैपद) Participles.॰अत् | Present Participle (active) (pr. pt.) (“…ing” for meaning see 7.16:). |
Strong stem formed by Pr. पर॰ 3rd pl. ॰अन्ति term. dropping इ → strong अन्त् suffix. 3rd class and some other reduplicated roots (5.19.10:) 3rd pl. ॰अति term. (5.6.c:) → strong अत् suffix. | |
Future Participle (active) (fut. pt.) (“will be …ing”). | |
Strong stem from Simple Fut. पर॰ 3rd pl., ॰अन्ति term. (5.33:), drops इ → strong अन्त् suffix. | |
Weak stem for both is formed by dropping, if there, the न् → weak अत् suffix. | |
For declension see 3.12:. Those with strong stem in अत् decline like dental ॰त् (3.5:) with inserted n. pl. nasal (3.5.d:) opt. dropping. For feminine see 3.9: & .9.a:. |
Examples | ||||
Root | Present | Future | ||
3rd pl. | pr. pt. strong | 3rd pl. | fut. pt. strong | |
भू 1st “be” | भवन्ति bha̍v·anti | भवन्त्॰ bha̍v·ant | भविष्यन्ति bhav·i·ṣy[a]·a̍nti | भविष्यन्त्॰ bhav·i·ṣy[a]·a̍nt |
अस् 2nd “be” | सन्त् s·a̍nti | सन्त्॰ s·a̍nt | (substitutes भू in आर्धधातुक-लकार) | |
हु 3rd “offer” | जुह्वति ju̍hv·ati | जुह्वत्॰ ju̍hv·at | होष्यन्ति ho·ṣy[a]·a̍nti | होष्यन्त्॰ ho·ṣy[a]·a̍nt |
ज्ञा 9th “know” | जानन्ति jān·a̍nti | जानन्त्॰ jān·a̍nt | ज्ञास्यन्ति jñā·sy[a]·a̍nti | ज्ञास्यन्त्॰ jñā·sy[a]·a̍nt |
॰वस् | Reduplicated Perfect Participle (active) (redup. perf. pt.) (“has… or had…” 7.17: & .22:) is rare. |
Weak stem formed from Redup. Perf. पर॰ 3rd pl. (5.27.3:), ॰उस् term. replaced with accented उष् u̍ṣ suffix (3.19.a:). | |
Middle & strong stems from weak by dropping उष्. Final vowel of root, if any, is restored from semivowel (due to उष्), if resulting stem is monosyllabic, insert इ. Then: | |
Middle stem adds accented वत् va̍t (वस् → वत् b/4 pada terms. 2.97:). | |
Strong stem adds accented वांस् vā̍ṃs. | |
For declension see 3.19:; for feminine see 3.9:. |
Examples | ||||
Root | Redup. Perf. 3rd pl. | Weak | Middle | Strong |
कृ “do” | चकक्रुः cakr·u̍ḥ | चक्रुष्॰ cakr·u̍ṣ | चकृवत्॰ cakṛ·va̍t | चकृवांस्॰ cakṛ·vā̍ṃs |
भू “be” | बभूवुः babhūv·u̍ḥ | बभूवुष्॰ babhūv·u̍ṣ (5.27.4: Irreg.) | बभूवत्॰ babhū·va̍t | बभूवांस्॰ babhū·vā̍ṃs |
तन् “stretch” | तेनुः ten·u̍ḥ | तेनुष्॰ ten·u̍ṣ | तेनिवत्॰ ten·i·va̍t | तेनिवांस्॰ ten·i·vā̍ṃs |
यज् “worship” | ईजुः īj·u̍ḥ | ईजुष्॰ īj·u̍ṣ | ईजिवत् īj·i·va̍t | ईजिवांस्॰ īj·i·vā̍ṃs |
Irregular | ||||
विद् “know” | विदुः vid·u̍ḥ | विदुष्॰ vid·u̍ṣ | विद्वत् vid·va̍t | विद्वांस्॰ (no इ inserted) |
॰मान | Pr. Mid. (1st conj. roots) or Fut. Mid. Participles, and Pr. Ps. Participle. |
fr. Pr. or Fut. or Ps. in आ॰ 3rd pl. ॰अन्ते term., replacing न्ते with ॰मान māna suffix. | |
॰आन | Pr. Mid. (2nd conj. roots) Participle. |
fr. Pr. आ॰ 3rd pl., ॰अते term. replaced with ॰आन āna suffix. Irreg. आस् “sit” → आसीन ās·īna. | |
Perf. Mid. Participle (Vedic). | |
fr. Perf. आ॰ 3rd pl., ॰इरे term. replaced with ॰आन āna̍ suffix. |
Examples | ||||
भू 1st “be” | → Pr. 3rd pl. | भवन्ते bha̍v·[a]·ante | → Pr. Mid. Pt. | भवमान bha̍v·a·māna |
→ Fut. 3rd pl. | भविष्यन्ते bhav·i·ṣy[a]·a̍nte | → Fut. Mid. Pt. | भविष्यमान bhav·i·ṣya̍·māna | |
→ Ps. 3rd pl. | भूयन्ते bhū·y[a]·a̍nte | → Pr. Ps. Pt. | भूयमान bhū·ya̍·māna | |
हु 3rd “offer” | → Pr. 3rd pl. | जुह्वते ju̍·hv·ate | → Pr. Mid. Pt. | जुह्वान ju̍·hv·āna |
भू “be” | → Perf. 3rd pl. | बभूविरे ba·bhūv·ire̍ | → Perf. Mid. Pt. | बभूवान ba·bhūv·āna̍ |
॰न | Accented न na̍ added directly to the root, and taken only by primary roots. |
Many roots ending in long vowels आ (sometimes weakening to ई or इ), or ई ऊ ॠ (ॠ becoming ईर् or ऊर्, cf. 2.68:–.69:). | |
Many roots ending in द् (द् treated as a nominal stem final changing to न्, 2.24: & .44:). |
Examples of न | ||
हा “abandon” | → हीन hī·na̍ | |
पॄ “fill” | → पूर्ण pūr·ṇa̍ (cf. 5.37.4:) | |
भिद् “separate” | → भिन्न bhin·na̍ | |
Roots नुद् “push,” विद् “find” opt. take ॰त, e.g. विन्न vin·na̍ or वित्त vit·ta̍. | ||
Irregular | ||
Roots भञ्ज् “break,” भुज् “bend,” मज्ज् “sink,” विज् “tremble” revert ज् to guttural (2.82:), e.g., भञ्ज् → भग्न bhag·na̍. |
॰इत | Accented इत i-ta̍ added to the full (unchanged) form of the root, and taken by: |
Many primary roots ending in conjunct cons., or cons. not easily combined with ॰त, such as cerebrals, mute aspirates, persistent semivowels, and ल्. | |
All derivative stems, dropping their final अ or अय. |
Examples of इत | |||
काङ्क्ष् “desire” | → काङ्क्षित kāṅkṣ·i·ta̍ | ||
जीव् “live” | → जीवित jīv·i·ta̍ (cf. 5.37.4:) | ||
भू “be” | → cs, भावय॰ bhāv·a̍ya | → भावित bhāv·[aya]·i·ta̍ | |
रुह् “grow” | → cs. रोहय॰ or रोपय॰ roh·a̍ya or ro[h]·p·a̍ya | → रोहित or रोपित roh·i·ta̍ or ro[h]·p·i·ta̍ | |
आप् “obtain” | → des. ईप्स॰ īp·sa̍ (5.12.1:) | → ईप्सित īp·s[a]·i·ta̍ | |
Irregular | |||
Roots वद् “speak,” वस् “dwell” take saṃprasāraṇa, i.e., उदित ud·i·ta̍, उषित uṣ·i·ta̍ | |||
ग्रह् “seize” takes saṃprasāraṇa and lengthens connecting vowel इ, i.e., ग्रहीत gṛh·ī·ta̍ |
॰त | The most common form, an accented त ta̍ added to the weakened root. |
Saṃprasāraṇa, if liable, is taken. | |
Final आ sometimes weakens to ई or even इ. | |
Final and penultimate nasal often drops. |
Examples of त | ||||
नश् “be lost” | → नष्ट | naṣ·ṭa̍ (cf. 2.85:) (cs. नाशित nāś·i·ta̍) | ||
वच् “speak” | → उक्त | uk·ta̍ (2.80:) | ||
स्था “stand” | → स्थित | sthi·ta̍ | ||
गम् “ga” | → गत | ga[m]·ta̍ | ||
भ्रंश् “err” | → भ्रष्ट | bhra[ṃ]ṣ·ṭa̍ (2.85:) | ||
Roots like सिध् “succeed,” दह् “burn,” दृह् “be strong” throw aspir. forward (2.76: & .78:), i.e., | ||||
Irregular | ||||
धा “put” weakens both cons. and vowel, i.e., हित hi·ta̍ | ||||
दा 3rd “give” takes its weak सार्वधातुक-लकार stem 5.20.1:, i.e., दत्त dat·ta̍ (2.42:) | ||||
with prep. आ अनु प्र, परि प्रति (last two lengthen final इ) दत्त contracts to त्त, e.g., परीत्त parī·t·ta̍ | ||||
Some roots ending in अम् lengthen अ and retain the nasal, e.g., शम् “be tranquil” → शान्त śān·ta̍ (2.55:) | ||||
ध्वन् “sound” also lengthens अ and retains the nasal, i.e., ध्वान्त dhvān·ta̍ | ||||
Some roots in अन् lengthen अ and drop nasal, e.g., जन् “be born”, e.g., जात jā[n]·ta̍, खन् “dig” → खात. |
॰(इ)तवत् | The ॰वत् vat suffix added to the pp. (इ)त, converts a passive meaning to active. |
It has its strong stem in वन्त् and weak stem in वत्. | |
For declension see 3.13:; for feminine see 3.9:. |
Example | |
कृ “do” | → pp. कृत → past act. pt. st. कृतवन्त्॰ kṛ·ta̍·vant, wk. कृतवत्॰ kṛ·ta̍·vat |
॰य | Orig. from Vedic “ia”, य is added to the strengthened root. | |||
Final | आ | becomes ए. | ||
इ ई | takes गुण. | |||
उ ऊ | takes गुण or वृद्धि. | |||
ऋ ॠ | takes वृद्धि. | |||
Light medial इ उ generally takes गुण, अ sometimes lengthens. | ||||
Derivative suffix अय is dropped. |
Examples of य ya (ia) | ||
आप् “attain” | → आप्य | ā̍p·ya |
ज्ञा “know” | → ज्ञेय | jñe·ya |
जि “conquer” | → जेय | je·ya or (Vedic) जय्य ja̍y·ya (2.71:) |
द्रु “attain” | → द्रव्य | drav·ya (2.71:) and भू “be” → भाव्य bhāv·ya |
कृ “do” | → कार्य | kār·ya̍ |
क्लिद् “become wet” | → क्लेद्य | kled·ya |
दह् “burn” | → दाह्य | dāh·ya but गम् “attain” गम्य gam·ya |
Irregularly, some roots weaken, e.g., यज् saṃprasāraṇa → इज्य ij·ya, शास् 5.19.11: → शिष्य śiṣ·ya |
॰(इ)तव्य | Orig. from Vedic “tu” plus “ia”. The root takes गुण (5.34:). |
Connecting vowel इ is added like for peri. future (5.34:). | |
Derivative suffix अय is retained as अय्. |
॰अनीय | Orig. fr. primary suff. “ana” plus secondary suff. “ī̍ya” (6.26:–.27:). The root takes गुण. |
Derivative suffix अय is dropped. |
Examples of अनीय anī̍ya | |
पद् “go” | → पदनीय pad·anī̍ya |
मुद् “rejoice” | → मोदनीय mod·anī̍ya |
भू “be” | → cs. stem भावय॰ bhāv·a̍ya → भावनीय bhāv·[aya]·anī̍ya “to be supposed (to be)” |
॰(इ)त्वा | Accented त्वा tvā̍ (originally an old sg. inst. of stem in तु) added to weakened root without prefix. | ||
Formed usually by replacing pp. suffix (इ)त or न with (इ)त्वा. | |||
Derivative suffix अय is usually retained as अय्, unlike b/4 pp. (इ)त. |
Examples of त्वा tvā̍ | ||||
वस् “stay” | → pp. उषित | uṣ·i·ta̍ | → उषित्वा | uṣ·i·tvā̍ |
हन् “destroy” | → pp. हत | ha·ta̍ | → हत्वा | ha[n]·tvā̍ |
स्था “stand” | → pp. cs. स्थापित sthā·p·[aya]·i·ta̍ | → cs. स्थापयित्वा sthā·p·ay·i·tvā̍ |
॰य | Unaccented य ya added to roots in cmpd. with prefix, etc. (6.12:–.14:) (ex. negative prefix pcl. अ॰ अन्॰). | |||
Formed by adding य to accented, but generally weakened root, with root final: | ||||
आ | sometimes | → ई. | ||
इ+य | sometimes | → ईय or अय्य | (or इ·त्य below). | |
उ+य | sometimes | → ऊय | (or उ·त्य below). | |
ॠ | usually | → ईर् or ऊर् (cf. 2.68:–.69:). | ||
Penultimate nasal usually drops. | ||||
Roots ending in अन् or अम्, which drop the nasal before pp. (इ)त, may opt. drop the nasal and take ॰त्य below, instead of ॰य. | ||||
Derivative suffix अय is retained as अय् if derivative stem vowel remains short (i.e., if the derivative strengthening is not noticable), otherwise अय is dropped. |
Examples of य ya | ||||
अधि+स्था “wield” | → अधिष्ठाय | adhi·ṣṭhā·ya | ||
आ+पॄ “fill” | → आपूर्य | ā·p[ūr]·ya | ||
प्रति+स्था cs. “set up” | → cs. प्रतिष्ठाप्य | prati·ṣṭhā·p·[aya]·ya |
॰त्य | Unaccented त्य tya (6.26.a:) added to prefixed roots (like य above), if root ends in a short vowel. |
Examples of त्य tya | ||||
उप+आ+श्रि “follow” | → उपाश्रित्य | upa·ā·śri·tya | ||
उद्+आ+ह्र् “say” | → उदाहत्य | ud·ā·hṛ·tya | ||
प्र+इ “die” | → प्रेत्य | pra·i·tya |
॰अम् | A rare indeclinable participle. |
Formed by replacing the unaugmented Aorist Passive 3rd sg. term. इ (5.38:) with अम्. |
Example of अम् am | ||||
श्रु “hear” | → Aorist ps. 3rd sg. अश्रावि | a̍·śrāv·i | → श्रावम् [a̍]·śrāv·am |
॰(इ)तुम् | Formed like तव्य 6.8: by replacing Periphrastic Fut. 5.34: stem suffix ता with तुम् (originally an old sg. acc. of a verbal noun in तु). Occasionally derivative suffix अय is dropped. |
Examples of तुम् tum | ||||
कृ “do” | → कर्तुम् | ka̍r·tum | ||
दृश् “see” | → द्रष्टुम् | dra̍ṣ·ṭum (see Irreg. Simple Fut. 5.33:) | ||
युध् “fight” | → योद्धुम् | yod·dhum (2.76: & .78:) | ||
विद् “know” | → वेदितुम् | ve̍d·i·tum | ||
हन् “destroy” | → हन्तुम् | ha̍n·tum | ||
The old acc. term. (म्) drops when the infinitive, as an initial word, is formed in a adjectival cmpd. (6.39:) with काम “desire” or मनस् “mind,” e.g., योद्धुकाम yoddhu[m]·kāma “having a desire to fight.” |
Verbal Compounds, Prepositions, Adverbs and Particles
6.11: Verbal Compounds. A root can combine with prepositions (which are then called prefixes, when so attached), adjectives, substantives and a few adverbs. These modify (“color in various ways”) the meaning of the root. The compounded root may be conjugated like a simple verb, or joined with a primary suffix to form a nominal stem that may be declined. The accents of these compound components shown in the following lists are as found un-compounded in Veda, but, when they are compounded, then their own accent may shift elsewhere in the compound.
6.12: Prefixes. The following are a few of the senses these prefixes may add to or modify a root’s meaning. Depending on the root and even on the contextual usage of the verbal compound, sometimes the prefix does not add to or modify the roots meaning. Often, a dictionary will never include enough prefixes joined with a root that you are looking for. In such cases, look for the prefix with a synonymous root, or see how the prefix(es) affect the two types of verbs: गम् “move” for motion or भू “be” for states of being. Roots of movement may also indicate knowing – thought “reaches” it object.अति | a̍ti | “beyond, over” |
अधि | a̍dhi | “upon, above, over” |
अनु | a̍nu | “after; towards; along; over” |
अन्तर् | anta̍r | “between, within, amidst, out of” |
अप | a̍pa | “away, off” |
अपि | a̍pi | “on, close, by, to, within, before” |
अभि | abhi̍ | “against, towards, unto; near, into; for the sake of, concerning; over, above” |
अव | a̍va | “down, off” |
आ | ā̍ | “near; back; a little, slightly, scarcely; till, as far as; from; towards” |
उद् | u̍d | “up, upwards; forth, out, beyond” |
उप | u̍pa | “up to, to, near, within”; also expressing inferiority |
नि | ni̍ | “down; in, within; back” |
निस् | ni̍s | “out of, away from” |
परा | pa̍rā | “away, off, forth; backward” |
परि | pa̍ri | “around, about; against, opposite to; beyond, above, more than” |
प्र | pra̍ | “forth, forward, onward, away; fore; very, much, greatly” |
प्रति | pra̍ti | “towards, against, opposite; before, near, on, by, at; in; again, back, in return” |
वि | vi̍ | “asunder, apart, away, out”; also expressing division or distance |
सम् | sa̍m | “together, along with; fully; well” |
The initial अ of certain prefixes is sometimes dropped with certain roots. | अधि with स्था | → e.g., धिष्ठित [a]dhi·ṣṭhita̍ |
अपि with नह् or धा | → e.g., पिहित [a]pi·hita̍ | |
अव with गाह् | → e.g., वगाह्य [a]va·gāhya | |
The final vowel, especially इ, is sometimes lengthened, e.g., | प्रतीकार prat[ī]·kāra | m. “reaction” |
प्राज्ञ pr[ā]·jña̍ | m. “intelligence” | |
Sometimes after the prefix उप परि or सम्, before √कृ, a स् is inserted, e.g., | संस्कृत saṃ·s·kṛta̍ | a. “well made” |
n. “the Sanskrit language” |
तिरस् | tira̍s | “across, aside” | with | कृ “make” | → “abuse” |
धा “put” | → “conceal” | ||||
भू “be” | → “disappear” | ||||
पुरस् | pura̍s | “in front” | with | कृ or धा | → “honor” |
आविस् | āvis | “openly” | with | कृ | → “show” |
अस् “be” or भू | → “appear” | ||||
अलम् | a̍lam | “enough” | with | कृ | → “adorn” |
श्रद् | śra̍d | “with heart/mind” | with | धा | → “trust” |
नमस् | na̍mas | “bowing” | with | कृ | → “surrender” |
अस्तम् | a̍stam | “at home” | with | इ “go” | → “set” (of the sun) |
The adj. or subst. final अ आ इ becomes ई, final उ becomes ऊ, e.g., | |||
वश m. “control” | with कृ → वशी·कृ | “take control” | |
with भू → वशी·भू | “be controlled” | ||
रत्न n. “jewel” | with भू → रत्नी·भू | “turn into a jewell” |
There are seven independent prepositions in use since the Vedas. These are noninflected particles. They are nearly all used as postpositions, placed in prose sentence order after words in the below specific case-endings, that is, they govern the case of those other words. Most of these are also used as prefixes 6.12:. | ||||
Governs | Preposition | Meaning | ||
Accusative | अनु | a̍nu | “after” | |
अभि | abhi̍ | “against” | ||
प्रति | pra̍ti | “towards, about” | ||
Ablative | आ | ā̍ (used before the ablative) | “from, up to” | |
Genitive | पुरस् | pura̍s | “before” | |
Locative | अधि | a̍dhi | “over” | |
अन्तर् | anta̍r (rarely also with genitive) | “within, between” |
There are some adverbs used as prepositions, which also govern the following case of other words made into a phrase with them. These cannot be used as verbal prefixes. The meanings given bring together the meaning of the adverb and the governing (Govns) case sense. Same meanings are carried down unless specified. | ||||
Govns | Preposition | Meaning | ||
Acc. | अन्तरा | antarā̍ | “between, without” | |
अन्तरेन | a̍ntarena (also “regarding”) | |||
अभितस् | abhi̍·tas | “around” | ||
परितस् | pari̍·tas | |||
समन्ततस् | sam·anta·tas | |||
सर्वतस् | sarva̍·tas | |||
उभयतस् | ubhaya̍·tas | “on both sides of” | ||
निकषा | ni·kāṣā̍ | “near” | ||
समया | sam·a̍yā | |||
परेण | pa̍reṇa | “beyond” | ||
यावत् | yā̍·vat (also with abl.) | “during, up to, till” | ||
Instr. | विना | vinā (also with acc., rarely abl.) | “without, except” | |
समम् | sama̍m | “(together) with” | ||
सह | saha̍ | |||
साकम् | sa·aka̍m | |||
सार्धम् | sa·artham | |||
Abl. | अनन्तरम् | an·antaram | “after [of time]” | |
ऊर्ध्वम् | ūrdhva̍m | |||
परतस् | para·tas | |||
परम् | param | |||
परेण | pa̍reṇa | |||
प्रभृति | pra·bhṛ̍ti | |||
अन्यत्र | anya̍·tra | “apart from” | ||
ऋते | ṛte (also with acc.) | |||
अर्वाक् | arvā̍k | “before [of time]” | ||
पुरा | purā̍ | |||
पूर्वम् | pū̍rvam | |||
प्राक् | pra·a̍k | |||
बहिस् | bahi̍s | “outside, out of” | ||
Gen. | अग्रे | a̍gre | “before, in presence of” | |
अग्रतस् | agra·ta̍s | |||
पुरतस् | pura·tas | |||
पुरस्तात् | pura̍s·tāt | |||
प्रत्यक्षम् | party·akṣam | |||
समक्षम् | sam·akṣa̍m | |||
अधस् | adha̍s | “below” | ||
अधस्तात् | adha̍s·tāt | |||
उपरि | upa̍ri (also with acc.) (also “with regard to”) | “above, over, upon” | ||
उपरिष्टात् | upa̍riṣ·ṭāt | |||
कृते | kṛte | “for the sake of” | ||
परतस् | para·tas | “beyond” | ||
परस्तात् | para̍s·tāt | |||
पश्चात् | paś·cā̍t | “after, in the rear of” |
Govns | Indeclinable participle | Meaning | ||
Acc. | अधिकृत्य | adhi·kṛ·tya (lit. “putting at the head”) | “with reference to, about” | |
अधिष्ठाय | adhi·ṣṭhā·ya | “by means of” | ||
अवलम्ब्य | ava·lamb·ya | |||
आश्रित्य | ā·śri·tya | |||
आस्थाय | ā·sthā·ya | |||
उद्दिश्य | ud·diś·ya (lit. “pointing at”) | “towards, about, at, for” | ||
नीत्वा | nī·tvā (lit. “leading”) | “with” | ||
मुक्त्वा | muk·tvā | “except” | ||
परित्यज्य | pari·tyaj·ya | |||
वर्जयित्वा | varj·ay·i·tvā (lit. “putting aside”) | |||
Abl. | आरभ्य | ā·rabh·ya (lit. “beginning from”) | “since” |
Nouns meaning “proximity” accompany/govern the genitive, and, when declined in the following cases, take the following prepositional meanings. | ||||||
Govns | Nouns meaning “proximity,” e.g., | Declined in | Meaning | |||
Gen. | अन्तिक | anti·ka̍ | Accusative | “towards, to , near” | ||
उपकण्ठ | upa·kaṇṭha | |||||
निकट | ni·kaṭa | Ablative | “from” | |||
पार्श्व | pārśva̍ | |||||
सकाश | sa·kāśa | |||||
सन्निधि | san·ni·dhi | Locative | “near, in the presence of” | |||
समीप | sam·īpa |
Sense of | Suffix | Adverb | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Instr. | ॰था (॰थ, ॰थम्) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Adverbs of manner, especially from pronominal stems. | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
अथ | a̍·tha | “then, thereupon” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
अन्यथा | anya̍·thā | “in another way” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
इत्था | i·t·thā̍ | “thus” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
ऋतुथा | ṛtu·thā̍ | “regularly” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
कथम् | ka·tha̍m | “in what way?” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
तथा | ta̍·thā | “in that way” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
पूर्वथा | pūrva̍·thā | “formerly” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
यथा | ya̍·thā | “in which way” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
विश्वथा | viśva̍·thā | “in every way” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Inst. (cont.) | ॰धा (॰ध, ॰ह) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Adverbs of manner (see also 4.28:) from nouns, adverbs, pronouns. | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
एकधा | eka·dhā̍ | “singly” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
कतिधा | kati·dhā̍ | “how many times?” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
द्विधा | dvi·dhā̍ | “in two ways” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
बहुधा | bahu·dhā̍ | “in many ways” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
सध | sa·dha | “in one way, together” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
सह | sa·ha̍ | “with” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
इह | i·ha̍ | “here” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Inst. (cont.) | ॰व (॰वम्) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Adverb expressing similarity of manner. | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
इव | i·va | “like, as” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
एव e·va̍ or एवम् e·va̍m | “thus, like this” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Inst. (cont.) | ॰वत् | Adverb meaning “like” from subst. and adj., e.g., | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
आश्चर्यवत् | āścarya·vat | “like a wonder” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
कृत्स्नवत् | kṛtsna·vat | “as though complete” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Inst. (cont.) | ॰शस् | Adverb of manner with distributive sense (see also 4.29:), e.g., | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
नित्यशस् | nitya·śas | “continually, always” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
विभागशस् | vibhāga·śas | “according to the division” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
विस्तरशस् | vistara·śas | “in detail” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
शतशस् | śata·śas | “by the hundreds” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
सहस्रशस् | sahasra·śas | “by the thousands” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
[···pg 72···] | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Inst. (cont.) | ॰स् | Forms multiplicative and other adverbs (see also 4.27:). | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
अधस् | adha̍·s | “below” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
अवस् | ava̍·s | “downwards” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
त्रिस् | tri̍·s | “three times” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
द्विस् | dvi̍·s | “twice” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰द्युस् dyu̍·s | in अन्येद्युस् anye·dyu̍·s | “next day” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Abl. | ॰तस् | Adverbs in ablative sense (including those bordering on inst., gen. and loc. senses) from pronouns, nouns, prep., e.g., | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
अग्रतस् | agra·ta̍s | “in front” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
अतस् | a̍·tas | “from this, hence” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
अभितस् | abhi̍·tas | “from both sides” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
इतस् | i·ta̍s | “from this, from here” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
उपायतस् | upāya·tas | “by (proper) means” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
गुणतस् | guṇa·tas | “according to disposition” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
त्वत्तस् | tvat·tas | “from you” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
पृष्ठतस् | pṛṣṭha·tas | “from behind, behind” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
सर्वतस् | sarva̍·tas | “from all sides, everywhere” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Abl. (cont.) | ॰तात् | (An old ablative of “that”) forms adverbs with ablative sense. | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
अधस्तात् | adha̍·s·tāt | “from below, below” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
परस्तात् | par·a̍s·tāt | “from above, beyond” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
पुरस्तात् | pur·a̍s·tāt | “in or from the front” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Loc. | ॰अस् | Adverbs of local or temporal sense. | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
तिरस् | tir·a̍s (Vedic, ex. 6.13:) | “across” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
मिथस् | mith·a̍s | “mutually, privately, in secret” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
परस् | par·a̍s (Vedic, ex. परस्तात्) | “far, beyond” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
पुरस् | pur·a̍s | “before” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
सद्यस् | sa·dy·a̍s | “today” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
श्वस् | śv·a̍s | “tomorrow” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
ह्यस् | hy·a̍s | “yesterday” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Loc. (cont.) | ॰त्र | Adverbs with local sense, mostly from pronominal stems, e.g., | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
अत्र | a̍·tra (Vedic, ex. 6.13:) | “here” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
अन्यत्र | anya̍·tra | “elsewhere” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
अमुत्र | amu̍·tra (Vedic, ex. परस्तात्) | “in that, in that (other world)” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
तत्र | ta̍·tra | “in that, there, then” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
यत्र | ya̍·tra | “in this” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
सर्वत्र | sarva̍·tra | “everywhere, at all times” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Loc. (cont.) | ॰दा (॰दानीम्, ॰दम्) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Adverbs of time, mostly from pronominal stems, e.g., | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
इदानीम् | i dā̍·nīm | “at this moment, now” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
कदा | ka·dā̍ | “when?” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
तदा ta·dā̍ or तदानीम् ta·dā̍·nīm | “at that time, then” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
यदा | ya·dā̍ | “at which time” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
विश्वदानीम् | viśva·dā̍·nīm | “always” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
सदा | sa̍·dā | “always” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
सर्वदा | sarva·dā̍ | “always” |
अङ्ग | aṅga̍ | “Just,” “only,” an expletive; an exhortative “please.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
अथ | a̍·tha | “Now,” often introducing something new at the beginning of a sentence, section, chapter or book, or introducing an immediate succession meaning “thereafter.” Can connect clauses in a sentence in sense of “and” or “if.” अथ वा “or else.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
अथो | a̍tho | “Then.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
अन्यञ्च | anyañ ca | “And besides.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
अपरम् | aparam | “Moreover.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
अपि | a̍pi | “And,” “also,” “even,” “only.” Connects (like च) parts of a sentence. Always follows the word to which it belongs. But at beginning of sentence is used as an interrogative particle. | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
अलम् | a̍lam | “Enough (with).” Used with instrumental, indeclinable participle or infinitive to express prohibition. | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
आहो | ā̍ho | “Or.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
इति | i̍ti | Used at the end of a direct or indirect quotation either spoken, or thought but not uttered – “thus” (= end quote). | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
इव | iva | Enclitic, following the word it modifies – “like, as if, almost.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
उ | u | “And”; किमु kim-u “how much less/more,” अथो atha-u “then,” नो na-u “not.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
उत | uta̍ | “And”; expletive at end of a line; प्रत्युत prati-uta “on the contrary,” किमुत kim-uta “how much more/less.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
एव | eva̍ | “Only,” “just,” “exactly,” a restrictive particle following the word to which it belongs, or sometimes merely for stress or to fill meter; constituent of तथैव tatha-eva “likewise,” नैव na-eva “not at all.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
एवम् | eva̍m | “Thus, so.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
कच्चिद् | ka̍c·cid | “I hope” (Vedic neut. of interrogative – ka-d + cid 2.45:). | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
कामम् | kāma·m | “At will,” “gladly”; or concessive particle “certainly,” “granted.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
किम् | ki̍·m | “How?” “why?”, or simply rendered as “?”; किञ्च kim-ca “moreover”; किन्तु kim-tu “but”; किमिति kim-iti, किमिव kim-iva “wherefore?”; किंवा kim-vā “perhaps?”; किंस्विद् kim-svid “why, pray?”; किमपि kim-api “very”; किमु kim u, किमुत kim-uta, किम्पुनः kim-punaḥ “how much less/more.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
किल | ki̍la | “Indeed,” following the word it emphasizes; stress only; “they say,” “we are told.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
कृतम् | kṛ·ta·m | “Have done with,” like अलम् is used with instrumental. | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
केवलम् | kevala·m | “Only.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
क्व | ku̍·a | “Where?”; expresses incompatibility if repeated with another question. | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
खलु | kha̍lu | “Indeed,” or simply stresses preceding word, “please,” with in. pt. “enough of.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
च | ca | Enclitic, “and,” placed after each connected word or phrase or placed only after the last in the list, with connected phrases it is more often placed after the first word of each phrase or only once with the last phrase; च…च “both…and.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
चेद् | ce̍d | “If,” never begins a sentence or pāda (like enclitic), unlike यदि; अथ चेद् “but if”; न चेद्, नो चेद् “if not, otherwise”; इति चेन्न iti ced na “if you say then no.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
जातु | jātu | “Ever, perhaps, once.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
[···pg 74···] | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
ततस् | ta̍·tas | “Then.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
तथा | ta̍·thā | “Thus,” “also,” “yes”; तथा च “similarly,” तथापि “nevertheless,” तथा हि “in that way indeed,” “so for instance”; तथेति tathā iti “yes.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
तद् | ta̍·d | (Neut. pronoun of “that” used as an adverb) “then,” “therefore.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
तावत् | tā̍·vat | “So long” (with correlative यावत्} “how long, till”); “in the first place,” “merely,” “at least,” “indeed” (concessively), “quite,” or simply add stress. An indeclinable form of the pronominal adjective given in 4.18:. | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
तु | tu̍ | Never begins a sentence or pāda (like enclitic), “but,” “whereas”; परन्तु “however.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
न | na̍ | “Not,” “no”; if repeated the double negative amounts to an emphatic positive; नापि na api “not even”; नैव na eva “not at all.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
ननु | na·nu̍ | “Not?” in questions expecting an affirmative answer; with interrogative pronouns and imperatives = “pray”; in argumentation = “is it not the case that?”, “it may be objected that.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
नाम | nā̍ma | “By name,” “indeed,” “perhaps”; with imperatives = “granted”; अपि नाम at beginning of a sentence with a potential = “perhaps”; ननु नाम “surely.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
नु | nu̍ | “Now”; नु…नु “either…or.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
नूनम् | nū·na̍·m | “Undoubtedly,” usually the first word in the sentence. | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
नो | na̍·u | “Not.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
परम् | pa̍ra·m | “Entirely,” “very,” “only”; “but.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
पुनर् | pu̍nar | “Again,” “on the other hand,” “but”; by itself or repeated “again and again.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
प्रायस् | prā̍y·as | “For the most part,” “generally,” “as a rule.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
प्रायशस् | prāya·śas | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
प्रायेण | prāyeṇa | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
बाढम् | bāḍha̍·m | “Certainly, very well, yes.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
मा | mā̍ | “Not”; with an unaugmented aorist or impf. as a prohibitive impv.; मा स्म “not.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
मुहुर् | mu̍h·ur | “Every moment,” “repeatedly” (often as मुहुर्मुहुः); “on the contrary.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
यतस् | ya̍·tas | “From which,” “because.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
यत्र | ya̍·tra | “Where,” “if,” “when,” “since.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
यथा | ya̍·thā | “As,” “like,” “in order that”; तद्यथा “thus for instance.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
यद् | ya̍·d | “That” introducing a direct assertion; “in order that,” “because,” “if.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
यदि | ya̍d·i | “If”; यदि वा “or rather,” “or”; यद्यपि “even if,” “although.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
यावत् | yā̍·vat | “While,” “as long as,” “as soon as” (with correlative तावत्); “meanwhile.” An indeclinable form of the pronominal adjective given in 4.18:. | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
येन | ye̍na | “In which manner,” “as” (with correlative तेन); “by which,” “because.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
वरम् न | vara·m na | “The better thing [is]…[and] not,” “better…than.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
वा | vā | Enclitic following the word to which it belongs. “Or”; sometimes “as it were” (=इव); वा…वा “either…or.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
वै | va̍i | Expletive. | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
सत्यम् | satya·m | “Truly, rightly, true, it is so.” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
ह | ha | Enclitic, a slight expletive. | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
हि | hi̍ | Never begins a sentence or pāda (like enclitic); conjunctive “because”; expletive “indeed,” often employed to avoid a hiatus or obtain a long vowel for meter. |
अयि | ayi | “Friend,” used with or replaces vocative. |
अये | aye | “Ah!”, = अयि. |
अरे | are | “Ho!”, exclamation of address. |
अहह | ahaha | Expressing joy, “ha!”, expressing sorrow “alas!” |
अहो | aho | Exclamation of any emotion – “oh!” |
आ | ā | “Ah!” |
आस् | ās | Expressing joy or indignation – “ah.” |
कष्टम् | kaṣṭa·m | “Woe!”, “alas!” |
दिष्ट्या | diṣṭyā | (Lit. “by good destiny”) “thank heaven!” |
धिक् | dhik | “Fie!”, “woe!” |
बत | bata | “Ah!”, “alas!” |
भोस् | bhos | “Sir!”, an address of any gender or number. |
साधु | sādhu̍ | “Well done!” |
स्वस्ति | sv·asti̍ | “Welcome!”, “hail!”, “farewell!” |
हन्त | ha̍nta | Exclamation of exhortation – “come,” “look”; expresses grief “alas!”, or joy “ah!”. |
हा | hā | “Ah!”, “alas!” |
हे | he | “O” generally before vocative. |
Nominal Stem Formation
6.22: Nominal stem formation. Declinable stems may consist of bare roots, but mostly (including some indeclinable stems) are formed by means of suffixes added to a root or stem. The suffix is primary (कृद्-अन्त) if it is added directly to roots (or to their derivative forms, and sometimes to their conjugational form), which may be strengthened or weakened as we have seen in the participial primary suffixes, or secondary (तद्-धित) if it is added to stems already formed with a suffix (even pronomial stems and some indeclinables), which stems may be strengthened usually on the first syllable. The distinction is not always clear. As mentioned before, we will just concern ourselves with the final form of the suffix. For example, ॰अ will be shown as a primary and a secondary suffix, yet the grammar of Pāṇini will have about 17 different suffixes for the final form ॰अ. This is because roots and stems before अ undergo a wide variety of (17 or more) modifications, variations in meaning, variation in accent, and so on. The suffixes here are only the still visible forms of the suffixes after they have been joined to roots or stems, not the multiple suffixes found in the grammar of Pāṇini.
Only a few suffixes govern definite modifications and meanings – these are mostly the suffixes forming participles, etc. that we have already seen, a few primary suffixes that make agent nouns and adjectives, and several of the secondary suffixes. Often, after a grammarian shows the root and suffix, just how the actual meaning of the word is derived from either remains quite in doubt, especially to the beginner. The final form and meaning of any word in संस्कृत is derived from how it is spoken and employed in the literature, i.e., its conventional usage, not solely because of grammar rules, i.e., its etymological form and meaning. Grammar is descriptive of language; it only appears prescriptive for beginners. With this in mind we will present just the general modifications a root or stem may undergo and the general shades of meaning it may assume, when joined with the more common of these suffixes. For example, in presenting the meanings of the primary suffixes, there are three possible applications of the root action.
Overview. Some primary suffixes display one (usually the agent sense is ever the only sense of a suffix) or two, or sometimes all three of these senses when joined with different roots and the resulting words used in different literary contexts. Exceptions to the below generalizations will abound.
6.23: Overview of a few common suffixes. Those in bold have just the one sense, in red have two senses, in blue have three (or more) senses. These counts for primary suffix senses are separate from the secondary suffix counts.Primary Suffixes: |
Form concrete agent/instrument nouns used as adjectives or substantives, e.g., |
अ अन् अन अस् इ इन् इस् उ उन उस् ऊ ति तु तृ त्र त्रा न ना नि नु म मन् मि मी यु र रु व वन् |
Form abstract or concrete action nouns, e.g., |
अ अन अस् इस् इ उन उस् ति तु थ था न ना नि नु म मन् मि मी यु |
Form concrete object nouns used as adjectives or substantives, e.g., |
अ अन उ ऊ ति तु न ना नि नु म मि मी यु |
Secondary Suffixes: |
Mean related or connected to, e.g., |
अ य |
Mean modification or part of, e.g., |
मय |
Mean possessing, e.g., |
इन् मत् मय वत् वन् विन् |
Mean comparative or superlative, e.g., |
तम तर म र |
Mean diminutive, e.g., |
क ल |
Form patronymic, e.g., |
आयन इ य |
Form abstract substantive, e.g., |
ता त्व य |
Form an adverb, e.g., |
अस् तस् तात् त्र त्रा था दा धा व वत् शस् स् |
Form an adjective, e.g., |
ईन ईय क तन त्य थ म य र ल |
Form a noun, e.g., |
त्य भ |
Form the feminine, e.g., |
आ आनी ई |
Positive | Comparative | Superlative | ||
(or Root) | (“-er, more”) | (“-est, most”) | ||
Primary suffix | ॰(ई)यस् | ॰इष्ठ | ||
अणु “subtle” | अणीयस् | a̍ṇ·ī·yas | अणिष्ठ | a̍ṇ·iṣṭha |
(or √अण् “breathe”) | “subtler, smaller” | “subtlest, smallest” | ||
गुरु “honorable” | गरीयस् | ga̍r·ī·yas | गरिष्ठ | ga̍r·iṣṭha |
(or √गॄ “invoke”) | “greater” | “greatest” | ||
बहुल “abundant” | बंहीयस् | ba̍ṃh·ī·yas | बंहिष्ठ | ba̍ṃh·iṣṭha |
(or √बंह् “increase”) | “more abundant” | “most abundant” | ||
वृद्ध “old” | ज्यायस् | jyā̍·yas | ज्येष्ठ | jyā̍·iṣṭha |
(or √ज्या “overpower”) | “elder, superior” | “most superior” | ||
प्रिय “pleasant” | प्रेयस् | pre̍·yas | प्रेष्ठ | pre̍·[i]ṣṭha |
(or √प्री “please”) | “more pleasing” | “most pleasing” | ||
वृद्ध “old” | वर्षीयस् | va̍rṣ·ī·yas | वर्षिष्ठ | va̍rṣ·iṣṭha |
(or √वृष् Ā. “be virile”) | “older” | “oldest” | ||
प्रशस्य “praiseworthy” | श्रेयस् | śre̍·yas | श्रेष्ठ | śre̍·[i]ṣṭha |
(or √श्रि “seek”) | “better” | “best” | ||
Secondary suffix | ॰तर | ॰तम | ||
शुचि “bright” | शुचितर | śuci·tara | शुचितम | śuci·tama |
“brighter” | “brightest” | |||
प्राच् “forward” | प्राक्तर | prāk·tara | प्राक्तम | prāk·tama |
“more forward” | “most forward” |
The participial suffixes we have already seen (6.4:–.10:); also the degrees of comparison (6.25:) | |
॰अत् | Pr. and Fut. Participles (active). |
॰वस् | Redup. Perf. Participle (active). |
॰मान | Pr. and Fut. Mid. Participles, Pr. Ps. Participle. |
॰आन | Pr. (2nd conj.) Participles and (Vedic) Perf. Mid. Participle. |
॰न ॰इत ॰त | Past Participle (passive). |
॰वत् | Past Active Participle – actually (इ)त·वत्. |
॰य ॰(इ)तव्य ॰अनीय | Pot. Ps. Participle. |
॰(इ)त्वा ॰य ॰त्य ॰अम् | Indeclinable Participle. |
॰(इ)तुम् | Infinitive. |
॰(ई)यस्/॰इष्ठ | Comparative/superlative. |
Now, several more primary suffixes: | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰अ | Agent/Object adj. and m. subst.; Action nouns, e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰कार | kār·a | m. “doer, doing” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
सर्ग | sa̍rg·a | m. “manifestation” (lit. “what is emitted”) | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
प्रिय | priy·a̍ | a. “pleasing” (2.67:) | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰अन् | Agent m. nouns and a few defective n. stems, e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
राजन् | rā̍j·an | m. “king” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
अहन् | ah·an | n. “day” (3.21: and cf. 3.34:) | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰अन | Action/Agent/Object n. nouns, e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
दर्शन | da̍rś·ana | n. “seeing, eye, sight” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
अयन | a̍y·ana | n. “going, course, goal” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰अस् ॰इस् ॰उस् | Action/Agent n. nouns (अस् m. only as person’s name), e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
वचस् | va̍c·as | n. “speech” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
ज्योतिस् | jyo̍t·is | n. “light” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
धनुस् | dha̍n·us | n. “bow” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰इ | Action f. nouns; Agent adj. and nouns, and a few n., e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
द्युति | dyut·i | f. “brilliance” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
महि | ma̍h·i | a. “great” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
पाणि | pāṇ·i̍ | m. “hand” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
अक्षि | a̍kṣ·i | n. “eye” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰इन् | Agent adj. and m. nouns; also (usually when root lacks a prefix) “having the habit of…,” e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
संयमिन् | saṃyam·in | a. “who excercises authority” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
सेविन् | sev·in | a. “who has the habit of serving” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰उ | Agent/Object adj. and m. nouns, a few f. and n., e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
तनु | tan·u̍ | a. “thin” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
बाहु | bāh·u̍ | m. “arm” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
इषु | i̍ṣ·u | f. “arrow” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰उन | Action/Agent adj. and m. or n. nouns, e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
धरुण | dhar·u̍ṇa | a. “supporting,” m. “supporter,” n. “support” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰ऊ | Agent/Object fem. of ॰उ above, and a few other f. nouns, e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
तनू | tan·ū̍ | f. “body” (grammatically fem., i.e., made of mother nature) | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
चमू | cam·ū̍ | f. “army” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰ति | Action f. nouns; Agent/Object nouns, e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
जाति | jā·ti | f. “birth” (जा is a conjugational form of √जन् 5.16.4:) | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
श्रुति | śru̍·ti | f. “listening, teaching, ear” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰तु | Besides the Infinitive ॰तुम्; a few Agent/Object/Action m. and n. subst., e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
हेतु | he·tu̍ | m. “cause” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
ऋतु | ṛ·tu̍ | m. “season” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰तृ | Agent adj. and m. nouns; names of relationships m. and f., e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
कर्तृ | kar·tṛ̍ | m. “doer” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
मातृ | mā·tṛ̍ | f. “mother” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰त्र ॰त्रा | Expresses the Instrument of means, e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
मन्त्र | ma̍n·tra | m. “sacred verse” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
मात्रा | mā̍·trā | f. “measure” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
[···pg 79···] | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰थ ॰था | Action nouns of all genders, often with concrete sense, e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
अर्थ | a̍r·tha | m. “goal” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
गाथा | gā̍·thā | f. “song” (गा is a conjugational form of √गै 5.8.8:) | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰न ॰ना | Besides past participle; Action/Agent/Object adj. and subst., e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
कृष्ण | kṛṣ·ṇa̍ | a. “dark”; m. “Lord Kṛṣṇa” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
वर्ण | va̍r·ṇa | m. “color” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
तृष्णा | tṛ̍ṣ·ṇā | f. “thirst” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰नि | Action/Agent/Object m. and f. nouns, e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
वह्नि | va̍h·ni | m. “fire” (lit. “conveyer”) | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
हानि | hā̍·ni | f. “abandonment” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰नु | Action/Agent/Object m. and f. nouns, e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
भानु | bhā·nu̍ | m. “light” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
धेनु | dhe·nu̍ | f. “cow” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰म | Action m. nouns; Agent/Object m. adj. and subst., e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
धर्म | dha̍r·ma | m. “tradition” (lit. “that which supports”) | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
पद्म | pad·ma | m. “lotus” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰मन् | Action n., some m., nouns; a few Agent m. nouns with accent on the suffix, e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
कर्मन् | ka̍r·man | n. “action” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
आत्मन् | āt·ma̍n | m. “self” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
ब्रह्मन् | bra̍h·man | n. “Veda,” “reality”; brah-ma̍n m. “priest,” “Lord Brahmā” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰मि ॰मी | Action/Agent/Object m. and f. nouns, e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
रश्मि | raś·mi̍ | m. “ray” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
भूमि | bhū̍·mi | (or भूमी bhū-mī f.) “earth” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰यु | Action/Agent/Object m. nouns, e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
मृत्यु | mṛ·ta·yu̍ | m. “death” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰र | Agent adj. and a few subst., e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
उग्र | ug·ra̍ | a. “terrible” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
इन्द्र | i̍nd·ra | m. “Lord Indra” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰रु | Agent adj. and n. subst., e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
भीरु | bhī·ru̍ | a. “timid” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
अश्रु | a̍ś·ru | n. “tear drop” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰व | Agent adj. and m. subst., e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
सर्व | sa̍r·va | a. “all” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
अश्व | a̍ś·va | m. “horse” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰वन् | Agent adj. and subst., e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
पीवन् | pī̍·van | a. “fat” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
यज्वन् | ya̍j·van | m. “worshipper” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
a. | A त् is sometimes added after a short final vowel before following य् or व्, cf. 6.9: ॰त्य and also 6.24:. |
The adverbial suffixes we have already seen (6.19:); as well as the degrees of comparison suffixes (6.25:) | |
॰था ॰थ ॰भम्, ॰धा ॰ध ॰ह, ॰व ॰वम्, ॰वत्, ॰शस्, ॰स् | Instrumental sense. |
॰तस्, ॰तात् | Ablative sense. |
॰अस्, ॰त्र, ॰दा ॰दानीम् ॰दम् | Locative sense. |
॰तर/॰तम | Comparitive/superlative. |
Now, several more secondary suffixes: | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰अ | Forms adj. mostly with initial वृद्धि expressing relation or connection, many of these become m. subst. and n. abstracts. Adj. take ई in fem., e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
राजस | rājas·a | a. “predominately of the रजस् mental disposition” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
औषध | auṣadh[i]a·a | n. “food” (lit. “made from a plant ओषधि”) | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰आ | Forms fem. of adjectives, whose m. n. stem end in अ, e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
स्वा | sv[a]·ā | f. “one’s own” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰आनी | Forms fem. of names of deities ending in अ, e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
इन्द्राणी | indr[a]·āṇī̍ | f. “wife of Lord इन्द्र” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰आयन | Forms masc. patronymics with initial वृद्धि, e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
आश्वलायन | āśval[a]·āyana | m. “descendent of अश्वल” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰इ | Forms masc. patronymics with initial वृद्धि, e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
सौसदत्ति | sauma·datt[a]·i | m. “son of सोमदत्त” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰इन् | Forms adj. in sense of “possessing” from subst. ending in अ (cf. मत् below), e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
त्यादिन् | tyāg[a]·in | a. “renouncing” (त्याग m. “renunciation”) | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰ई | Forms fem. of m. stems (adj. or noun) ending in cons., तृ, उ, and sometimes अ (always when m. stem is formed with initial वृद्धि), e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
योगिनी | yog[a]·in·ī | f. “a woman who follows a dedicated life of योग” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
पृथ्वी | pṛthv·ī | f. “earth” (पृथु a. “broad”) | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
राजसी | rājas[a]·ī | f. adj. “predominately of the रजस् mental disposition” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰ईन | Forms adj. chiefly expressive of direction, and from stems in अच् (3.24:), e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
प्राचीन | prāc·ī̍na | a. “eastern” (प्राच् a. “eastward”) | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰क | Forms adj. and diminutives; added to adj. and nouns often without changing meaning (in this sense also are accounted the pri. suff. ॰अक ॰उक and sec. suff. ॰अक ॰इक in the grammar of Pāṇini, see also 6.39:); fem. derivatives often in ॰इका, e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
अधिक | adhi·ka | a. “better” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
अहैतुक | a·haitu·ka | a. “illogical” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
नायक | nāy·a·ka | m. “leader” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
पुत्रक | putra·ka | m. “little son”; पुत्रिका putr[a]·ikā f. “little daughter” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰तन | Forms adj. with temporal meaning, e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
पुरातन | purā·tana | a. “ancient” (lit. “continuing as before”) | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰तम | Besides superlatives; forms ordinals (4.26:), e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
शततम | śata·tama̍ | a. “hundredth” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰ता ॰त्व | Forms abstract subst. in the sense of “-ness”, ॰ता being grammatically fem., ॰त्व being neut., e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
देवता | deva̍·tā | f. “deity” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
अमृतत्व | a·mṛta·tva̍ | n. “immortality” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰त्य | Forms adj. and m. or n. nouns from prepositions and adverbs, e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
नित्य | ni̍·tya | a. “eternal” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
अपत्य | a̍pa·tya | n. “offspring” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰थ | Besides adverbs; forms some ordinals from cardinals (4.26:), e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
चतुर्थ | catur·tha̍ | a. “fourth” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰भ | Forms the m. names of some animals, e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
ऋषभ | ṛṣa·bha̍ | m. “bull,” in cmpd. –॰ “prominent among…” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
[···pg 81···] | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰म | Forms some superlatives mostly from prepositions (cf. ॰र below); and some ordinals (4.26:), e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
अवम | ava·ma̍ | a. “lowest” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
अधम | adha·ma | a. “lowest” (अधस् in. “below”) | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
पञ्चम | pañc[n]b·ma̍ | a. “fifth” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰मत् | Forms adj. in sense of “possessing” from subst. not ending in अ (cf. इन् above), e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
दीप्तिमत् | dīpti·mat | a. “possessing brilliance, brilliant” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰मय ॰मयी | Forms adj. in senses of “preceding from, preponderance of, consisting of”, e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
तेजोमय | tejo·maya | a. “mostly of brilliance, brilliant” (तेजस् n. “brilliance”) | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰य | Orig. in many cases “ia,” forms adj. in the sense of “relating to,” m. patronymics, n. abstracts – all with वृद्धि; and ordinary adj. without वृद्धि; (in these senses also are accounted the sec. suff. ॰इय ॰ईय ॰एय in the grammar of Pāṇini), e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
ऐश्वर्य | aiśvar[a]·ya | a. “relating to the Lord” (ईश्वर m. “Lord”) | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
कार्पण्य | kārpaṇ[a]·ya | n. “miserliness” (कृपण m. “miser”) | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
मुख्य | mu̍kh[a]·ya | a. “foremost” (मुख n. “face”) | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
इन्द्रिय | indr[a]·i·ya̍ | a. “belonging to Lord Indra”; n. “a sense organ” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰अर्थीय | ar·th[a]·ī·ya | a. in cmpd. –॰ “intended for” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
अस्मदीय | asmad·ī·ya | a. “our” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
कौन्तेय | kaunt[ī]·e·ya | m. “son of कुन्ती” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰र | Forms some comparatives from prepositions (cf. ॰म above); and forms adj., e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
अवर | a̍va·ra | a. “lower” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
धीर | dhī̍·ra | a. “discerning” (धी f. “thought”) | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰ल | Forms adj. (sometimes interchangeable with र above); and a few m. diminutives, e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
मधुल | madhu·la̍ | (and मधुर madhu·ra) a. “sweet” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
बहुल | bahu·la̍ | a. “abundant” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
वृषल | vṛṣa·la̍ | m. “little man” (वृष m. “[potent] male”) | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰वत् | Besides adverbial sense of “like” (6.19:); forms adj. in sense of “possessing,” e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
ज्ञानवत् | jñāna·vat | a. “having knowledge” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰वन् | Forms adj. and subst. in the sense of “possessing,” e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
मघवन् | magha̍·van | a. “bountiful,” m. an epithet for Lord इन्द्र | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
॰विन् | Forms adj. in the sense of “possessing,” e.g., | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
तपस्विन् | tapas·vi̍n | a. “who has/does prayerful discipline” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
a. | Before secondary suffixes beginning with a vowel or य् (equivalent to इ), final अ/आ इ/ई of stem are regularly dropped and final उ/ऊ of stem usually takes guṇa becoming अव् (2.71:). |
b. | Before secondary suffixes, final न् of stem is treated variously: retained, dropped, dropped along with preceding अ, or retained with preceding अ dropped. |
c. | Occassionally either of the above two rules (a. & b.) may also occur with some primary suffixes. |
Generally, the stems with primary or secondary suffixes ending in: | |
आ ई ऊ | Feminine |
अ त् न् स् (i.e., any cons., ex. root finals) | Masculine or Neuter |
इ उ | Any gender |
Nominal Compounds
6.29: Nominal Compounds. Two or more words can combine into a single word called a compound (समास), lit. “thrown together.” In a समास all the members generally, except the last, show their uninflected stem (some Vedic compounds retain their prior member’s inflection). The stem normally is as before the pāda terminations (भ्याम्, etc. 3.2.a:), i.e., either the weak or the middle. Additionally, in a sentence, adjectives as 1st member in compound do not take on a feminine suffix (॰आ ॰ई). Only the final member, as an adjective or as an adjectival compound final, would take on a feminine suffix. Between the members in a compound, with a few Vedic exceptions, general sandhi rules apply (2.4:). Some words as 1st or last member of a cmpd. take on a special meaning or form – experience and a dictionary are helpful. For example, sometimes at the end of a compound a stem final न् will drop, an इ or उ will change to अ, or an अ will be added to the end of some consonant ending finals, a final ऊ (→उव) or diphthong (→अव, etc.).
The संस्कृत analysis of the meaning of a समास is called a विग्रह-वाक्य. This analysis will break out each member of the compound separately showing its inflected form (or, in commentaries, shows the nominative form of the member with a well known synonym or an explanation followed by a demonstrative pronoun that restates that member in the appropriate case and number), and the order of the breakout of the individual members is generally from left to right, as it is in keeping with संस्कृत prose order (7.2:). The analysis usually proceeds by relating two members of the समास at a time, then taking that pair and relating it to a third member, and so on. For English speakers just starting to learn संस्कृत, since संस्कृत prose order is still new to him or her, it is often helpful to initially start at the back of the compound and work through the pairs from right to left, as this generally yields the resulting English prose order of the most common form of समास, called तत्पुरुष-समास. The final member also has the case termination for the whole compound which helps place its meaning within the context of the sentence.
Depending on the relationship between these member pairs, समास-s have been categorized by grammarians into three main types and several sub-types, with a forth type distinguished by how the whole समास is employed in a sentence. Several of the names for these समास-s given by grammarians are in fact examples of the समास being categorized. Within a single compound made up of three or more members, different compound types of pair-relationships may be exhibited; the whole compound, however, is categorized by the compound type of its last member pair, i.e., normally the last word or self-contained compound word with the rest of the compound. Often which type of compounding is being employed cannot be determined apart from the context within a sentence. The isolated examples given here assume the most obvious relationship for the pairing.
Mostly because in compounding there is loss of inflection and therefore loss of important syntactical information, which then has to be easily filled in by the listener, compounding is not freely allowed between just any two words in any order in a sentence. There is a pattern of which words and how the words can be joined in the literature, so the grammarians have set down specific rules for forming each of the types of compounds, and even for forming compounds with specific words. Again, since we are here concerned with reading skills, only those compositional rules for compounds which assist recognizing the समास-s or assist in understanding their meanings, are given.
6.30: Types of समास based on 1st & 2nd members’ relationship.तत्पुरुष – One qualifies the other, and final noun usually determines gender. |
विभक्ति-तत्पुरुष – 1st is in oblique case relationship with 2nd. |
नञ्-तत्पुरुष (often pronounced “nañj-tatpuruṣa”) – Negative as 1st member. |
कर्मधारय – Both are in apposition (=समानाधिकरण “reference the same object”). |
द्विगु – Numeral as 1st and cmpd. is not used in naming something. |
प्रादि – Preposition as 1st, noun or non-verbal adj. is 2nd. |
गति – Verbal indeclinable as 2nd. |
उपपद – Stem formation of 2nd depends on the 1st. |
बहुव्रीहि – Substantive तत्पुरुष employed as an adjective in a sentence. |
द्वन्द्व – List of nouns that could be separated with च “and”, sometimes वा “or”. |
अव्ययीभाव – Indeclinable 1st and the pair treated “like-an-indeclinable”. |
1. 1st member retains its accent (the 2nd member’s accent drops), especially: |
a. Most बहुव्रीहि. |
b. तत्पुरुष – |
– with past participle in ॰(इ)त or ॰न as 2nd member adjective. |
– beginning with negative अ॰ or अन्॰, which is accented. |
2. 2nd member retains its accent, especially: |
a. Cmpds. with verbal noun or adj. as 2nd member. |
b. Cmpds. beginning with द्वि॰ त्रि॰ or सु॰ दुस्॰. |
3. Final syllable of cmpd. takes accent for: |
a. Most द्वन्द्व. |
b. तत्पुरुष with noun as 2nd member. |
c. बहुव्रीहि beginning with negative अ॰ or अन्॰. |
4. Cmpd. exceptionally and sporadically take an altered accent from that of one of its members. |
5. Both members retain their own accent, usually 1st member also retains its case term. (e.g., 6.40: Vedic द्वन्द्व-s). |
There are six sub-types for the six oblique cases (2nd through 7th). Sometimes the 1st member retains its case term., e.g., परस्मैपद parasmai-pada “word for another.” At the end of a cmpd. ॰अर्थ m. “goal” often in the acc. (sometimes in dat. or loc.) is employed adverbially meaning “for the sake of, on account of,” e.g., अनुकम्पार्थम् “out of compassion.” In these examples the cmpd. is given and then converted (→) into its analysis (विग्रह-वाक्य), a phrase that expresses the meaning of the cmpd. | |
2nd | The 2nd member is often an adj. of a verbal nature, like a participle, e.g., गुणातीतः → गुणान् अतीतः “transcending the constituents of the universe (गुणान्).” |
3rd | मासपूर्वः → मासेन पूर्वः “earlier by a month (मासेन).” |
4th | पादोदकम् → पादाभ्याम् उदकम् “water for the feet (पादाभ्याम्).” |
5th | उभयविब्रष्टः → उभाभ्यां विभ्रष्टः “fallen from both (उभाभ्यां).” |
6th | By far the most common type. तत्पुरुषः → तस्य पुरुषः “his (तस्य) man.” |
7th | मनोगतः → मनसि गतः “arisen in the mind (मनसि).” |
The 1st member is the negative particle अ before consonants or अन् before vowels, and rarely न, e.g., |
अशोच्यः → न शोच्यः “(what is) not to be grieved.” |
Here the 1st member is descriptive of, or in apposition to, the 2nd member. The type of analysis can vary if the 1st member is an adjective or a noun: | |
1st member is an adjective, even with adverbial meaning; rarely, the order of the members is reversed | |
उत्तरायणम् → उत्तरं च तदयणं च “northern course (अयणम्).” (both words in समानाधिकरण्/same case). | |
श्वेतरक्तम् → श्वेतं च तद्रक्तं च “white and (it is) red (रक्तम्),” both members are adj. describing same object. | |
Two past participles in cmpd. express consecutive actions: | |
सुप्तोत्थितः → पूर्वं सुप्तः पश्चादुत्थितः “(first) asleep (then) awakened (उत्थितः).” | |
अन्योन्य and परस्पर both adj. meaning “one another” are irregular in that the 1st member (अन्यस्, परस्) is a frozen masc. nom. so that the cmpd. in fem. would still be अन्योन्या. | |
महत् “great” as 1st member becomes महा, e.g., महाशङ्खः “huge conch.” | |
At the end of a cmpd.: | |
राजन् “king,” अहन् “day” become राज, अह, resp.; | |
सखि “friend,” रात्रि f. “night” become सख, रात्र n., resp. | |
1st member is a noun: | |
राजर्षि → राजा च स ऋषिश्च “royal sage (ऋषिः),” lit. “He is a king and a sage.” | |
In naming | विन्द्यगिरिः → विन्ध्यः इति गिरिः “Vindhya mountain range.” |
In restricting | कर्मबन्धः → कर्म एव बन्धः “bondage which is but कर्म.” |
In comparisons | जलदस्याम adj. → जलदः इव श्याम “dark as a cloud (जलदः).” (2nd member is adj.) When 2nd member is also a noun, the उपमेय (the thing compared) is put before the उपमान (the comparison), e.g., ज्ञानदीपः → दीपः इव ज्ञानम् “knowledge which is like a lamp (दीपः).” |
Quasi-adjectival | राजविद्या → विद्यानां राजन् “kingly knowledge” or “king of (all) knowledge.” |
Assumed middle | शाकपार्थिवः → शाकप्रियः पार्थिवः “a king (पार्थिवः) (liking/प्रियः) vegetables (शाकानि),”where there is an assumed word, here प्रियः, to connect the 1st & 2nd member. This dropping of the middle word is called मध्यम-पद-लोप (“middle-word-dropping”). |
द्विगु, lit. “two-cow(s),” is a sub-type of कर्मधारय-समाद where the 1st member is a numeral and the cmpd. is not used in naming (which then restricts it to a कर्मधारय above). They are generally neuters or feminines in ई expressing well known aggregates (समाहार-s) and therefore are singular. Hence they are exceptions to the general rule that the final noun of a तत्पुरुष-समास determines the gender of the compound, e.g., |
त्रिलोकम् → त्रयाणां लोकानां समाहारः “[All] the three worlds (लोकाः m.).” |
Where a preposition or an indeclinable कु, दुस्, निस् or सु is the 1st member and the 2nd member is a noun or non-verbal adjective (e.g., प्रतिकृत, since कृत is a pp. adj. from √कृ, is not a प्रादि). When analyzed the preposition is replaced with an appropriate adverb or adjective and the noun may be in any of the cases. When the 2nd member noun is analyzed in one of the oblique cases to the adjective replacing the preposition, then the cmpd. naturally becomes an adjective. Some of these adjectival compounds are thus considered to be बहुव्रीहि-s (6.39:) by grammarians for technical reasons, nevertheless the classification of these compounds is trivial for our purposes since the adjectival meanings of these compounds, no matter which classification, are obviously identical. | |||||
Many of the compounded prepositions have gained specific meanings within प्रादि-समास-s, in addition to their normal meanings. | |||||
अति | “excess” | परि | “excess” | ||
अधि | “superiority, primary” | प्रति | “opposition” | ||
अभि | “intensive” | वि | “variation, absence” | ||
आ | “somewhat or up to” | सम् | “completeness” | ||
उप | “accessory or secondary” | ||||
प्राचार्यः | m. | → प्रगतः आचार्यः “eminent teacher (आचार्यः).” | |||
विगुणः | a. | → गुणेन रहित “without virtue (गुणेन).” | |||
पर्यध्ययनः | a. | → अध्ययनाय परिग्लानः “too tired to study (अध्ययनाय).” |
अलंकृत्य | “adorning” |
अस्तंगत्य | “setting” |
शुक्लीकृत्य | “turning white” |
योगस्थः | → योगे तिष्ठति इति | “one who is steadfast in योग.” |
कर्मजः | → कर्मभ्यः जातः | “arising from actions.” |
विभक्ति-तत्पुरुष-s used as a बहुव्रीहि are usually of 6th or 7th case, and sometimes the word order is reversed (i.e., 2nd member is in case relationship to the 1st member, cf. 6.30:). |
दीप्तानलार्कद्युतिः → दीप्तालार्कौ तयोः इव यस्य सः “whose (यस्य सः) brilliance (द्युतिः f. nom.) is (like that) of a blazing fire or the sun.” |
शस्त्रपाणिः → शस्त्रं पाणौ यस्य सः “having (यस्य सः) a sword (neut. nom.) in hand (पाणौ 3.29:).” |
नञ्-तत्पुरुष-s used as a बहुव्रीहि |
अनन्तः → न अस्ति अन्तः यस्य सः “having no end (अन्तः).” |
कर्मधारय-s are very commonly used as a बहुव्रीहि. |
गतासुः → गताः असवः (प्राणाः) यस्मात् सः “from whom (यस्मात् सः) life-breaths (असु-s) are gone.” |
कृतनिश्चयः → कृतः निश्चयः येन सः “by whom (यस्य सः) a resolve (निश्चयः) is formed.” |
प्रादि-s used as a बहुव्रीहि. |
विरागः → विगतः रागः यस्मात् सः “from whom (यस्मात् सः) requiring (रागः ) is gone.” |
Some compounds by their own structure and meaning can only be बहुव्रीहि. |
सयज्ञः → यज्ञेन सह यः वर्तते सः “who is (यः सः) with ritual (यज्ञेन),” i.e., “whose duty it is to do ritual.” |
Peculiarities of the बहुव्रीहि. |
A बहुव्रीहि adjective may come to be used as a substantive or a proper name, e.g., |
सुहृद् su-hṛd “good-hearted” becomes m. subst. “friend.” |
धृतराष्ट्र dṛta-rāṣṭra “by whom the kingdom is seized” becomes the name of a person. |
A बहुव्रीहि with past participle 1st member is often used like an in. pt. or a loc. absolute (7.14.1:), e.g., |
त्यक्तनगरः lit. “having the city left” can mean: |
नगरं त्यक्त्वा “having left the city (the person…),” or |
नगरे त्यक्ते “the city being left (thereafter…).” |
A बहुव्रीहि with a कर्मधारय of nouns in comparison reverses the order of the उपमेय – उपमान (6.34:), e.g., |
कमलपात्राक्षः “whose two eyes (अक्ष-s) are (like) lotus petals (कमल-पत्र-s).” The कर्मधारय would be अक्ष-कमलपत्रौ “eyes (like) lotus petals”; the बहुव्रीहि reverses the member order “(like) having lotus petal eyes.” |
At the end of a बहुव्रीहि. |
The words कल्प “manner,” प्राय “chief part” mean “like”, “almost” resp., e.g., |
अमृतकल्प a. “ambrosia-like”; समाप्तप्राय a. “mostly finished.” |
The words पर or परम adj. “highest” used as subst. “the chief thing” mean “engrossed in,” e.g., |
स्वर्गपर a. “engrossed in (getting into) heaven,” lit. “having heaven as the ultimate.” |
The word मात्रा f. “measure” is used in the sense of “only,” e.g., |
निमित्तमात्र a. “as merely an instrument.” |
The words आदि n. and प्रभृति f. “beginning” mean “and the rest” or “etcetera,” e.g., |
शब्दादयः a. pl. “(sense elements starting with) sound, etc.”; इत्यादि iti-ādi a. “…etc.” |
The possessive suffixes ॰इन् and ॰(इ)क are sometimes redundantly added to the end of a बहुव्रीहि for clarity of meaning or for meter, the later suffix is added especially to unusual finals not easily taking different gender or number as an adjective, e.g., |
अतपस्क a. a-tapas-ka̍ “who has no prayerful discipline.” |
When expressive of individuals, it takes the number of the sum of its members, du. or pl., and gender of the last member, e.g., |
सिद्ध्यसिद्धी du. → सिद्धिश्च असिद्धिश्च “success and failure,” “success or failure.” |
When expressive of an aggregate of which some or all members are listed or described, it takes singular neuter, e.g., |
पुत्रपौत्रम् → पुत्राश्च पौत्राश्च “children and grandchildren,” i.e., “(all) offspring.” |
Vedic द्वन्द्व-s retained in later literature may consist of names of deities where the 1st member is a frozen nom. dual and separately accented, e.g., |
द्यावापृथिव्यौ dyā̍vā-pṛthivyau̍ du. nom./voc./acc. → द्यौश्च पृथिवी च “Heaven (द्यावा Vedic du.) and Earth.” |
द्यावापृथिव्योः du. gen./loc. → द्यौश्च पृथिवी च तयोः “of Heaven (usually remaining du. nom.) and Earth.” |
इन्द्रावरुणौ du. nom./voc./acc. → इन्द्रश्च वरुणश्च “Lord इन्द्र (॰आ is Vedic du. nom./voc./acc. terms.) and Lord वरुण.” |
मातृ “mother” and पितृ “father” as 1st member of relationship द्वन्द्व assume sg. nom. form, e.g., |
पितापुत्रौ → पिता च पुत्रश्च “father and son.” |
The masc. of relation pair may be used in dual to include the female, e.g., |
पितरौ “parents,” भ्रातरौ “brother (भ्रातृ) and sister” – these forms are analyzed like द्वन्द्व-समास-s. |
When expressive of individuals, it takes the number of the sum of its members, du. or pl., and gender of the last member, e.g., |
सिद्ध्यसिद्धी du. → सिद्धिश्च असिद्धिश्च “success and failure,” “success or failure.” |
When expressive of an aggregate of which some or all members are listed or described, it takes singular neuter, e.g., |
पुत्रपौत्रम् → पुत्राश्च पौत्राश्च “children and grandchildren,” i.e., “(all) offspring.” |
Vedic द्वन्द्व-s retained in later literature may consist of names of deities where the 1st member is a frozen nom. dual and separately accented, e.g., |
द्यावापृथिव्यौ dyā̍vā-pṛthivyau̍ du. nom./voc./acc. → द्यौश्च पृथिवी च “Heaven (द्यावा Vedic du.) and Earth.” |
द्यावापृथिव्योः du. gen./loc. → द्यौश्च पृथिवी च तयोः “of Heaven (usually remaining du. nom.) and Earth.” |
इन्द्रावरुणौ du. nom./voc./acc. → इन्द्रश्च वरुणश्च “Lord इन्द्र (॰आ is Vedic du. nom./voc./acc. terms.) and Lord वरुण.” |
मातृ “mother” and पितृ “father” as 1st member of relationship द्वन्द्व assume sg. nom. form, e.g., |
पितापुत्रौ → पिता च पुत्रश्च “father and son.” |
The masc. of relation pair may be used in dual to include the female, e.g., |
पितरौ “parents,” भ्रातरौ “brother (भ्रातृ) and sister” – these forms are analyzed like द्वन्द्व-समास-s. |
Where the 1st member is usually an indeclinable (अव्यय), the 2nd member is a noun, and the cmpd. is in the neuter sg. nom. and treated “like an indeclinable” (अव्ययीभाव 6.14:), e.g., | |||
अधिहरि | adhi-hari | “in Lord Hari” | |
अन्तर्गिरि | antar-giri | “in a mountain” | |
उपकृष्णम् | upa-kṛṣṇam | “near Lord Kṛṣṇa” | |
निर्जनम् | nir-janam | “without people,” i.e., “in a quiet place” | |
यावज्जीवम् | yāvaj-jīvam (2.45:) | “while alive” |
Go to Top ('Home' key on many Windows browsers)
7.1: Forming words into sentences. Due in large part to the medium of oral transmission and the importance placed on memorizing texts, the संस्कृत literature is often in verse form. This brings the charm to the language, as well as the challenge to the student of the language. As much of the syntax is built into the sense of the inflections of the words themselves, a comparatively great freedom is allowed the author to arrange the order of the words to best fit the harmony of the sounds and meter of a verse. Additionally, there is a rich store of vocabulary and technical expressions—developed over thousands of years and addressed to a very savvy audience able to understand the author’s nuances and allusions. So understanding these texts requires a methodical approach, of which not just vocabulary but also syntax plays a crucial role.
7.2: संस्कृत अन्वयTo properly understand a verse, the student should reorder the words into written संस्कृत prose order, called अन्वय. The following is the typical अन्वय of a संस्कृत prose sentence. |
1. Vocatives – The first vocative, or another word, heading a sentence should be accented (4.3:). |
2. Relative clause – A correlative word heads the clause, which follows the same order as a main clause below. |
3. Connective to previous sentence – If enclitic, it follows first non-enclitic word of the sentence or clause. |
Main Clause: |
4. Correlative – If employed, heads the clause. |
Subject: |
5. Subject pronoun. |
6. Subject adjective – Including noun in genitive case related to the subject noun. |
7. Subject noun (or passive voice Agent in instrumental). |
Predicate: |
8. Predicate pronoun. |
Predicate adjective/noun (7.7.1:) – May proceed the subject if the copula “is” is omitted. |
Or |
9. Adjective of the predicate object – And nouns in oblique cases related to the predicate object. |
Predicate object (or passive voice object in nom.) – Indirect-obj. then direct-obj. |
10. Adverb – Sometimes (including interrogatives) placed at or near the beginning of the sentence. |
11. Verb. |
For Example (using the English words in the Saṃskṛta order, to better show the ordering) | |
English | → “The subject is a hot.” |
Saṃskṛta | → “hot7 subject6 [is].” |
English | → “And, Subu, that smart boy studies his Saṃskṛta lessons thoroughly.” |
Saṃskṛta | → “Subu1, that5 and3 smart6 boy7 his Saṃskṛta lessons9 thoroughly10 studies11.” |
English | → “The cat will eat the food, if the door is closed.” |
Saṃskṛta | → “If door is closed2, cat7 food9 will eat11.” |
English | → “The food is eaten by the cat.” |
Saṃskṛta | → “By cat7 food9 is eaten11.” → If converted to active voice, “Cat7 food9 eats11.” |
English | → “He gives two cows (direct object) to the Brāhmaṇa (indirect object).” |
Saṃskṛta | → “To Brāhmaṇa9 two cows9 [he] gives11.” |
a. | A word or phrase the author wishes to emphasize is often placed at the beginning of the sentence, or in a long sentence even at the end. The above order is only the most prevalent in occurrence. An author’s style, harmony of sounds, and word emphasis will vary this order. In giving the अन्वय of verses in the Aruna Coursebook, the above order is generally followed, unless the meaning is better brought out in a modified order. |
b. | If the subject is a pronoun it may not be employed since its indication of 1st 2nd or 3rd person and the number, is inherent and understood in the finite verb form. |
c. | The copula अस्ति “is,” unless the tense or mood has to be expressed, is generally omitted. When omitted, the predicate adjective or noun often precedes the subject, e.g., “cold [is] the night.” If what is being predicated bears any emphasis, then the verb भवति “is” is actually used, instead of an omitted अस्ति. |
A common complaint from native English language students is why not directly reorder the संस्कृत words into English prose order, since that is the end result they want and the संस्कृत prose order seems too foreign to be of much help at this struggling time. The answer is—what first looks like a shortcut now, will severely stunt one’s progress from now on. Progress comes when the student can glimpse the meaning of the verse as one reads it.
Even संस्कृत verse is often close to संस्कृत prose order. Usually there is also a संस्कृत commentary available that will help tremendously. But that commentary will be in prose order, so one will have to struggle reordering each of its sentences to eventually understand the original verse.
The lesson, then, is to bear with it. संस्कृत अन्वय will pay-off in short order. It is also the order of all my lesson sentences in the Aruna Coursebook, so the student is going to get beat up with it anyway. As we work our way through those lessons, think of the master Star WarsTM character Yoda (the संस्कृत word for warrior is योध, in our case, a Sanskrit warrior) whispering, “Backwards talking I now am.”
7.3: The Article1. | There is no indefinite article “a” or definite article “the” in संकृत. When translating, these may be freely added to render a flow to the English sentence. |
2. | In संकृत the sense of the indefinite article “a” may be rendered by एक “one” or कश्चिद् “some one” in some contexts. Similarly a demonstrative pronoun, when used with its referent may be rendered by the definite article “the,” e.g., “the sound (सः शब्दः)” |
1. | Collective words have a plural meaning whether inflected in sg. or pl., e.g., लोकः sg. and लोकाः pl. can both mean either “the world (of people)” or “people.” |
2. | A masc. du. may express a male and female of the same class, e.g., “parents (पितरौ 6.40:).” |
3. | Plural is sometimes applied to a single person (or even his/her two feet) as a mark of respect, e.g., “Thus says the revered teacher Śaṃkara (इति श्रीशंकराचार्याः m. pl.).” |
4. | Plural is sometimes applied to the speaker, like the English royal “we,” e.g., “We (= I or we) do not know (न विद्मः 1st pl.) which of the two is better for us.” |
5. | The name of a country or state within India is inflected in plural, being really the name of its people. In the singular, the name of the people often denotes the king of the country. |
6. | Some nouns, or specific senses of nouns, are used only in the plural, e.g., आपः f. “water” (3.16:), वर्षाः f. “the rainy season,” दाराः m. “wife,” पितारः m. (lit. “fathers”) when it means “ancestors.” |
Adjectives and pronouns take the same gender, number and case as their expressed or understood referent substantive. The rules of agreement for all declined and conjugated words in person, gender, number and case are in general the same as in English, except for the following: | |
1. | When a du. or pl. verb refers to two or more different persons (1st 2nd 3rd), the 1st person verb is preferred to the 2nd or 3rd, and the 2nd person to the 3rd, e.g., “You and I go (गच्छावः 1st du.).” |
2.a. | When a du. or pl. adjective refers to two or more different genders, the masc. is preferred with m. and f. substantives, and neut. is preferred with n. and either m. or f. substantives (sometimes this neuter is in singular in this situation). |
b. | Occasionally an adj. or predicate takes the actual gender of the members that the adj. or predicate indicates, instead of the grammatical gender of the substantive word, e.g., “Thinking (m.) of you, the subjects (grammatically fem, but actually mostly the men) have taken to fasting.” |
c. | A participle used in place of a finite verb, which should agree with the subject, instead may take the gender of its object if in close proximity with it within the Saṃskṛta sentence, e.g., “You (m. subj.) have become (जातम् n. pt.) my friend (मित्रम् n. object)” (where जातम् agrees with मित्रम्). |
3.a. | A collective noun in sg. (like “people/लोकः”) takes a verb in sg. When there are multiple subjects, occasionally the verb only agrees in number (sg. or du.) with the nearest subject. |
b. | Similarly, the verb may agree by proximity to a predicate noun, instead of the subject, e.g., “These seven constituent parts (pl. subj.) are said (उच्यते sg.) to form the entire kingdom (समस्तं रायम् sg. pred. noun)” (where उच्यते follows समस्तं राज्यम्). |
4. | An adj. by construction or by meaning can and is frequently employed as a substantive – especially as neuter abstracts and collectives. Some of these words or compounds have only a substantive application, e.g., रथोत्तम “the best of chariots” (where the final member is an adj.) becomes, in this case, a masc. gender noun appropriate to the masc. gender “chariot/रथ.” |
Due to the explicit nature of संस्कृत verb inflections with 1st and 2nd persons, personal pronouns are far less employed than in English. | |
1. | भवान् “your Honor,” the polite form of त्वम् “you,” takes the verb in 3rd person. The plural form भवन्तः (fem. भवत्यः) frequently has a singular sense (7.4.3:). |
Like for personal pronouns, the demonstrative pronouns are often not employed as the subject of a sentence, unless required for clarity, emphasis, or meter. | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1. | एतद् and इदम् refer to what is near or present (= “this”) (4.4:), एतद् being more emphatic than the other. Both may be employed agreeing with a subject and a verb in 1st or 3rd sg. in the sense of “here,” e.g., “here (एषः m. nom.) a devotee stands (तिष्ठामि or तिष्ठति).” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
[···pg 92···] | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2.a. | तद् and अदस् refer to what is remote or absent ( = “that”), तद् being more emphatic than the other. तद् has the following special uses: | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
b. | As the correlative in a variety of case relationships to an preceding correlative, e.g., यद्…तद्… “which…, that one…,” यद्…तस्य… “which…,of that one…” These pronouns in neut. sg. nom. may also be used adverbially and as conjunctions, e.g., “Because (यद्) were it not for Me, then (तद्) there would be no moveable or immovable being.” Either of the correlatives may be assumed in the context. | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
c. | With the sense of “the well-known.” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
d. | With the sense of “the aforesaid,” thus also with the sense of the definite article “the” (7.3.2:). | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
e. | तद्, along with the relative pronoun यद्, (and even nouns, adjectives and particles) when repeated refers to an indefinite variety of referents or has a distributive sense, e.g., “By various (तैः तैः) desires,” “whoever (यः यः) be the devotee,” “the objects of each of the senses (इन्द्रियस्य इन्द्रियस्य).” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
f. | तद्, with different pronouns in the same case may express “this/that very same,” e.g., “That very same (सः एव अयम्) group of beings.” “This I (सः अहम्). |
These (4.15:) are not often used, since the genitive of the personal pronouns is more often employed or is understood from the context, e.g., “with [my] mind overcome by miserliness.” |
In active construction, the agent of the verbal action usually is in nom. | |
In passive construction, the agent is commonly in inst., and the object of the action in nom., e.g., “The constituents of nature (गुणैः inst.) perform action (कर्म nom.)” lit. “by the constituents of nature is performed action.” | |
The passive is employed so frequently in संस्कृत that the translator usually must convert it to active for the translation to have the proper flow in the English of today, given its current aversion for the passive. | |
1. | The nom. also denotes the predicate adjective/noun with verbs expressing equation, such as “is, becomes, seems, appears,” and with the passive of verbs of calling, considering, making, etc., e.g., “He is called one whose conduct is useless (मिथ्या-आचारः).” |
2. | The nom. followed by इति may be used in place of the acc. with verbs of calling, knowing, etc., e.g., “That one (acc.) they call kṣetrajña (क्षेत्रज्ञः इति nom.).” |
3. | A substantive used alone and not in a Sanskrit phrase, such as a literary title, is put in the nom. |
Denotes the direct object (and objective complement) of transitive verbs (including those verbs as participles) – “to.” Nom. also expresses: | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1. | Goal of verbs of motion, e.g., “the waters enter the ocean (समुद्रम्).” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2. | Verbs of going may be used with an abstract substantive in acc. expressed in English by either an intransitive verbal expression or “to become” the corresponding adj., e.g., “They are/become completely deluded (सम्मोहं यान्ति lit. ‘go to complete delusion’).” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3. | Length of time or space, e.g., “He learns for a month (मासम्).” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
[···pg 93···] | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4. | Object of desiderative adj. in ॰सु 5.41:, e.g., “For those desiring to attain contemplation (योगम्).” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5. | Object of adj., or even an intransitive verb, with a prefix such as अनु, etc., e.g., “Surrendered (प्र-पन्नम्) to You (त्वाम्).” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6. | Cognate object of intransitive verbs, e.g., “May he rain (i.e., grant) all desires (सर्वान् कामान्).” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7. | For intransitive verbs, the primitive’s subject becomes the direct object in the causative, e.g., “Devadatta (देवदत्तः) sleeps” → “Yajñadatta puts Devadatta (देवदत्तम्) to sleep.” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
8. | Adverbial sense of an adjective (always neut. sg.), e.g., “ever (नित्यम्) indestructible.” |
The indirect object also can be in accusative (optionally in dative) for: | |
1. | Transitive verbs expressing an object (usually a person) “indirectly” affected by the action of the verb, such as those expressing calling, considering, knowing, choosing, speaking, asking, instructing, winning, bringing, leading, etc., e.g., “Who thinks this (एनम् indirect obj.) (to be) a killer (हन्तारम् direct obj.).” “He spoke these words (इदं वाक्यम् direct obj.) to him (तम् indirect obj.).” “Having won the kingdom (राज्यम् direct obj.) from Nala (नलम् indirect obj. of √जि win/defeat).” |
2.a. | Causative of transitive verbs, e.g., “He caused Rāma (रामम्) to learn the Veda (वेदम्).”
If stress is laid on the (primative’s, see 7.29.1:) agent (the direct object), it may be put in inst., e.g.,“The king should cause her (ताम् acc.) to be devoured by dogs (श्वभिः inst.),” Except:instead of “…cause the dogs (शुनः acc. 3.21:) to devour her.” |
b. | When the causative sense of a verbal form has faded, the dat. or gen. of the (primative’s) agent (the direct object) is used instead of the acc. This is generally the case with दर्शय॰ “show” (lit. “cause to see”) and श्रावय॰ “tell” (lit. “cause to hear”), and always with वेदय॰ “make known or tell” (lit. “cause to know”), e.g., “Please show yourself (आत्मानम् acc.) to me (मे dat./gen.).” |
c. | In the passive causative construction, the (primative’s) agent (direct object) may become the nom., the object (indirect object) remains acc., e.g., “Rāma (रामः nom.) is caused to learn (i.e., is taught) (अध्याप्यते) the Veda (वेदम् acc.).”
Otherwise, the (primative’s) agent is put in the inst. and the indirect object put in the nom., e.g.,“The Veda (वेदः nom.) is caused to be learned (अध्याप्यते) by Rāma (रामेण inst.).” |
Denotes the agent (in passive construction – verbal and participial), the instrument or means, or the concomitant – “by” or “with” which an action is performed, e.g., “Like fire (अग्निः nom.) is covered by smoke (धूमेन inst.)”
Inst. also may express(i.e., “like smoke covers fire”). “How will I fight with arrows (इषुभिः).” “He who converses with a friend (मित्रेण).” | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1. | Reason: “by, by reason of, on account of,” e.g., “Or even out of friendship (प्रणयेन).” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2. | Accordance: “by, as, in conformity with,” e.g., “by birth (जात्य).” Especially abstract nouns in instrumental, e.g., “This योग which you have talked about as [the vision of] sameness (साम्येन).” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3. | Price: “with, for, at the price of,” e.g., “A book sold for a hundred rupees (रूपकशतेन).” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4. | Time within which anything is done: “after, within, in,” e.g., “After a long time (महता कालेन) it has been lost.” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
[···pg 94···] | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5. | Way, vehicle, or part of the body by which motion is effected, e.g., “In what direction (कतमेन मार्गेण) have the crows disappeared?” “You will cross over by the raft that is knowledge (ज्ञान-प्लवेन).” “He carried the dog on his shoulder (स्कन्धेन).” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6. | “In respect of,” “with regard to” with words implying superiority, inferiority or defectiveness, e.g., “You excel (your) ancestors (पूर्वात् abl.) in that (तया inst. – devotion).” “Blind of eye (अक्ष्णा).” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7. | “of” or “with” with words meaning need or use – अर्थ or प्रयोजन as interragative or negative, or with pronoun किम् meaning “what is (the use of, gained by)?”, e.g., “What (किम्) is (the use of) wealth (धनेन).”
Similarly is the use of कृतम् “done” (= “away with”) and अलम् “enough of,” e.g.,“Away (कृतम्) with rising (उत्थानेन)” (i.e., “please do not rise”). | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
8. | Certain intransitive verbs govern the inst. with the sense of “with, at, of, by,” such as verbs of rejoicing, laughing, being pleased, satisfied, astonished, ashamed, disgusted, boasting, swearing oath, and √यज् “offer,” e.g., “A person is satisfied even with very little (स्वल्तेन).” “He laughed at it (तेन).” “I swear by Bharata (भरतेन) and myself (आत्मना).” “They sacrifice with rituals that are in name only (नाम-यज्ञैः).” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9. | The concomitant in inst. is often followed by the adverb सह, साकम्, सार्धम् or समम् meaning “with” (even when separation or antagonism is implied), e.g., “Sons of Dhṛtarāṣṭra along with the host of world rulers (अवनि-पाल-सङ्घैः सह) enter into You.”
The following three senses are also applied:“With whom (कैः सह) I should fight.” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10. | To express the accompanying circumstances or the manner in which an action is done, e.g., “Along with [performing their] duties (कर्मणा), King Janaka and others attained freedom.” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
11. | With passive of verbs or participles expressing accompanying, joining, endowing, possessing, and the opposite, e.g., “Endowed with trust (श्वद्धया).” “Bereft of life (प्राणैः).” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
12. | With adj. expressing identity, equality or likeness, such as सम, समान, सदृश or तुल्य, e.g., “Purifier equal to knowledge (ज्ञानेन).” The genitive is also used with these adjectives. | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
13. | Expressing the sense of the locative, e.g., “Dwells in beings (भूतैः)” (MunU.2.1.9). | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
14. | Some adj. and nouns in sg. inst. take adverbial sense, e.g., “That in brief (समासेन) listen to Me.” |
1. | With certain transitive verbs (besides acc. 7.8.A:), w/wo a direct object, such as those verbs expressing giving, telling, promising, showing, sending, casting, etc., e.g., “I give to you (ते dat.) an extraordinary vision.” “I taught this to Vivasvān (विवस्वते).” |
2. | With certain intransitive verbs (esp. without a prefix cf. 7.8.5:) meaning to please, desire, be angry with, injure, etc., e.g., “It pleases me (मह्यम्).” “He is angry at his servant (किङ्कराय).” |
3. | With words of salutation, e.g., “Let (my) salutation be unto You (ते dat.).” |
B. The dative of purpose expresses the end for which an action is done, often equivalent to an infinitive, e.g., “Thus prepare for battle (= to do battle) (युद्धाय).” | |
1. | “(be fit) for, (tend or conduce) to,” e.g., “that one is fit for freedom (अमृतत्वाय).” |
a. | √अस् and √भू also are used in the same way, but are often omitted, e.g., “I appear (सम्भवामि) for the protection (परित्राणाय) of those committed to Dharma.” |
2. | “(be able, begin, strive, resolve, order, appoint) to,” e.g., “Thus resolve to fight (युद्धाय).” |
a. | With the adverb अलम् “sufficient” it is used in the sense of “be able to cope with, be a match for,” e.g., “Hari is a match for the demons (दैत्येभ्यः अलम्).” |
1. | Cause, reason or motive (masc. & neut. only) rendered by the phrase “on account of, because of, through, by or from,” e.g., “A person does not gain actionlessness by not undertaking (अनारम्भात्) action.”
The inst. is also employed in this sense 7.9.1:, which allows the fem.This use of the abl. with abstract neuter nouns in ॰त्व (whereas, ॰ता, being fem., takes inst.) is especially common as statement of logic – often with the possessor, agent or object that the logical statement is about in genitive (7.12:), e.g., “Since [it (अस्य) is] beginningless (अनादित्वात्) and since [it is] without attributes (निर्गुणत्वात्), this (अयम्) changeless, limitless I, though obtaining in the body, does not do action.” |
2. | Comparison: |
a. | With comparatives or words having a comparative meaning, e.g., “Action is far inferior to buddhi-yoga (sameness of attitude) (बुद्धि-योगात्).”
Even with positives (adjectives or adverbs from which a comparative could be made, 6.25:), e.g.,“Since action is superior to inaction (अकर्मणः).” “A wife is dear (वल्लभा nom.) even (in comparison with) the whole world (सर्वलोकात्).” |
b. | With words meaning “other or different,” e.g., “When the seer sees accordingly [to the teaching] that there is not a doer other than the constituents of nature (गुणेभ्यः) and knows [oneself] as beyond the constituents of nature (गुणेभ्यः), then that one attains My nature [called मोक्ष].” |
c. | Allied to the comparative abl. is that used with multiplicative words like “double,” “triple,” etc., e.g., “A fine five times (in comparison with) the value (मूल्यात्).” |
3. | Some adj. and nouns in sg. abl. take adverbial sense, e.g., “For them whose mind is absorbed in Me, I become before long (न-चिरात्) [their] liberator from the ocean that is saṃsāra.” |
1. | With certain verbs: | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
a. | In the possessive sense with √अस् √भू “be,” विद्यते “exists,” e.g., “The unreal has (असतः gen.) no (न विद्यते) being, the real has (सतः) no (न विद्यते) non being.”
The verb “be” may also be assumed in the context, e.g.,“Of what has (यस्य) (all) beings within it.” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
b. | In the objective sense with the intransitive sense of certain verbs such as “have power over, have mercy on, remember about, have trust in, speak of,” etc., e.g., “I am not lost to him (तस्य).” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
c. | As the indirect object (instead of through the dat.) with verbs of giving, telling, showing, pleasing, etc., e.g., “I have showed to you (तव).” “Does he please you (तव).” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
d. | In the sense of agent (instead of through the inst.) with verbs meaning “be filled or satisfied,” e.g., “Fire is not satiated with logs (काष्ठानाम्).”
So also with the pp. पूर्ण meaning “full of” (gen.), or “filled with” (inst.). | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2. | With certain adjectives: | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
a. | In the objective sense with adj. derived from transitive verbs, e.g., “Even the gods are always desirous of seeing (दर्शन-काङ्क्षिणः) this form (अस्य रूपस्य).” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
b. | In the sense of “connected with” with adj. meaning “dependent on, belonging or attached to, dear to, acquainted with, like or equal to,” etc., e.g., “Because I am totally beloved to the one who knows [Me] (ज्ञानिनः) and that one is beloved to Me (मम).” “What is to be known is about [enjoined] action (कर्मणः), about prohibited action (वि-कर्मणः) and about inaction (अ-कर्मणः).” “Similar to that brilliance (तस्य भासः, gen. of भास्).” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3. | With passive participles in the sense of the agent: | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
a. | With past participle (passive) having a present tense sense, formed from roots meaning “think, know, worship,” etc., e.g., “That is considered by me (मम).” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
b. | With potential ps. pt. 6.8: (also inst. 7.9:), e.g., “Hari should be worshipped by me (मम).” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4. | With adverbs of direction in ॰तस् (cf. 6.16: Genitive) or sometimes in inst. ॰एण, e.g., “To the south (दक्षिणतः) of the village (ग्रामस्य).” “To the north (उत्तरेण) of this (अस्य).” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5. | The genitive of time is used in the following ways: | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
a. | With multiplicatives (4.27:) or other numerals similarly used, expressing how often anything is repeated within a stated period, e.g., “He should offer the funeral rite three times a year (त्रिर्-अब्धस्य).” “A Brāhmaṇa should perform at least one (एकम्) severe penance a year (संवत्सरस्य).” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
b. | In the sense of “after” when a word denoting time is put in the gen. (also the abl.), e.g., “After some days (कतिपय-अहस्य).” “After a long time (चिरस्य कालस्य)” (चिरस्य is similarly used alone). | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
[···pg 97···] | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
c. | In the sense of “since” when a noun and past participle in the gen. accompanies an expression of time (cf. 7.14.2:), e.g., “Today is the tenth month since [our] father died (तातस्य उपरतस्य).” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6. | Two genitives may express an option or a difference between them, e.g., “I want to know distinctly the truth of sannyāsa and tyāga (सन्न्यासस्य त्यागस्य च).” “This is the only difference (between) the long-lived [you] and Indra (आयुष्मतः शतक्रतोश्च).” |
1. | The following are related to expressing the place where an action occurs. | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
a. | The partitive sense (cf. gen. 7.12:), e.g., “The one who can see inaction (=actionlessness) in action and action in inaction (=not doing one’s duty), that one is wise among people (मनुष्येषु).” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
b. | The person “with” whom one dwells or stays, e.g., “He lives with [his] teacher (गुरौ).” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
c. | To express “abides by” or “complies with” when used with verbs meaning “stands” or “lives,” e.g., “For the one who has not [mastered] oneself, oneself alone would remain as an enemy (शत्रुत्वे वर्तेत lit. ‘would abide by the nature of an enemy’).” “Remains firm in [one’s] vow of seeking brahman (ब्रह्म-चारि-व्रते).” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
d. | The effect “of” a cause, e.g., “Prakṛti is said to be the cause of the origination of the physical body and [its] instruments (कार्य-करण-कर्तृत्वे).” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
e. | In objective sense with verbs expressing seizing, fastening, relying on or trusting, etc., e.g., “Nor attached to auspicious [action] (कुशले).” “He trusts in his enemies (शत्रुषु).” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
f. | To express “in connection with” (cf. gen. 7.12.2.b:) when used with adj. meaning “acquainted with or skilled in,” e.g., “One learned in grammar (व्याकरणे).” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
g. | A figurative location, such as a quality in a person or thing, e.g., “There is as much usefulness in all the वेद-s (सर्वेषु वेदेषु).”
Related to this, the loc. may be used to express “in the sense of,” e.g.,“The [word] सत् is [used] in (the sense of) being existent (सद्भावे) and in (the sense of) being good (साधुभावे).” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
h. | The time or circumstance an action takes place, e.g., “Being firm in this, even just at the moment of death (अन्त-काले), one attains liberation called brahman.”
In the last example, if the substantive in loc. were accompanied by a predicate participle in loc., it would be a locative absolute (7.14.1.a:).“I appear in every yuga (cyclic age) (युगे युगे).” “In [such] a crisis (विषमे) from where did this despair come.” “There being clarity (प्रसादे), there comes the destruction of all one’s sorrows.” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
i. | The distance at which anything takes place, e.g., “The great sage lives (a distance of) a yojana (9 miles) and a half (अध्यर्ध-योजने) from here.” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
[···pg 98···] | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2. | The following are related to expressing the place where an action is directed. | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
a. | The aim of an action with words expressing striving after, wishing for, choosing, enjoining, being able or fit for, etc., e.g., “Nor do I have longing towards the result of action (कर्म-फले).”
A predicative loc. by itself is capable of expressing fitness, e.g.,“If you are incapable even in [this] continued practice (अभ्यासे).” “Sovereignty (befits) a person who is endowed with justice, sacrifice and valor (पुरुषे नय-त्यागे-शौर्य-सम्पन्ने).”
The loc. is sometimes used with verbs that do not in themselves imply an aim, to express the object gained as the result of an action, e.g.,“They argue over a piece of land (क्षेत्रे).” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
b. | The reference of an action (grammatically, knowing is also considered an action), rendered as “about, relating to or regarding,” e.g., “This wisdom regarding knowledge [of reality] (साङ्ख्ये).” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
c. | In objective sense (cf. gen. 7.12.2.b:) with nouns expressing desire, devotion, regard, friendship, confidence, compassion, etc. and their opposites, e.g., “A commitment towards acts of worship, prayerful discipline and charity (यज्ञे तपसि दाने च).” “Unswerving devotion in Me (मयि) through a yoga (vision of identity) in which there is no other.” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
d. | Similarly with adj. or pp. meaning “fond of, devoted to,” etc. and their opposites, e.g., “Attached to result(s) (फले) by the pressure of requirements, that one is bound.” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
e. | The indirect object (cf. dat., gen.) of verbs of giving, etc., e.g., “Is given to a worthy person (पात्रे).” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3. | Some adj. and nouns in sg. loc. take adverbial sense, e.g., “They stand before (प्रमुखे) [us].” |
a. | The pr. pt. सत् “being” is frequently omitted (i.e., is to be understood). Whether considered an absolute construction or simply falling under 7.13.1.h:, it has no effect on the meaning either way, e.g., “When there is clarity (प्रसादे), there comes the destruction of all one’s sorrows.” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
[···pg 99···] | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
b. | The pr. pt. सत् “being” (or its equivalents वर्तमान and स्थित) is often redundantly added, e.g., “At sunrise, when the owls had become blind (अन्धतां प्राप्तेषूकेषु सत्सु).” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
c. | The subject is sometimes omitted, and always omitted, when the participle is used impersonally (in ps. neut. sg.). It is also omitted when the pt. is accompanied by indeclinable words like एवम् तथा इत्थम् इति, e.g., “While there is seen [some part] of the sun (आदित्यस्य दृश्यमाने).” “[This] being so (एवं इति).” | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
d. | The particle एव and the ॰मात्र (at end of a cmpd. with the predicate participle) may be used after the absolute pt. to express “no sooner…than…,” “scarcely…when…,” e.g., “Scarcely had it dawned (प्रभातायाम् एव रजन्याम्), when…” “No sooner had his Honor entered there (प्रतिष्टमात्रे एव तत्र भवति), than…” |
Participles
7.15: Participles are used as adjectives, as qualifiers to the main action, and as the equivalent of subordinate clauses. They may express a relative, temporal, causal, concessive or hypothetical sense. This last sense is also expressed by the future participle ॰(इ)स्यत्/॰(इ)स्यमान. In the case of the concessive, the particle अपि is usually added to bring out this meaning. E.g.,1. | Any adjective, including a बहुव्रीहि cmpd. (6.39:), may be employed as if it were a participle, where the pt. सत् “being” may be added, but is often, especially with the बहुव्रीहि, omitted, e.g., “(Being) free from the opposites (निर्-द्वन्द्वः), one is effortlessly freed from bondage.”
Additionally, each of the participles have the following peculiar usages: |
1. | Similarly construed are the negative of verbs meaning “to cease” with a pr. pt., e.g., “The lion did not cease (i.e., kept) killing (व्यापादयन् न उपरराम) the animals.” |
2. | With verbs expressing an emotion such as “to be ashamed,” “to endure” the pr. pt. may indicate the cause of the emotion, e.g., “Are you not ashamed [of] speaking (ब्रुवाणः) thus?” |
1. | The passive of intransitive roots may be used impersonally (i.e., in ps. neut. sg.), otherwise its pp. has an active sense, e.g., “I (मया inst.) stood (स्थिताः neut.) there for a long time.” “Therefore they abide (स्थिताः) in brahman.” |
2. | Some pp. in ॰(इ)त (but not ॰न) have both a passive and a transitive active sense, e.g., प्राप्त “was obtained” and “having reached,” प्रविष्ट “was divided” and “having divided,” etc. |
3. | Some forms in ॰त can be concrete nouns, e.g., अमृत n. “immortal nectar,” युद्ध n. “battle.” Some nouns and adj. take ॰इत meaning “-ed,” e.g.,रथित “having a chariot” (lit. “chariot-ed”). |
1. | Occasionally the potential passive has a purely future sense, e.g., “You will gain a dispassion for what has been heard (श्रुतस्य) and will be heard (श्रोतव्यस्य).” |
2. | भवितव्यम् and भाव्यम् are used impersonally (in ps. neut. sg.) to express necessity or high probability. The predicate adj. or subst. agrees with the agent in the inst., e.g., “The strength (बलेन inst.) of that animal must be (भवितव्यम्) very great (सु-महता inst.).” |
1. | It may frequently be translated as “in” or “by” with a verbal noun, e.g., “I see no good by killing (हत्वा) my people in [this] war.”
This use represents the original sense of the form as an old inst. of a verbal noun (in ॰तु). |
2. | Like inflected participles, it may express the various logical relations (7.15:) of the latter, and similarly with finite verbal forms of √आस् “sit,” √स्था “stand” or √वृत् “go on” to express continuous action (7.16:), e.g., “[On] getting (प्राप्य) anything pleasant or unpleasnt, he neither rejoices nor hates.” “He is the foremost (अतीत्य वर्तते) of all the townsmen.” |
3. | Some indeclinable participles are equivalent in sense to prepositions (see 6.17:). |
4. | The original inst. nature of the indeclinable participle is preserved in its employment with किम् or अलम् (7.9.7:), and also with accepting a general subject expressed in an impersonal passive construction, e.g., “What [gain accrues] (किम्) to you by concealing (गोपायित्वा)?” “Have done (अलम्) with going (गत्वा) to the forest” (i.e., “do not go to the forest”). “By killing (हत्वा) animals, if thus one goes (गम्यते) to heaven, how does one go to hell?” |
1. | The 2nd and 3rd sg. present indicative of अर्ह् “deserve” may be used with an infinitive in the sense of a polite imperative meaning “please,” e.g., “You ought to act (कर्तुम् अर्हसि)” |
2. | Verbs governing the inf. are put in the passive to give the infinitive a passive sense, e.g., “It is not fit (न युज्यते) to be done (कर्तुम्).” |
3. | युक्त “fitting,” नाय्य “suitable” and शक्य “possible,” when employed with an infinitive, may either agree with the subject or be put in the neut. sg., e.g., “By a devotion in which there is no other [outside of Me] am I in such a form possible (शक्यः) in truth to know (ज्ञातुम्), to see (दृष्टुम्) and to enter into (प्रवेष्टुम्).” “She cannot (न शक्यम् neut.) be ignored (उपेक्षितुम्) when angry.” |
Tenses and Moods
7.21: Present Tense1.a. | The present is used in narrative to express the historical present, and especially to express the durative sense of an “on going” action (which the Saṃskṛta imperfect lacks), e.g., “If out of jest you have been (असि lit. ‘are’) slighted.” “Hiraṇyaka, having taken [his] food, (used to) sleep (स्वपिति lit. ‘sleeps’) in [his] hole.” |
b. | पुरा “formerly” is sometimes added, and the particle स्म (which in the older language accompanied पुरा, and thus acquired the latter’s meaning when alone) is more frequently added, to this historical present usage, especially to start off a narration, e.g., “I formerly (used to) live (पुरा वसामि) in a certain tree.” “In a certain place a weaver named Somilaka (used to) live (वसति स्म).” |
c. | The present is used to express the immediate past, e.g., “Here I have come (आगच्छामि).” |
2.a. | The present also expresses the near future, with पुरा “soon” (a special meaning only with present tense) or यावत् “just” being sometimes added, e.g., “Then leaving the bow, I am off (गच्छामि).” “Therefore I will just send (यावत् प्रेषयामि) Śatrughna.” |
b. | With interrogatives it implies a doubt as to future action, e.g., “What shall I do (किं करोमि)?” |
c. | It may express an exhortation to perform an action at once, e.g., “Then we (will) enter (= let us enter) (प्रविशामः) the house.” |
3. | The present is sometimes used in a potential sense, when accompanying a pot., e.g., “If I were ever to not engage (न् वरेयम् pot.) in action unwearied, the people (would) follow (अनुवर्तन्ते pres.) my path in every way.” |
1. | The perfect, either simple or periphrastic, is properly restricted to the statement of facts of the remote past (i.e., not witnessed by the speaker). The 1st and 2nd sg. are therefore rare. |
2. | The imperfect states past (before today) facts of which the speaker has witnessed. |
3. | The aorist (and the past participles), has the special sense of action completed at the present time “have…or has done…,” e.g., “My desire has obtained (अभूत्) sweet fulfillment.” “I have seen (दृष्टवान् अस्मि) him.” “I (मया) have bestowed (अदायि 5.38.2: aorist passive) the sovereignty on you.” |
4. | With the negative particle मा (cf. 7.24.5:), the aorist normally without the augment (and rarely the impf.) is mostly used imperatively, occasionally as a pot., e.g., “Do not yield (मा गमः lit. “do not go”) to unmanliness.” |
5. | Since there is no pluperfect (expressing action completed prior to a stated or implied past time, such as “he had gone by the time we got there”) in Saṃskṛta, then its sense (to be inferred from the context) has to be expressed by the other past tenses or mostly by in. pt., or occasionally by a pp. with an auxiliary verb (√अस् or √भू “is”) in past tense, e.g., “Vimardaka indeed (already) had departed (प्रातिष्ठत impf.) that very day.” |
1. | The future is sometimes used in an imperative sense, when accompanying an impv., e.g., “Go (यास्यसि fut.), my dear, but first hear (श्रूयताम् impv.) my request.” |
2. | The future may also be used in a potential (subjunctive) sense, e.g., “When your intellect crosses over (व्यतितरिष्यति fut.) the mire of delusion.” |
1. | The 1st persons, survivals of Vedic subjunctive forms, may be translated by “will” or “let,” e.g., “His brother said, ‘Let us play (दीव्याव 1st du.).’” “I will make (करवाणि).” |
2. | The 3rd sg. ps. is commonly used as a polite impv. instead of the 2nd person active, e.g., “Sir, please listen (श्रूयताम्)” (cf. 7.20.1:). |
3. | The impv. may be used, instead of a pot. or bene., to express a wish or blessing, e.g., “May you live (जीव) long.” “May your paths be (सन्तु 3rd pl.) auspicious.” |
4. | It may express possibility or doubt, especially with interrogatives, e.g., “Whether there be (भवतु) poison or not (मा अस्तु), the swelling of a serpent’s hood is terrifying.” “Who on earth would believe (प्रत्येतु) it?” “What should we do (करवाम) now?” |
5. | The negative imperative is expressed with the prohibitive particle मा, instead of न, but it is somewhat rare; it is commonly expressed instead by the unaugmented aorist (7.22.4:), by the potential with न, or by अलम् “enough” and कृतम् “done with” with the inst. (7.9.7:). |
1. | In principle sentences it expresses the following meanings: |
a. | A wish (often with the particle अपि added), e.g., “O that I could see (पश्येयम्) Rāma here!” |
b. | Possibility or doubt, e.g., “Perhaps he may be awakened (बुध्येत) by the lowing of cows,” “The arrow shot by an archer may hit (हन्यात्) an individual, or may not hit (न हन्यात्).” |
c. | Probability, being often equivalent to a future, e.g., “This girl is not likely to (= will not) stay (न तिष्ठेत्) here.” |
d. | Exhortation or precept, e.g., “Do act (कुर्याः) thus,” “One should not sow (न जनयेत्) dissension in the understanding of the unwise.” |
2. | The potential is used in the following kinds of subordinate clauses: |
a. | In general relative clauses the pot. is often naturally translated as a present indicative, e.g., “The one who (यः) sees (पश्येत्) inaction (i.e., actionlessness) in action.” |
b. | In final clauses in the sense of “in order that,” e.g., “Indicate to me the place where I am to live (वसेयम्) (= that I may live there).” |
c. | In consequential clauses in the sense of “so that,” e.g., “[Only] such a burden should be borne that may not weigh down (न अवसादयेत्) a man.” |
d. | In the condition (and the consequence) of hypothetical clauses, with the sense of a possible or impossible condition, e.g., “If I were not to perform (न कुर्याम्) action, these people would perish (उत्सीदेयुः).” |
Derivatives
7.29: Causatives1. | The causative expresses action, whose subject is not the agent of the primative’s action, but at whose prompting the agent acts. |
a. | For intransitive verbs, the agent is in the acc., e.g., “He makes Devadatta (acc.) sleep (देवदत्तं शाययति),” where Devadatta is the one who sleeps (देवदत्तः शेते). |
b. | For transitive verbs, in active construction the agent is put in acc. or inst.; in passive construction the agent is put in nom. or inst. – see 7.8.A.2.a:–.c:. |
2. | The causative regularly takes the आत्मनेपद terminations to indicate that the fruit of the action is for the subject (i.e., the nom. in active voice), e.g., “He gets the mat made (कारयते) (for himself).”
The परस्मैपद terms. would then be used to show that it, e.g., the mat, is meant for another. |
3. | Occasionally the causative is used without the causative meaning, e.g., “He lived in (आवासयामास periphrastic perf. 5.29:) the town.” |
The definitions of the following phonetic and grammar terms are generally from the prospective of the English language. Hence, expressions like “a following,” etc. refer to English prose order. They define the grammatical terms used by Western grammarians to describe the attributes of language in general, and in particular English, sometimes Latin or Greek. The variation from these attributes as pertaining to the description of the Sanskrit language is to be understood instead from the preceding grammar, as there is often not a perfect fit of these terms to this language.
Ablative – A grammatical case that denotes separation, direction away from, and sometimes manner or agency.
Absolute – Designating a sentence construction that is syntactically independent of the main clause, e.g., “all things considered” in “All things considered, that’s the best idea yet”.
Abstract noun – A noun referring to anything which you cannot perceive through your five physical senses. (cf. concrete noun)
Accusative – A grammatical case that denotes the direct or indirect object, the objective complement, or the object of certain prepositions.
Active – Designating a verb form or voice that indicates the subject of the sentence is performing or causing the action of the verb. (cf. passive)
Aorist – A verb tense denoting past action without indicating its completion or continuation. (cf. imperfect, perfect)
Appositive – A construction in which one noun or noun phrase is placed after another to explain it, both having the same syntactical relation to the rest of the sentence. For example in the sentence “Sammy, the cat, sat on the mat”, here “Sammy” and “the cat” are in apposition.
Aspirate – To follow a stop consonant with an audible puff of breath before the next sound begins, e.g., the first “p” in “peep”.
Benedictive – Bestowing blessing.
Cardinal number – A number such as 7, used to indicate quantity but not order. (cf. ordinal number)
Case – A syntactical relationship of a noun, pronoun or adjective to the other words in a phrase, clause or sentence, usually indicated in inflected languages by terminations and in noninflected languages by word order or prepositions.
Comparative – Expressing the intermediate degree of comparison. (see comparison)
Comparison – A modification or inflection of an adjective or adverb to denote the positive, comparative or superlative degree, e.g., “big”, “bigger”, or “biggest”.
Complement – The word or words used after a verb to complete a predicate construction, e.g., “their president” acts as the complement in the sentence “They elected him their president”.
Concrete noun – A noun referring to anything which you can perceive through your five physical senses, as opposed to a quality or abstract idea. (cf. abstract noun)
Conjugation – The inflection of verbs to express person, number, voice, and tense or mood.
Connective – A word, e.g., a conjunction, that connects words, phrases, clauses or sentences.
Copula – A verb, such as “become”, “seem” or any form of “be”, that identifies the predicate nominative or adjective of a sentence with the subject.
Correlative – A complementary word to another word, e.g., the conjunctions “either” and “or”, or the pronouns “he” and “who” in the sentence “He who laughs, lasts”.
Dative – A grammatical case that denotes the indirect object of a verb or the object of certain verbs and prepositions.
Declension – The inflection of nouns, pronouns, and adjectives to express case, number, and gender.
Demonstrative Pronoun – A pronoun, such as “this” or “that”, that directly points out a person or thing. (cf. interrogative, relative)
Denominative – A word, especially a verb, that is derived from a noun or adjective.
Derivative – A word derived from another usually by addition of affixes to a root, stem or a word. (cf. primitive)
Desiderative – A verb form expressing a wish to perform the action denoted by the verb.
Diminutive – Designating any of certain affixes that denote youth, smallness, contempt, and familiarity or affection, such as -“ish” in “yellowish”.
Diphthong – A speech sound beginning with one vowel sound and moving smoothly to a different vowel or semivowel sound within the same syllable, e.g., “oi” in the word “coin”.
Direct object – The word or words denoting the person or thing directly affected by the action of a transitive verb and required to complete its syntactic function. (cf. indirect object)
Distributive – Referring to each member of a set or group individually and separately rather than collectively, e.g., “every” in the sentence “Every good boy deserves a favor”.
Enclitic – Designating a word losing its independent accent in a sentence due to joining with an accented word preceding it. From the Greek enklitikos, “leaning (on the preceding word for accent).”
Final clause – An adverbial clause indicating the purpose, answering the question “what for” or “why”.
Finite – Designating a verb limited by person, number, and tense or mood.
Frequentive – Expressing repeated action.
Genitive – A grammatical case that denotes possession, partitive or source, usually expressed in English by a prepositional phrase with “of”.
Gerund – In English, a noun formed from a verb by affixing “-ing”, e.g., “creating” in the sentence “In creating, the only hard thing is to begin”.
Hiatus – The use of two consecutive vowels belonging to adjacent syllables.
Historical present – The present tense used in the narration of events in the past.
Imperfect – The verb tense that shows, usually in the past, an action or condition as on-going. (cf. perfect, aorist)
Impersonal – Designating a verb or construction used in the third person singular with an indeterminate subject, commonly, in English, with the impersonal pronoun “it” (as “rained” in “It rained”).
Indicative – A verb mood used to indicate that the denoted act or state is an objective fact. (cf. subjunctive)
Indirect object – A grammatical object designating the recipient or beneficiary of the action of the verb, e.g., “me” in “Give me an answer”. (cf. direct object)
Infinitive – A verb form that is not limited (hence “infinite”) by person, number, tense or mood, usually expressed in English with a preceding “to”, e.g., “to go” in the sentence “He needs to go”.
Inflection – The change in the form of a word, usually by affixes, to indicate a change in grammatical or syntactical relation, such as the declension of nouns or the conjugation of verbs.
Instrumental – A grammatical case in certain languages used to express means, agency or accompaniment.
Interjection – A word, phrase or other sound that expresses an emotion, e.g., “Ouch!”
Interrogative – Designating a word or construction used in asking a question.
Intransitive – Designating a verb or verb construction that does not require a direct object to complete its meaning. (cf. transitive)
Locative – A grammatical case or construction in certain languages that denotes the place or time of the action or state denoted by the verb.
Main clause – A clause, also called an independent clause, in a complex sentence that syntactically can stand alone as a compete sentence. (cf. subordinate clause)
Mute – A stop in phonetics. (see stop)
Nominal – Of or relating to a noun or to word group that functions as a noun.
Nominative – A grammatical case that denotes the subject of a finite, active verb (as “I” in “I wrote this”) and the words identified with the subject, such as “glad” in “I am glad”.
Noun – A word used to denote a person, place, thing, idea, quality or act.
Oblique – Any grammatical case except the nominative or vocative.
Onomatopoeia – The formation of a word, such as “buzz” or “thud”, that imitates the sound of what it denotes. (Onomatopoeic adj.)
Ordinal number – A number indicating position in a series or order, e.g., first or 1st. (cf. cardinal number)
Participle – A non-finite form of a verb that is used with an auxiliary verb to indicate certain tenses, e.g., “baked” in “The beans were baked”, or used independently as an adjective, e.g., “baked” in “baked beans”.
Particle – Any of a class of words, such as a preposition or conjunction, that has no inflection.
Partitive – Indicating a part of a whole.
Passive – Designating a verb voice used to indicate that the grammatical subject is the recipient or effect of the action of the verb. (cf. active)
Patronymic – A name derived by suffix or prefix from the first name of one’s father or a paternal ancestor, e.g., “Jackson” as “the descendent of Jack”, or “Macdonell” as “the descendent of Donell”. Called a metronymic if derived from the name of one’s mother or a female ancestor.
Perfect – A verb tense expressing action completed prior to a fixed point of reference in time (past, present or future). In English there are three perfect tenses: present (or simple) perfect, pluperfect (or past perfect), and future perfect. (cf. imperfect, aorist)
Periphrastic – Constructed with a roundabout expression, called a periphrasis, by using an auxiliary word rather than an inflected form, e.g., “it did ring” instead of the inflected “it rang”.
Positive – Expressing the uncompared degree of comparison of adjectives or adverbs. (see comparison)
Predicate – The part of a sentence or clause that expresses something about the subject and usually consists of a verb with or without objects, compliments or adverbial modifiers.
Predicate adjective – An adjective used in the predicate that describes the grammatical subject.
Predicate nominative – A noun or a pronoun used with a copula in a predicate that is inflected in the nominative case and is identified with the grammatical subject.
Preposition – A word in a construction that indicates the relation of its object to some other part of the sentence, e.g., “at”, “by”, “in”, “to”, “from”, “with”, and “with regard to” or “concerning”.
Primitive – A root, stem or word from which another word or inflected form is derived. (cf. derivative)
Radical – A word stem or root with no affixes.
Reflexive – (1) Designating a verb, denoting action upon the subject, having an identical subject and direct object, e.g., “saw” in the sentence “He saw himself in the mirror”. (2) Designating a personal pronoun compounded with “-self” that can be used as the direct object of a reflexive verb.
Relative pronoun – A pronoun that introduces a relative clause and agrees in number and gender with its antecedent, a usually preceding noun or a demonstrative pronoun or clause, while its grammatical case comes from its use in its own clause.
Relative clause – A dependent clause introduced by a relative pronoun, e.g., “who laughs” in the sentence “He who laughs, lasts”.
Root – A word stem or base from which other words are formed by prefixes and suffixes.
Sibilant – A consonant characterized by a hissing sound (like “s” or “sh”).
Stem – The part of an inflected word to which an affix has been added.
Stop – A consonant produced with a complete obstruction at some point and then sudden release of the passage of breath. In English, these are “p”, “b”, “t”, “d”, “k” and “g”.
Subject – A noun or noun phrase in a sentence that denotes the doer of the action or the receiver of the action in passive constructions, and usually is the topic that is described or identified.
Subjective complement – A noun, noun phrase, or adjective used in the predicate with an intransitive verb that qualifies the subject, e.g., “sick” in “He had fallen sick”.
Subjunctive – A verb mood used to express a contingent or possible action or state, as one that is not a fact but is feared, desired or doubted. (cf. indicative)
Subordinate clause – A clause, also called a dependent clause, that cannot stand alone as a complete sentence as it depends on the meaning of the main clause and that functions as a noun, adjective or adverb within the complex sentence. (cf. main clause)
Substantive – A word or group of words acting as a noun (used to denote or name a person, place, thing, quality or act).
Superlative – The extreme degree of comparison of adjectives and adverbs. (see comparison)
Transitive – Designating a verb or verb construction that carries the action from the subject to a direct object required to complete its meaning. (cf. intransitive)
Vocative – A grammatical case that denotes the person or thing being addressed.
Voice – The grammatical relation (active or passive) between the subject and the action expressed by the verb.
This bibiography is for the entire Aruna Sanskrit Language Series.
Antoine, R. 1972. A Sanskrit Manual: For High School. Calcutta: Xavier Publications.
Apte, V. S. 1973. The Student’s English-Sanskrit Dictionary. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass.
—1978. The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass.
—2001. Sanskrit-Hindi Kosha. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass.
Aruna, A.K. (2012). The Aruna Sanskrit Grammar Reference. Palm Desert, CA: Upasana Yoga Press.
—(2012). The Aruna Sanskrit Grammar Coursebook: 64 Lessons Based on the Bhagavad Gita Chapter Two. Palm Desert, CA: Upasana Yoga Press.
—(2012). The Bhagavad Gita Dictionary. Palm Desert, CA: Upasana Yoga Press.
—(2012). The Bhagavad Gita Sanskrit Key: Verse-by-Verse Grammar & Vocabulary. Palm Desert, CA: Upasana Yoga Press.
—(2012). The Bhagavad Gita Reader: Sanskrit/English Parallel Text. Palm Desert, CA: Upasana Yoga Press.
—(2012). The Sanksrit Reading Tutor: Read It, Click It, Hear It! Palm Desert, CA: Upasana Yoga Press.
—(2012). The Bhagavad Gita: Victory Over Grief And Death. Palm Desert, CA: Upasana Yoga Press.
—(2012). Patanjali Yoga Sutras: Translation and Commentary in the Light of Vedanta Scripture. Palm Desert, CA: Upasana Yoga Press.
Bhattacharya, T. 1967. Sabdastoma-Mahanidhi: A Sanskrit Dictionary. Varanasi: Chowkhamba Sanskrit Series Office.
Danino, M. 2000. The Invasion That Never Was. Mysore: Mira Aditi.
Feuerstein, G., Kak, S., & Frawley, D. 1995. In Search of The Cradle of Civilization. Wheaton, Ill.: Quest Books.
Kale, M. R. 1960. A Higher Sanskrit Grammar. Delhi: R.M. Lal.
Lal, B. B. 1950-52, 1955. Excavations at Hastinapura and Other Explorations in the Upper Ganga and Sublej Basins.
—2002. The Sarasvati Flows on: The Continuity of Indian Culture. New Delhi: Aryan Books International.
Lucus, G. (Director) 1977. Star Wars. United States: 20th Century Fox.
MacDonnell, A. A. 1966. A Vedic Grammar for Students. Bombay: Oxford University Press, Indian branch.
—1975. A Sanskrit Grammar for Students. London: Oxford University Press.
—1976. A Practical Sanskrit Dictionary. London: Oxford University Press.
Monier Williams, Sir. 1960. A Sanskrit English Dictionary. Oxford: Clarendon.
—1976. A Dictionary, English and Sanskrit. Delhi: Moltilal Banarsidass.
Panini 1997. Asthadhyayi: Padaccheda-Vritti-Vartika-Tippani-Sahita. Varanasi: Chaukhambha Orientalia.
Patanjali. 1970. The Vyakarana-Mahabhashya of Patanjali. Bombay: Bombay Sanskrit Series.
Ram Bhanot, A. 1975. Shrimad Bhagavad Gita with Amritavarshini Tika: Part 1 & 2. Delhi: Motilal Banarasidaas.
—1976. Shrimad Bhagavad Gita with Amritavarshini Tika: Part 3 & 4. Jalandar: Raj Publishers.
Ramasubba Sastri, Pandit S. 1966. Kridantarupamala. Madras: The Samskrit Education Society.
Sankaracarya 1983. Srimad Bhagavad Gita Bhasya of Sri Samkaracarya: With Text in Devanagiri & English Rendering, Translated by Dr. A.G. Krishna Warrier. Madras: Sri Ramakrishna Math.
—1988. Srimad-Bhagavad-Gita: Sankara-Bhashya Hindi-Anuvada-Sahita by Sri Harikrisnadas Goyandaka. Gorakhapur: Gita Press.
—2006. Bhagavadgita: with the Commentary of Sankaracarya, Translated by Swami Gambhirananda. Kolkata: Advaita Ashrama.
—2006. Srimad-Bhagavad-Gita: Padaccheda Anvaya. Gorakhapur: Gita Press.
Satwalekar, Dr. Pandit S. D. 1971. Sanskrit Self Teacher: Part 1 through 18. Pardi, Gujarat: Swadhyaya Mandal.
Speijer, J. S. 1973. Sanskrit Syntax. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass.
Srivatsankacharya, Sri. Pt. V. 1971. Avyaya Kosa. Madras: The Samskrit Education Society.
Swami Dayananda Saraswati 2006. Bhagavadgītā: Home Study Course. Coimbatore: Arsha Vidya Gurukulam.
Swami Swarupananda 1972. Srimad-Bhagavad-Gita. Calcutta: Advaita Ashrama.
Vishor, K. 1992. Gītā Prakāśa. Kalakatta: Sritrilocana Jnana-Vijnana Samstha.
Whitney, W. D. 1973. Sanskrit Grammar. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass.
The index first covers Sanskrit terminology. These are grammatical terminologies, as well as the vocabulary of exceptionally formed words and of commonly used indeclinables and other word lists in this book. The English terminologies cover the grammatical forms in this book. Terminologies are noted with the rule number in which they are cited.
Sanskrit Terms
अ-, 2.20:, 4.8:, 5.35:English Terms
‘Abides by’ by locative, 7.13.1.c: